Teri Sati voc Th Vd) re t sy Vag nore a doa AO rt oui ape eA avy vert Pent Wy Patras eb eh am ae ey haem Veaee ay ‘viery tata Sie Sao Demarini: vee Dank ene Rew Oe STE T OILS eth Sout oo SRC EK Yh) eee oo ‘* SOLOMON ETN, Seb bw ks @ be eee eh oee : eect oeertt be TL VAST ieee arort aoe oer vee ie ee oe Ny oe) est Nien, Mi arate wearers tert oot) rape tie eae bom co i Le 4 We lhekeprae eter etait) penionant? Anion? fst Thiet rh eh erst ce te tetes Ae pperets Pe ere anh peeteny Un T Lt trans Siblelaees eee ae ’ SOE eee Repro e mut: ™ Ae hee: ATA Aa ya Soon ah io ereeasarnsee ae! Dearie Te weer ey aipTatarin orien, Darlene: tes fo teatac ete wi on mayb te StS rth Yt ey PaOCUCODES A: 7 ~ Boor Nearer a mite Cotes prater arenes oor ae i Ane aha pete rer or mans Some tea veeee tear rateer ye errno L ae Sans he pease, pam Semen gy tometer ert Pores ale bewe a Ayton tome eee ae a heen ame sserere ot spin ese eT prep ees oo bameete OTS he By me way tenner tt cot t POS rE rEMaEe PEC Shiela Hee OS bys ceprpeal rohan BM" Racists abe OUSori F Wuiiseh ee aba d bs SUOLASIG rte erie st aw vay bare andies 2 vane barbara arse ible Borie init eI Ve ea awe ees eee . . Seren ke bee ee ae eek ek Bur Cones piv wre ay begeayay to Ck ese arb >. & ne ory oo hye tetiea sleet See nue mathe age pM aoe hie ys [ae ab er tta: ip ion * Poe at alae 9 at “para e tow ge et: ‘ore peee ee ee Skewers ae * Se, rirerers Rhpeests a ener prea res eranabarane aire: mae Ora NIRIANTT Sires areas tales ™ rrasinesarsrenmian ec” Tiare brenteren. 9 errr ens Venetemoens bys poees MLE o eererereecttts are toas ties Hire: Sse char OCT hota he teenth Sa teepeptenient ese mescrten Sieceabeee PAs pte te sete hs iar Sieyeet oo Wake CUS etree Tecpeteme tata tte She Bebe Et Bet tees Siem pres sThrerme Arete Ste tety ye he OT oy We Sete matpee teres tate EME poaretnae tc Seer ae) be Re Sete r heme eee ia ate tS ee mete SS el yeretetes . prereset Srnt ae he tet CULE ada Serom dapat 2 theps b sib tered amar we aettnerel nes bes Mog eraryeve oot < Waele e ee crass Tasinstoracerenere ren eeetes tRutasivaeeererereren parean an deatal aver teleanaatetetareggtereavend arerere tana ener aner arat Eee ELE Aa ele eter cie vet Foti taee Ss seactien eneerer sas RR eacslecs ive sters omega tees Tai ol aeenaronatare ree atacniel toa resares "ytacacaua’ a Men bi he te artearthengea?! WAAAY RAIA AAR RAR ABPEPRRE SO AL AE -__- \ ov catia amt |e | come, cn | | ENN NS NOR A x on ah in i PA\, A ARRRPRAn aa Re erence peeseeeeeit ~~. pea maAae —WV =~ ~V ~RAaeaAARRR Asan Aaananrw PAPAS A \AAAAAAATY alae len, a aa aN Ay VAAAEe PARRA naan ane nal, VVAINO YN = ERS SS NSN RAR Nae oo FN ae ae NINES NS So ow on AA AAAAZ - ce alms YA AAA DARA = SA SARA AAA AAAS f A | { * A a ee A yaeE aN BER AANA A AAA AA \q| penewornne tener cy = { NAA A aé EA pannacanaccetonencescamapanpenee ag ar ra é eS alana maAnaeaaaans 2222 AARARAA me ask a . RAAA dana SancicaaetSNaNennanamannaan RRA RRRAA ve Rm NN NNN ey" 5 A AAR ABRARABRAAA Ana a RA ARARL si ee S\N AANA AAA - )») ) ) alalalaintl Vt tt lalaalnaaan ee ARRARAm a . SPAR ~ BARA een ne nalaa ane P PRR A ay ea ee UB | \ AR PR ee — RRAARARAAH- oN ee a = AN FF saanaaannnnene”’ ane OaaRAAAaae AAPA ARACARSAAPE NE NI ES BS WY) MARARAAR AAAI Oooo AAARAAAIA AR A A AAAS ar A \ AAMAR nano = 225 2AAARRERARaoA AN APRPOPAPREY AAR AAS aA AA AAR AA AANA AA AAA \ } aaa Wy Ree amaaacs AANA An lala | AAA RAR ARRAS AAAARAREF AARAAAAA RA | poetry Creams aaa ARAARAAACAR ps0 AA a a alanine =a = > AD Anne ~ A ANAS AAA RN a2 = eh Yay S, =~ NAA PR — : VA" RBAARAS AAA ARARARA RB fm ER ARARAAAS = 3 AAARa cocoon a anna aa aaaaannae er ARAAAAA aan a SaAAAAAae AANA ~ (amlam ome) rs | I naAannanaannamannna naan aaa aA mencccan Bee \aamalnalaialaia sa | ppanreeeeer aan EES > Vz i tm gs im RARRREREE E AAAAE DAR ARARRRRARRARRE a RAnaanaaannnann naannannncnennnann OS & oo pnnananaAnn Ane” AYE om ARAARR r | ae AAPA AaRAARRRARRARE ~ RAnnnnnrnnriryy cin Vaaes Sos fe ry Ties! -, NAAR een YY | r ey 7 : i ' 6 = é oh Oy - ¢ > * A ie a . ~~ - ® Pos oe oh he oe - 7 a * «i ay - 7 : : > « >) ie — ha al Pa.DS , ry a | DISCOVERY REPORIS ‘Issued by the Discovery Committee, Colonial Office, London on behalf of the Government of the Dependencies of the Falkland Islands Vol. Ill, pp. i-viii TTTELE-PAGE, List OF CONTENTS AND LIST OF PERSONNEL CAMBRIDGE AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESS E9G2 Price one shilling net at \ DISCOVERY REPORTS VOLUME III Cambridge University Press Fetter Lane, London New York — Bombay, Calcutta, Madras Toronto Macmillan Tokyo i Maruzen Company, Ltd All rights reserved f Great Brit. Cole. A DISCOVERY REPORTS Issued by the Discovery Committee Colonial Office, London on behalf of the Government of the Dependencies of the Falkland Islands VOEUNME TIT CAMBRIDGE Pe WEE WNT ERS YP RES 'S 1932 : te es Char ¥ Be r : ol : F ¥ > - | % . = = 7 i e ave il a iG . PRINTED IN GREAT BRITAIN . 1 ot | mn ' —_ _ ors | ~~, CONTENTS LIST OF PERSONNEL . : : : : ‘ : : : 5 . page vil STATION LIST, 1927-1929 (published 1st January, 1931) INTRODUCTION . : : : : ; : : : : : : ; ; : page 3 R.R.S. ‘WILLIAM ScoreEsBy’, STATIONS 137-433 : ; : : : ; : : : 6 SouTH SANDWICH IsLANDs, STATIONS 1-58 : : : : : ; : ; : 5 Wil Ross SEA, STATIONS I-29 : : : : : ‘ : : ; : : : 5 la SUMMARISED LisT OF STATIONS : : : 2 : : : : : 3 : a2 Pirates I-X : : : ; : ‘ : : : : : : following page 132 THE SOUTH SANDWICH ISLANDS (published 19th November, 1931) By S. Kemp, Sc.D., F.R.S., and A. L. Nelson, R.N.R., with a Report on Rock Specimens by G. W. Tyrrell, A.R.C.Sc., D.Sc., F.G.S., F.R.S.E. INTRODUCTION . ; ; : ; 6 5 é ; : : : : : . page 135 HIsTORY OF THE ISLANDS . : F : : : : : ; : : 7 : 7 136 ITINERARY : : ; : ‘ 3 : : : ‘ P F : : ‘ er DESCRIPTION OF THE ISLANDS. é : : ‘ . ; : : : : ; tA INDEX 3 3 i : ; : ; 3 ‘ : : : ‘ ; : : . 190 APPENDIX: REPORT ON ROCK SPECIMENS. : : d F : : : : : Lon Piates XI-XXXI_. ; : : é E : : ; : ; 5 following page 198 CHART OF SOUTH SANDWICH GROUP . : : : : ; ‘ ‘ ‘ . in pocket at end NEBALIACEA (published 4th December, 1931) By H. Graham Cannon, Sc.D. NEBALIOPSIS TYPICA . ; : : : : : : : : : : ; . page 201 NEBALIELLA EXTREMA : ; é 5 5 : : ' : ; ; z : 20 NEBALIA LONGICORNIS ; ; : : ; : : ; : ‘ : : : 4 Pai LITERATURE : : é ; : : ; : ; : 3 : : : : 5 ORE PLATE XXXII . ; ‘ ‘ : F ‘ ; : F ; ‘ . following page 222 CEPHALODISCUS (published 4th December, 1931) By C. C. John, M.A. INTRODUCTION : : : . . ; : : ; : : j . page 225 SYSTEMATIC ACCOUNT : : : : : : ‘ : : : : : : 2277 INTERNAL ANATOMY . . F : ; . : c ‘ : : : : : a 245 CLASSIFICATION OF THE SPECIES OF CepHaLopiscus WITH A List OF KNOWN Forms . : ees 4 New Data SUMMARIZED . : : : : Fo as : : : ; : ‘ . +259 List oF LITERATURE ‘ : : : 3 ‘ ‘ : : ‘ : : . 259 Pirates XXXITI-XXXVIII_. : : F : ; ‘ , : ; following page 260 CONTENTS vi SPIDERS COLLECTED BY THE DISCOMERY EXPEDITION. Wi SADIE SCRIPTION OF A NEW SPECIES FROM SOUTH GEORGIA (published 4th December, 1931) By W. S. Bristowe, B.A., F.Z.S. ANALYSIS OF THE COLLECTION . 3 5 ; : : ; : : : : . page 263 NOTES ; : ; : ; : x : : F ; 5 ‘ : : 5 202 MOLLUSCA: GASTROPODA THECOSOMATA AND GYMNOSOMATA (pub- lished 4th March, 1932) By Anne L. Massy INTRODUCTION : : 5 : : : é : 0 : c : c . -page 269 List OF STATIONS 270 List OF SPECIES 271 SYSTEMATIC ACCOUNT 272 List OF REFERENCES . : : . Gc ADS, PLATE XXXIX 3 : : : : : ; : ‘ : 3 . following page 296 NARRATIVE OF HYDROGRAPHIC SURVEY OPERATIONS IN SOUTH GEORGIA AND THE SOUTH SHETLAND ISLANDS, 1926-1930 (published 17th June, 1932) By Lieut.-Commander J. M. Chaplin, R.N. SURVEY OPERATIONS IN THE R.R.S. ‘ DIscOvERY,’ 1926-7 . : : : : : . page 299 SURVEY OPERATIONS, SEASON 1928-9 303 SuRVEY OPERATIONS, SEASON 1929-30 318 CONCLUSION 335 APPENDICES . : . : : : : 5 37 Pirates XL-XLIV . : ; : : : : : : : : : following page 344 CHARTS 1-4 . : ; : : : 5 2 : : : : : . in pocket at end LIST OF PERSONNEL January, 1932 DISCOVERY COMMITTEE E. R. Darnley, M.A., B.Sc. (Chairman), Colonial Office Sir S. F. Harmer, K.B.E., Sc.D., F.R.S. (Vice-Chairman), British Museum A. L. Ayton (finance Member), Colonial Office J. O. Borley, O.B.E., M.A. (Fisheries Adviser), Colonial Office Vice-Admiral H. P. Douglas, C.B., C.M.G., Admiralty Sir J. Fortescue Flannery, Bt., M.1.C.E. (Consulting Naval Architect) H. G. Maurice, C.B., Ministry of Agriculture and Fisheries J. M. Wordie, M.A., Royal Geographical Society Secretary: F. H. Harper, M.B.E. Naval Architect: A. Harker, O.B.E., M.I.N.A., F.C.M.S. (of Messrs Flannery, Baggallay and Johnson, Ltd., Consulting Engineers) Technical Officer: H. Horsburgh, A.M.1.C.E., Crown Agents for the Colonies Shipping Officer: E. A. Nattriss, Crown Agents for the Colonies Accountant: E. W. A. Scarlett Clerical Assistants: Miss B. M. Borley Miss W. J. Hope Miss M. E. Jeffries Miss D. B. Meggitt SCIENTIFIC STAFF Director of Research S. Kemp, ‘Sc.D., F.R.S. Zoological Staff N. A. Mackintosh, A.R.C.S., D.Sc. J. W. S. Marr, M.A., B.Sc. J. E. Hamilton, M.Sc. G. W. Rayner, B.Sc. E. R. Gunther, M.A. 105 Wo laleree, 1BSye D. D. John, M.Sc. F. D. Ommanney, B.Sc. F. C. Fraser, B.Sc. A. H. Laurie, M.A. Hydrological Staff H. F. P. Herdman, M.Sc. G. E: R. Deacon, B.Sc. A. J. Clowes, A.R.C.S., M.Sc. Curators: Miss H. E. Bargmann, Ph.D. Mrs M. E. White, Ph.D. Clerical Assistant: Miss S. M. Isaacson LIST OF PERSONNEL Vili MARINE EXECUTIVE STAFF Comdr. W. M. Carey, R.N. (Retd.), Executive officer in command. Captain R.R.S. “Discovery II’ Comdr. T. A. Jolliffe, R.N. (Retd.), Captain R.R.S. ‘William Scoresby’ Sub-Lieut. A. L. Nelson, R.N.R., Chief Officer Sub-Lieut. W. A. Ellison, R.N.R., Chief Officer R.R.S. ‘Discovery I’ R.R.S. ‘William Scoresby’ Sub-Lieut. R. A. B. Ardley, R.N.R., Second Officer Sub-Lieut. L. C. Hill, R.N.R., Fourth Officer R.R.S. ‘Discovery II’ R.R.S. ‘Discovery II’ F. E. C. Davies, Third Officer R.R.S. ‘Discovery II’ Eng. Lieut.-Comdr. W. A. Horton, R.N. (Retd.), Principal Marine Engineer. Chief Engineer RRS. ‘Discovery IT’ D. Roy, R.N. (Retd.), Chief Engineer R.R.S.‘ William G. S. Hunter, Second Engineer R.R.S. ‘William Scoresby’ Scoresby’ A. N. Porteous, Second Engineer R.R.S. ‘Dis- R. Gourlay, Third Engineer R.R.S. ‘Discovery II’ covery II’ G. M. Gibbon, M.B., Ch.B., Surgeon. Boe 99 TS DISCOVERY REPORTS Vol. Ill, pp. 1-134, plates L-X Issued by the Discovery Committee, Colonial Office, London on behalf of the Government of the Dependencies of the Falkland Islands STATION LIST 1927-1929 : ARSON TITS eeseye * JAN 20 831% _ Strona, museF CAMBRIDGE AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESS 1930 Price fourteen shillings and sixpence net [Discovery Reports. Vol. III, pp. 1-132, Plates I-X, December, 1930] DISCOVERY INVES TiGATTONS ro) Levee Ie UA GUINE Sil Sys b QUIEN) CONTENTS INTRODUCTION : : : : ; ; . page 3 R.R.S. ‘WILLIAM SCORESBY ’, STATIONS 137-433 : : : 6 SOUTH SANDWICH ISLANDS, STATIONS 1-58 : : : IT4 ROSS SEA, STATIONS I-29. : : : : : 124 SUMMARISED LIST OF STATIONS : : : 132 PLATES I-X : ‘ : . following page 132 i PRINTED IN GREAT BRITAIN, AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESS, CAMBRIDGE 50E 4 fr pees DISCOVERY INVESTIGATIONS SL AT EOIN ei Sak O27 929 (Plates I—X) INTRODUCTION HE following lists contain particulars of all stations made by the R.R.S. ‘ William Scoresby’ between January 1928 and the 6th of May 1929, of stations made by a member of the Discovery Investigations staff from the whaling factory S.S. ‘Anglo- Norse’ near the South Sandwich Islands from November 1927 to February 1928, and of stations made by another member of the staff from the whaling factory S.5. ‘°C. A. Larsen’ in the Ross Sea from November 1928 to February 1929. Stations made by the ‘William Scoresby’ are entered first and have the letters WS prefixed to their numbers. Those made near the South Sandwich Islands follow (pp. 114-123) and are distinguished as SS 1, SS 2, etc. Finally (pp. 124-131) those made in the Ross Sea are given, numbered RS 1, RS 2, etc. Details of the nature of the data in the lists are to be found in the Introduction (pp. 3-5) of the previous Station List (vol. 1, pp. 1-140) except those noted below. The abbreviations used in denoting the nature of the bottom, now being used by the Admiralty, are as follows: b. blue G. gravel Po. polyzoa bl. black gn. green R. rock br. brown gy. grey S. sand c. coarse h. hard sm. small ca. calcareous l. large Sn. shingle Co. coral It. light Sh. shells Cy. clay M. mud Sp. sponge d. dark Md. madrepore St. stones Di. diatom Oz. ooze w. white faite P. pebbles y. yellow ~ placed above the figure for the sounding indicates that bottom was not reached. Estimation of hydrogen-ion concentration was made by the colorimetric method, cresol red being used as indicator with McClendon’s standards. Phosphate content was again determined by Atkins’ method. It was not possible to make determinations of phosphate content and hydrogen-ion concentration at the time the samples were taken. The date on which the estimations were made is entered in the “‘ Remarks” column after the letter A (analysed), thus A 18. ix. 28, etc. 3 I-2 The following symbols (employed previously) are those used for nets, apparatus, etc. : B Oblique. DC Conical dredge. Mouth 16 in. in diameter (40°5 cm.), with canvas bag. DLH Large dredge. Heavy pattern, 4 ft. in length (1-2 m.). H Horizontal. KT Kelvin tube. Naru Nets with mesh of 4 mm. or 7 mm. (0°16 in. or 0-28 in.) attached to back of trawl. Nao) N 50 50 cm. tow-net. Mouth circular, 50 cm. in diameter (19°5 in.): 200 meshes to the linear inch. N 70 70 cm. tow-net. Mouth circular, 70 cm. in diameter (27:5 in.): mesh graded, at cod-end 74 to the linear inch. N1roo 1m. tow-net. Mouth circular, 1 m. in diameter (3-3 ft.): mesh graded, cod-end of stramin with 11-12 meshes to the linear inch. NCS-T Tow-net of coarse silk, with 16 meshes to the linear inch, attached to dredge, trawl, or other net. OTC Commercial otter trawl. Head rope 80 ft. long (24:5 m.): mesh at cod-end 13 in. (3-8 cm.). V Vertical. To the symbols for the tow-nets (N 100, N 70, N 50) B, H or V is always added to indicate the direction in which the haul was taken. For determining the depths from which oblique nets were hauled, Kelvin tubes were constantly employed. ‘The symbol KT in the ‘‘ Remarks” column indicates their use and where it does not occur it is to be understood that the depth was estimated. Times are expressed on the 24-hour system, the day ending with midnight (0000). The entry under “from” states the time when all the warp was paid out. ‘That under “to” either gives the time when hauling began, or, with oblique nets, the time when the nets reached the surface. When series of vertical nets were taken only the times for the beginning and end of the series are given. The times given are “ship’s time’’, corresponding nearly with local mean time. In order to distinguish hauls which were made when it was dark, those times which fall between sunset and sunrise are printed in heavy type. At the end of the lists (p. 132) will be found a summary of the stations made by the ‘William Scoresby’ with references to the charts on which the positions are marked. — ———————— ——. es a R.R.S. ‘WILLIAM SCORESBY’, STATIONS 137-433 SOUTH SANDWICH ISLANDS, STATIONS 1-58 ROSS SEA STATIONS 1-29 R.R.S. William Scoresby WIND SEA B @ 6. Station Position Date | Hour Sounding Weather gE 2 iS & (metres) 9 9 oR 1S) Direction & | Direction 5B a & = ° oa ca iw 1928 WS 187 | 52° 08’ 00"'5, 54° 55’ 00” W | 8-9 ii | 2050 1538 WSW | 3 SW 3 Onc. || LOOAS5 416-1 WS 138 | 52° 36’ 00” S, 52° 16’00” W | gii | 1700] 3381 WSW. | e5an Wis Vim iied! 0.¢. ggo0 | 6-1 WS 139] 53° 00’ 00” S, 49° 50’ 00” W | oii | 1840 2520 WS 140] 53° 17’ 00" S, 47° 02’ 00” W} 11 ii [1535] 3831 WNW /7-9| WSW | 2 | o.c. 986-9 | 5°6 Remarks Station WS 137 WS 138 WS 139 WS 140 Age of moon (days) 16- 17 7 18 ug) HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS R.R.S. William Scoresby Depth | Temp. (metres) | ° Cent. ° 6:05 Sel) 6:07 10 6:07 20 6:03 30 5°99 40 5°95 50] 5°89 75 | 5°86 100 4°92 150 4°79 200 4:69 4°54 o| 6°55 5 | 674 ste) 6-79 20 6°17 30 6:17 40 6-16 50 6-14 75| 6:03 100 5°84 fe) 6°15 5 4°99 10 4°94 20 4:89 30 4°79 40 | 4°69 50 fe) 3°65 5 3°79 10 | 3°79 20 4:09 30} 4:24 40 | 4:29 50} 4°39 60] 4:39 80 P05] 6 iste aoe ce. p.l. SES _- -_— = N70V —— = oe »”» a — =F ” — aa) s5oV N100B N70B N50 V N100B N70B BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS Depth 500-250 (eae 1000~750 : Length of tow (miles) 100-0 0545 137-0 0616 | 0636 50-0 100-50 250-100 500-250 To omS9o 1000~—710 100-0 1710 2140 } 166-0 2210 | 2230 100-0 1840 50-0 100-50 250-100 500-200 Tom oS, - 161-0 2240 2351 | oor 50-0 100-50 250-90 1645 500-250 750-460 1000~750 100-0 1930 I1I-O 2109 | 2124 colto colt colbo WS 137—140 Remarks obtained successfully on fourth attempt KT KT. Net a little torn high up KT. Net broken away around bucket within 2-4 miles of an enormous iceberg 70 miles long. Many growlers and much loose ice KT WS 140—144 Sounding Station Position Date | Hour (metres) "1928 Ili WS 140] 53° 17’ 00” S, 47° 02’ 00” W cont. WS 141 | 53° 32’ 00" S, 44° 52’ 00” W | 13 ii | 1250] 3520M. WS 142] 53° 33’ 00” S, 42° 03’ 00” W | 14 ii | 0810 220 WS 143] 53° 58’ 00” S, 40° 30’ 00” W | 14-15 | 2135 1719 ll WS 144] 54° 08’ 00” 5S, 36° 10’ 00” W} 19 ii | 0745 279 M. gn. R.R.S. William Scoresby WIND SEA Weather ¥ 3 Direction | = | Direction | § iS cm By NNE 2 N 2 b.c W W f.e NW SW Oo. SW 2 —- fe) oO Barometer (millibars) Air Temp. ° Cent. 998-9 | 6-1 984°8 ggo'8 1003°3 He ye 2°8 _ Remarks R.R.S. William Scoresby WS 140—144 g HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS ae Station | = R k og PO, TIME Length Cae 2~ | Depth| Temp. | g o és AA || (Op : Depth pe < (aetres) Centa| > 7/2 ; oe me ce. p. 1. ea (metres) From | To (miles) WS 140 500 2°28 | 34°43 | 27°52 cont 750 2°19 | 34°57 | 27°63 1000 2°08 | 34°62 | 27-69 1500 LETAD || Sede’ | Te) WS 141 | 21 fo) 5°15 | 33°82 | 26°75 —: _- N70V 50-0 1250 emer Olli 33-02) )20;08 I) 33 100-50 10 APAQN 332921 120:025| ll = 5 250-100 20 | 4°47 | 33°79 | 26°80 et Be » 500-250 BO) |) 453911033: 79) | 20°81) || 1 |) . 750-490 40 | 4°39 | 33°84 | 26°84) — | — | — 55 1000-750 50 4°39 33°84 se — | — — N50 V 100-0 — | 1543 60 | 4:39 | 33°87 | 26-87 | — | — | — | Ni00B)|\ 2 80 2:24 | 33°96 | 27-14| — | — | — ]| N7oB |J Lou 1718 || 1738 S il 100 1-09) 33°99) | 27525 150 0°51 | 34°11 | 27°38 200 1°31 | 34°23 | 27°43 30° 2°17 | 34°42 | 27°51 400 | 269 | 34°59 | 27°60 500 | 220 | 34°59 | 27°65 750 | 2°16 | 34°67 | 27-72 1000 2°03 | 34°77 | 27°81 1500 1°65 | 34°76 | 27°82 WS 142 | 22 ° Bors || S¥e307{0) || PAOHy) || —— || = — N70V 50-0 o810 5 229981) 33279) 202950 ee cee |) » 100-50 10 PROD) || B70) || AOS || — = ||) == || == 96 210-100 | — | 0930 20 PILO{D) || 2121290) || AOA || <= || —= — | N100B |) 2 z 30 | 2-99 | 33°79 | 26-95 Fe | Niro \y 72-2 7p ert 237 |e ae 40 | 2°99 | 33°79 | 26°95 50 | 2°89 | 33°79 | 26-96 60 2°71 | 33°80 | 26-97 80 | 1°59 | 33°96 | 27°19 100 I'1g | 33°96 | 27°22 150 1-81 | 34°14 | 27°32 200 1°69 | 34°25 | 27°41 WS 148 | 22- ) HOG || BOs || 27K || —= |] —— — N70V 50-0 2140 23 5 3°50))|1346001 27-038 |e = 100-50 10 2:8Q)|| 34500) 27.03) |) —— | = = oD 250-100 20 2°89) 34501 ||'27:03) |e —— | = % 500-240 BO 3:89 134505) 27:00 |i » 750-470 40 aso) || Syirols || Ay Aels) || <= || ——= || —— % 1000-710 50 22891345051 27-00) | ne = N50 V 100-0 — | 0002 Goules 70134205 2707)| —— = |) Noo Be 2 80 | 2:59] 34:14 | 27-26| — | — | — | N70B [J tere See Wet : a 100 2°39 | 34°14 | 27°28 150 2°31 | 34°14 | 27-2 200 2°19 | 34°14 | 27°2 300 2°81 | 34:23 | 27°32 40o | 2°89 | 34°35 | 27°41 590 — || sarae 750 | 2°47 | 34°55 | 27°60 1000 2°16 | 34°58 | 27°65 E500 1°99 | 34°74 | 27°79 WS 144] 28 ) 2:67 | 33°52 | 26:76] — | — | — | N7o0V 50-0 0745 5 | 2°79 | 33°49 | 2672 | — | — | 6°80 » 100-50 10 Pra) || Beelsat || OA Lt || —— || —— = 3 270-100 20 2-79 | 33°51 | 26°74] — | — | 6:95 | Ns50V 100-0 — | 0845 30 Zoho) || ayesolgat || eAeea/.k || — || — — |Nr100B a 2 KT 40 2-79 | 33°51 | 26-74 | — | — | 6:92 | N70B 73° Esa ee WS 144—149 R.R.S. William Scoresby WIND SEA ue || c, = : od fe Station Position Date | Hour Sounding Weather Bs BS Remarks (metres) gv | ze Direction | 5 | Direction ae cai & Ries Ges lass ~~ ll, le le WS 144] 54° 08’ 00” S, 36° 10’ 00” W | 19 it cont. 287 NW 4 NW 0.c. | 1003°0| 2°8 WS 145] 54° 00’ 00” S, 36° 00’ 00” W | rg it | 1135 gn. M. WS 146 | 53° 50’ 00” S, 35° 50’ 00” W | 1g ii | 1505 1096 NW 6 NW WS 147 | 53° 50’ 00” S, 35° 50’ 00” W | arii | 2030] 274 M. NW 2 NW — 996-7 | 10-0 2 Ob Ge 992°4.] 1°7 WS 148 | 53° 40’ 00” S, 35° 35’ 00” W | 22 ii |o410 — WNW | 2 | WNW 3009 WNW | 3 | WNW | 3 0.C¢. ggro| 1-7 WS 149} 53° 32’ 00” S, 35° 22’ 00” W | 22 ii |o6r15 gy. M.St. Io R.R.S. William Scoresby WS 144—149 5 HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS Ee Station 3g eed larep P,O, 5 tee TIME Length Remarks 2B | metres)| © Cent. | 8 "loo | of | PH [mem.| ccip1| Gear (metres) |Fon) to | OR WS 144 50 2°81 | 33°47 | 26-70 cont. 60 PEL I0) || SENG) || A072} || — || —— || too 80 1°49 | 33°61 | 26-92 100 ONG \\ eats) || B7Re) || —= || == || 72 150 | 0°34 | 33°95 | 27°26] — | — | 6:32 200 COREIS) || SHIM | 7a ||) ae | am Srey 250 E19) 34527 27534) ae || ae || 4574: WS 145 | 28 fo) apne || SieS3} || Berets) || —— || — Ns5o0V 100-0 1135 5 21Q)|\'33°57)|(20:93)|| — || — | 7:00 | Ni7oV 50-0 10 209 | 33°58 | 26:85 | — | — _ 5 100-50 20 2:07 | 33°58 | 20°85 | — | — | 7:08 3 275-100 | — | 1210 fe) 2-001 /33°50)| 20-649 || —— | — |N100B 5 : a 1:96 | 33°55 | 26°84 | — | — | 7:02 | N70B |{ see 733° | 1350 S eo 50 1°16 | 33°69 | 27-00 Gy!" 90:76) 113327% ||27-°04)|) — || — | 6777 80 0°52 | 33°87 | 27°19 100 ©:2.0)1|133290))|k272 2778 I ll ee O27 B5ON}) 0:59) 34-151) 27°28) = |) = || 5°87 200 nO || SY eAo) || Areva} || —— || —— I oils) 250 12591) 34°45 27°58 = | || 4:23 WS 146 | 28 fo) PEI) || Rar || AAoPG7/ || —— || — —- N70V 50-0 1507 5 noe) || Berg] |) Alot) |) <= || —— |! GEO +p 100-50 10 oie || Seekonk} || AXeteIs || ——= || ——= -- 6 250-100 20 sone) || Severe || eAoeteto) || = 1] —— || Geto) 9 500-250 30 seen || gear its} || Loeteey || —— || — ° 750-500 40 1-19)|'33-49)|| 20:84) ——. |=" || 7-26 1000-750 50 neal |] Serenity || AOey-b || ——> || — — N50 V 100-0 — | 1817 60 0-89 | 33°58 | 26:93 | — | — | 6:96 80 0-19 | 33°81 | 27-16 100 0:16 | 33:97 | 27-29 | — | — | 6-12 150 nT S| | yA || 7S || |) —— || pie) 200/750 | 34:39)| 27°52] — | — | 4:83 309 1°79)| 344911 2759 | — | — | 449 400 | 1°89 | 34°58 | 27-67 | — | — | 3°99 500 | 1°97 | 34°54 | 27°63 | — | — | 4°14 WSO || 2700! /°34-03))27-70 | —— | — 11 3:57 1000 | 1-90 | 34°70 | 27°77| — | — | 3°46 WS 147] o ) 2 AO) |§AB%5 0020252) — N70V 50-0 2120 5 0) || SeeGs) || AoesKo) || |] | Oy 3p 100-50 10 AMY || Belts) || Alorte6) || |] —— — 250-100 20 2:09 | 33°58 | 26:86 | — | — | 660 |] N50V 100-0 — | 23r0 ) 2°10 os) || Adele) || = || —= — | N100B }\ o 3 re 2°03 Bale 26:88 | — | — | 6-70 | N70B |j nee pa desl lata : KE SO || 33:80 60 0°20)||'33:87 27-201 — || — ||| 6:25 80 | 0°19 | 33°95 | 27°25 100 | 0°29 | 33°97 | 27:28 | — | — | 5°91 150 TT 34°20\|(2724'0) ||) —— | — 9) 5-04 200 I-14 | 34°36 | 27°54 | — | — | 4°32 250} 1-30] 34°40] 27°55| — | — | 438 lia Ni eee a 99-0 | 0433 | 0453) § | KT WS 149] 1 ) Oz{o) || Seegpe || AI || — || — — | N70V 50-0 0617 5 1:02 | 33°46 | 26:82 |} — | — | 6:86 x 100-50 10 nO? ||| a¥erolsie || AAoteiy/ || | = ro 250-100 20 0°99 | 33°51 | 26°87 | — | — | 6:66 rr 500-250 30 ORey || seme || AloHe%/ |) —— || — = % 750-500 it WS 149—156 R.R.S. William Scoresby WIND Sounding Hour (metres) Station Position Date Direction Force eS | 8 ee ee cont. WS 150] 53° 23’ 00” S, 35° 15 00” W WS 1514 | 53° 17’ 00” S, 35° 08’ 00” W | 2211 | 1415 3841 WS 152] 53° 12’ 00” S, 34° 52’ 00” W NW 6 WS 153] 54° 02 00” S, 35° 30’ 00” W WNW | 4 WS 154 54° 00’ 00” S, 36° 52’ 00” W NNW | 6 WS 155 | 53° 50’ 00” S, 36° 52’ 00” W WNW | 7 WS 156 53° 40’ 00” S, 36° 52’ 00” W WNW | 7 I2 SEA Direction NW WNW NNW NW NW Force Weather Remarks Barometer (millibars) ° Cent. 1000°3 998°4 R.R.S. William Scoresby WS 149—156 HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS Station Remarks Age of moon Depth | Temp. oy. 2 O; : Pength (metres) | ° Cent. 5 “loo zm. ay —_——— ek iy 0-79 : 1000—750 0°78 100-0 0°53 0°31 o-19 0°13 1°03 1°59 1°88 1°95 1°83 1°58 i 103-0 i 65-0 1215 | 1235 50-0 1420 100-50 250-100 500-250 TS 1000-750 100-0 } 88-0 13 WS 156—163 R.R.S. William Scoresby WIND SEA Remarks sus Sounding ne Position (metres) Weather Barometer (millibars) Station Direction Direction 1928 WS 156] 53° 40’ 00” S, 36° 52’ 00” W | 26i1 cont. WS 157 | 53° 30’ 00” S, 36° 52’ 00” W WS 158 | 53° 20’ 00” S, 36° 52’ 00” W WS 159] 53° 10’ 00” S, 36° 52’ 00” W | 2711 | 1348 3182 1:7 | slight swell WS 160] 53° 00’ 00” S, 36° 52’ 00” W | 27 ii | 1520 gy. M. St. 0. g. I'r | sea conf. WS 161 | 52° 50’ 00" S, 36° 52’ 00” W | 27 ii | 1958 0.g.r. | 999°4| 41 WS 162] 53° 42’ 00" S, 36° 17’ 00” W | 28 ii | 0850 WS 163] 53° 54'S, 38° 18’ W 29 li | 1548 0.q.r. | 9924] 4:4 14 R.R.S. William Scoresby WS 156—163 8 HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS E@ Station 3.8 P.O. ue TIME Length Remarks o~ | Depth} Temp. oy Bisse O, z ae 2 |imetresi| ° Cent, |S “leo | of | PH )mem.|_.5.,] Gear Gees) ea pate WS 156 60 1°37 | 33°68 | 27:03 cont. 80 0°31 | 33°90 | 27°22 100 0:24 | 33°98 | 27°30 150 OS ON SA eal 27,42 200 9°97 | 34°35 | 27°55 Sao 0 NEA I 84-0 0800 | 0820 % KT WS 158] 6 fo) 2255133755 (20:79) — | Nso0V 100-0 1027 5 2.8) (033251) 20:801 = N70V 50-0 10 2445|/33°50)|| 20:00 | | o 3 100-50 20 2 AQ33-50i|(20:01e | — 5 250-100 30 2 A2N\33855 Ol) 20:01" |e | — % 500-250 | — | 1233 ) 2ATHQ3-50N|20:80 |) —— ||) —— — |N100B a ° us Boe 33°52 | 2678 | — | — | — | N70B Tee Ouse | eu e HSE 60 2°39 | 33°56 | 26-81 70 1°87 | 33°62 | 26-91 80 0°38 | 33°78 | 27°12 100 0°19 | 33°90 | 27°22 150 1:09 | 34°20 | 27°41 200 1°57 | 34°32 | 27°47 afore) 1°99 | 34°47 | 27°57 400 | 2°07 | 34°53 | 27°61 500 2°10 | 34°63 | 27°69 ByS159)) 6 pees } 104-0 1355 | 1415 3 KT WS 160] 6 0) 2 AS03325 09 | 20:00) |e — N50 V 100-0 1600 5 ZA || Ye{O| Aor!) || —— || —— — N70V 50-0 10 ZLOy|33250)|-20:03 0) | ee — 5 100-50 20 2°18 | 33°56 | 26°83 | — | — | 6:86 7 250-100 30 ZA Ba5 on 202049 | — % 500-250 | — | 1723 fo) 2°16 59 | 26°37 | — | — | 7-02 | NxrooB || 2 , eS 2°16 an ATS) || — || — | N7o0B |J 2° 1534 | 1554 2 ey 60 2°17 | 33°60 | 26°86 80 1*89 | 33°64 | 26-92 go 0:31 | 33°82 | 27°13 100 SHC) || SeHhe} |] Syerks) ||P —— | | O77 150 piss) || Syicids) || yee |) — | | ay 200 | 1°59 | 34°34] 27°49] — | — | 4°64 300 Me SON 345521237202) |e || O8 400 TOS 2425002700) — saa | acrs 500 reays) || ZVI) || 7R7(@) || —= || =" lI) oy WS 161) 6 NCA } 104-0 | 2004 | 2024} 3 |KT S162) 7 a f 93-0 0858 | og18 3 KT WS 163] 8 fo) Preis) || SH) || AOGyu ||) — |] _ N70V 50-0 1550 5 E80) |)33503)| 20:92) —— ||) || 6:03 3 80-50 10 I-79 | 33:63 | 26:92 | — | — | — | N50V 85-0 — | 1623 20 1-72 ‘60 | 26:90 | — | — | 6:85 | N100B || y an 30 a 33-68 AKO || —= || = — | N7oB |/ ee e732 720 x y 40 1°59 | 33°68 | 26-96 | — | — | 6:90 50] 1°47 | 33°69 | 26-98 60 HONS) || 3773 || Q7RCHE |) ——— | = | ORI) 80 0°70 | 33°82 | 27°14 go O46)|33:80N 7207 elt 10258 15 R.R.S. William Scoresby WS 164—169 WIND SEA cee as : o¢ fe Station Position Date | Hour eee a » | Weather Be as Remarks Direction 5 Direction E a& ac 1928 WS 164] 53° 40’ S, 38° 32’ W 29 ii |1842| 153R. NE 6 NE 6) |Monghrs 992-45 353 WS 165] 53° 44'S, 38° 46’ W I ill |0130 164 NE 4-5 NE 4 f. 987°2 | 2-7 gen. M. WS 166 | 53° 36’ S, 39° 08’ W I iii {0530 153 W 3 WwW 2 | b.c. | 985-9] 3:3 WS 167} 53° 31'S, 39° 22’ W T iii | 0845 740 W 3-5 W 3-5] ©. 986-4 | 3:3 WS 168 | 53° 26’ S, 39° 36’ W Iili |1310] 2496 WxN | 9 | WxN | 6 | 0.q.r. | 985-2] 3:9 gy. M. WS 169] 54° 36’ 00” S, 35° 40’ 00” W | 6 iii 1145 114 S 3 S 3 v.c 993°4 | 83 gy. M. 16 R.R.S. William Scoresby WS 164—169 g HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS oN : £e Station | +5 / Remarks 3~ | Depth | Temp. $ °/ t H P,Os O, G Depth ae Henge = | (metres) | ° Cent. 00 = P mgm! cc. p. 1. ae (metres) ob low p.m.* From To (miles) WS 164] 8 fo) 2 AONl~ S350) || 20:62) | — |N100B 5 Z 5 2:10 | 33°62 | 26-89 | — | — | 7:03 | N70B cui £853) 1983 8 us 10 AGI || See) || AAO) || — > || — _ N50V 100-0 1933 20 2:09 | 33°64 | 26-90 | — | — | 7-00 | N7oV 50-0 30 2:00)|| 33-025 |'20:89)|5 =| ~- ; 100-50 40 1°89 | 33°66 | 26-93 | — | — | 6:95 5 140-100 | — | 2118 50 1°59 | 33°68 | 26-96 Go| 1-18 | 33°75. | 27-05 | — | — | 6-74 80 0:29 | 33°95 | 27°26 100 O:19}|(33;901||27-25 || — || ——||"6:00 140 | 0:24 | 33°98 | 27°30] — | — | 5-90 2°48 | 33°63 S|) 2723,|33758)| 20:85 | — |) — || 690 | N7oV | 50-0 10 2°25 33°59 26:86 a = —— a 100-50 Zoli 2:19) 33°59) 20:80| — | — ||| 6:96 »» 150-100 | — | 0240 Boul (e291 (337591) 20:50) — || — || — || Nizoo BY) 7 , 40 2:19 | 33°58 | 26°85 | — | — | 7or | N70B |f 133-0 0341 | 0404 4 KT 50 2:02 | 33°56 | 26°85 60 0:82 | 33:75 | 27:07 | — | — | 6:62 80 0:29 | 33°87 | 27°19 100 | 0:27 | 33°98 | 27:29 | — | — | 6:09 0°38 | 34:00 | 27°30 | — | — | 6:26 WS 166 | 10 Co) 2°35 | 33°65 5 2-119) 1033-05) |, 20:90))|) —— || — | N70V 50-0 10 215 t33°05)|20:01)|| | — ms 100-50 20 2:56i| 33°05 (26:91) —— | = | — op 140-100 | — | 0613 30 Pra || BAO) || AOXo pi || || — |N100B }) ie 2 ; 40 | 2:09 | 33°68 | 26-93 | — | — | — | N70B |f 97-0 | 0659 | 9719 % |KT 50 2°10 | 33°72 | 26°97 60 2:06 | 33°72 | 26°97 80 0°53 | 33°89 | 27°20 100 O-41 0°78 | 34°23 | 27°46 PASE || exzpt || Aoxsh) || —= || — — Ns50V 100-0 ogol 5 ZY.) || Setepe || ASOe) || —— || —— = N70 V 50-0 10 2°40) |/33-00)||'2.0:90) || ——) ||) — — 5 100-50 20 22481) 33-72)|20:03) ||| —— ||) = — 33 250-100 30 Aviat || Sext7 || ALOrGy || —= |p — = 63 460-250 | — | I0I5 — | net touched bottom 40 Penge || areKafe) |! AQ) || —— || —— — |N100B c 2 50 Be aa aile6ro6 || | — -_ N70B \ 104-0 I115 | 1135 2 KT 60 | 1°49 | 33°73 | 27°01 80 | 0°59 | 33°91 | 27°21 100 0°48 | 33°92 | 27°23 150 0°89 | 34°18 | 27°42 200 1-29 | 34-32 | 27°50] — | — | 4°68 1°89 WS 168] 10 | — = = WS 169} 14 ° 17 R.R.S. William Scoresby WS 169—176 WIND SEA by a : F a8 ss Station Position Date | Hour ee 4 » | Weather es ES Direction 5 Direction 8 ae ae 1928 oe aay es | eae | bee a tee WS 169] 54° 36’ 00” S, 35° 40’ 00” W | 6 iii cont. WS 170| 54° 36’ 00” S, 35° 18’ 00” W | 6 iii | 1424 — S 3 S 3 v.c 993°4| 83 WS 171 | 54° 36’ 00” S, 35° 00’ 00” W | Gili | 1600} 274 R. Bex Nese eaeN alias itoncad 993°6 | 2:8 WS 172 | 54° 36’ 00” S, 34° 50’ 00” W | Oil | 1907 NNE 2 — || CHEE |! Gogo || SH) WS 173] 54° 36’ 00” S, 34° 25’ 00” W | 6-7 |2145 1243 NNE I ~- 0) |/0..c.-m\ || 1993;4)|| 2:2 ili gy. M. sm. P. WS 174] 54° 36’ 00" S, 34° 08’ 00” W | 7 ili | 0123 — NNE I — o | 0.c.m.| 9934] 2:2 WS 175 | 54° 36’ 00” S, 33° 50’ 00” W | 7 1 | 0255 2578 N 3 N 3 0.c 988-0 | 11 WS 176 | 54° 36’ 00” S, 33° 35’ 00” W | 7iii |0720 a N 3 N 3 o.c 988-0 | I: 18 I Remarks Station WS 172 WS 178 | 14- WS 174 WS 175 WS 176 Age of moon (days) 14 14 14 15 a5) 15 15 R.R.S. William Scoresby HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS P.O; ee aor: Savon ot pH eae oe l 60 I-71 | 33°46 | 26-78 80 1°39 | 33°55 | 26°88 100 0°99 | 33°62 | 26-96 fo) PEAS || BY 10) || ACH sh0) || —= || —— = 5 PERIC) || Yareysl || Adkele) || —— || — — IO | 2-09 | 33°64 | 26-90 | — | — | — 20 | 2°07 | 33°65 | 26-91 | — | — | — 30 204511 33°05 | 26:92))|| — |) = 40 203) ||133:66)|/26:92) | — ||| = 50 2°02 | 33°68 | 26-93 60 | 1-99 | 33°69 | 26-94 80 | 1-99 | 33°71 | 26°94 100 ‘OI | 33°82 | 27°12 50 E78) || Heys || ales 200 | 0°85 | 34:25 | 27°47 250 | 1°17 | 34°41 | 27°58 ON 82245) 13377701, 20-925) |) Balin? 95)1|' 33,091 |120:91 ayaa ||| a 10 PAPA || Be o}s) || PAOHONE || —— |) = 20 Pew | eke ots) | PXerons || —= |] _= 30 Pe) || Bests) || Aopoyi || <= || — = 40 2249133608 1:20:02) (alee = BORN E891 1536 7902703) | a aa 60 I-00 | 34:02 | 27-28 80 | 0°84 | 34°09 | 27°34 100 I'II | 34°16 | 27°38 150 I°I5 | 34°16 | 27-38 200 2°19 | 34°42 | 27°52 300 2°09 | 34°49 | 27°59 400 | 2:09 | 34°53 | 27°61 500 | 209 | 34°63 | 27-69 fo) (9) || GYOEY || AAaHeh6) || —— ||| — = 5 WOES) || BCI) || AOS) |} ——— |]! aya 10 TOE || ero) || eo} || <= || — 20 | 1°44 | 33°53 | 26°85 | — | — | 7°04 30: |) 1:33) 3375512088 |) — | | — 40 1:32)((33-55 | 26:88 || — ||| — | 7:06 50 TO) |h33-04) | 20:06) | |) ae aa 60 | 0°79 | 33°78 | 27°09 | — | — | 679 80 0°81 | 34°11 | 27°36 100 0°79 | 34°18 | 27-42 | — | — | 5°89 150} 1°37 | 34°27 | 27-45 | — | — | 4°98 200 | 1°49 | 34°34 | 27°950| — | — | 4°66 300 | 1°98 | 34:48 | 27°58] — | — | 3°98 400 | 1°84 | 34°58 | 27-67 | — | — | 3°90 500 | = 1°85 | 34°67 | 27°74 | — | — | 3°99 BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS N100B N70B 19 Depth \ J 109-0 100-0 50-0 100-50 250-100 500-250 + 102-0 J } 102-0 100-0 50-0 100-50 250-100 500-250 j 103-0 } g8-o TIME 2001 0130 0305 0553 0731 1451 1749 1745 2021 2300 ooI2 0150 0431 0613 0752 WS 169—176 Length Remarks | of tow (miles) 2 |KT 2 |KT 2 |KT 2 KT 2 |KT g | KT WS 177—184 R.R.S. William Scoresby WIND SEA Sounding Weather Remarks Date | Hour (metres) Barometer (millibars) Station Position Direction 1928 WS 177 | 54° 58’ 00” S, 35° 00’ 00” W | 7 iu WS178|10 miles SE of Cooper] 7 ili Island, South Georgia WS 179 | 55° 08’ 00” S, 35° 20’ 00” W | 7iii | 1833 WS 180] 55° 18’ 00” 5, 35° 10’ 00” W |} 7 iii |2130] 150M. WS 181 | 55° 25’ 00" S, 35° 00’ 00” W | 8 ili | 0035 8 iii | 0315 878 WS 182] 55° 30’ 00” S, 34° 50’ 00” W o715 1048 0830 WS 183] 55° 36’ 00” S, 34° 40’ 00” W | 8 iii WS 184] 55° 12’ 00” S, 37° 50’ 00” W | 8 iii | 1907 20 R.R.S. William Scoresby WS 177—184 HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS Station TIME Length Remarks of tow From To (miles) Age of moon Depth| Temp. P,Os O, (Gla Depth (metres)| ° Cent. ° ; pane ce. p.1. (metres) 1339 | 1400 touched bottom. KT 1545 WS 179 | 15 many icebergs in vicinity 5 16 Colbo colto 50-0 100-50 250-100 500-250 750-520 1000-759 100-0 16 colo WS 184] 16 Colne Colpo 21 WS 185—195 R.R.S. William Scoresby on Sau eae : == | ee eS ee Sounding Weather Eze Yo Remarks Station Position Date | Hour (metres) 9 9 ee E oO Direction | & | Direction | % Ps} 5° : 2 28 55° 06’ 00” S, 37° 30’ 00” W 54° 55 00" 5, 37° 10’ 00" W | 8ili | 2224 = = fe) = o | 0.c.m, | 1007:2 | 2°8 54° 50 00" S, 37°05’ 00” W 1007°2 1007°2 54° 42" 00” Ss 36° 55' 00” WwW 53° 30’ 00" S, 38° 35’ 00” W 1005°4 55 miles NW of Bird I,J roiii }orrs 2158 — ° — Oo) || (0m. || t00K:2)3°3 S Georgia 65 miles NW of Bird I, S Georgia From 200 — fo) — fo) 0.¢. 99770] 28 54° 22’ 06"S, 38° 30’ 00” W | 10-11 | 2045 m. (3) to lll — 54° 08" 18” S, 38° 26’ 42” W 53° 42’ 00” S, 38° 28’ 00” W From _ _- fo) — (o) Opies || serosa} || ea) 53° 23'00"S, 37° 10’ 00” W | 11-12 | 1445 to ill — 53° 03/00" S, 36° 52’ 00” W From — ESE 33 ESE 2 Cc 1004'2 | 2:2 54°00’ 00"S, 34° 45’ 00” W | 12-13 | 1800 to iii — 53° 42’ 00”S, 34° 10’ 00” W 22 R.R.S. William Scoresby WS 185—195 HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS Station TIME Length Remarks —<$<—_ | OoO7 From To (miles) Age of moon Depth] Temp. - Depth (metres) } ° Cent. 00 el Gear (metres) V'86-6 | | oe \ | 86-0 r+ I1Q—O 100-0 50-0 100-0 50-0 100-50 250-100 500-250 Dae) 1000~750 net very slightly torn f 110-0 KT 27 consecutive hauls (A-AA) each of 15 mins. duration. Sun- set 1839; sunrise 0543 KT 23 consecutive oblique hauls (A—-W) each of 20 mins. duration. Sunset 1835; sunrise 0545 26 consecutive oblique hauls (A—Z) each of 20 mins. duration. Sunset 1834; sunrise 0546 H co a) - eo w ia) i, 7 - \o pas nN = i) w a / / Nv N Lend N Nv N w Nv / / i=} =) > a ° - ) 77) / / / i; ° 7) ° > 23 WS 196—199 R.R.S. William Scoresby SEA Sounding Position Hour (metres) A Direction Station Direction 1928 14 iv | 1640 235 WS 196] 54° 36’ 00” S, 38° 38’ 00” W gn. M. WS 197] 56° 00’ 00” S, 40° 50’ 00” W | 17 iv | 0500 2492 WS 198 | 57° 30’ 00” S, 42° 52’ 00” W | 19 iv | 1300 3775 ExN WS 199] 58° 10’ 00” S, 44° 10 00” W | 20 iv | 1025 3813 gn. gy. M. 24 Weather Remarks Barometer (millibars) slight NW swell 1003°9 | — 0:3] v. heavy swell 992°7 | 0-6 |slight swell 991°7 | — 1:7 | slight swell R.R.S. William Scoresby HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS WS 196—199 BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS Station P.O; mgm. p.m.* Depth| Temp. (metres)] ° Cent. Age of moon WS 197 | 27 WS 198 | 29 TIME Length Remarks of tow (miles) Depth Gear (metres) From To N70V 50-0 3 100-50 200-100 100-0 1717 N50 V - 103-0 100-0 50-0 100-50 250-100 500-265 71595590 3 1000-800 N 100 B || ear N70B || 3 100-0 50-0 100-50 250-100 500-250 750-500 a 1000-740 N 100 B N70B |/ 109-0 100-0 50-0 100-50 250-100 500-250 Taleo le I000~750 - LIg-O 25 WS 199—202 R.R.S. William Scoresby WIND SEA aa |S is ; oa Gas Station Position Date | Hour eae 9 3 Weather Be Ba Remarks Direction | 5 | Direction] § ae ae ey ea 1928 al Saale Se a ile eal a WS 199] 58° 10’ 00” S, 44° 10’ 00” W | 20 iv cont. WS 200 | 59° 05’ 00” S, 46° 32’ 00” W | 21 iv | 1215 1317 SW 4 SW I 0.c. | 1007°7 | — 1°7 gn. M. WS 201 | 59° 57’ 00" S, 50° 12’ 00” W | 22 iv | 1840 4134 NW I NW I fe 999°7 | — 2:2 WS 202 | 60° 23’ 00” S, 52° 52’ 00” W | 23 Iv | 1830 3987 SW I — fo) b. 980-2 | — 1-1 | station gn.M worked in sm. P. open lane inside pack ice 26 Station WS 202 Age of moon (days) 3 R.R.S. William Scoresby HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS P.O; Depth | Temp. 0 Oo (metres)| ° Cent. S "Too cu pH Saar ce. p. 1. 300 | 1°51 | 34°62 | 27°73 400 | 1°52 | 34°69 | 27°77 500 | 1°59 | 34°70 | 27°78 750 I-10 | 34°69 | 27-80 oO OAT 343047 2732)|| ae oe ||| on 5 O59) 34500 27:29) | me 10 (©0601 /§34°018)|:27-20) ||| —— | — 20 O.0481| 24-008 1827-20) || — 30 (0:04)|(24-010|127:20) | —— || = 40 (0:62) 134-01) |(27-20)|| —— | —— — 50 Or52a (Is 4com 127-30) | | 60 Oss ONS 4501" (27-20) — 80 ©: 04534-20127 445 || — 100 0°66 | 34°30 | 27°51 150 | 0°99 | 34°46 | 27°63 200 1-22) |/ 34253) 27-07 300 | 1°58 | 34°64 | 27°74 400 | 1°59 | 34°64 | 27°74 500 | = 1°55 | 34°69 | 27°77 750 | 1°31 | 34°68 | 27°79 1000 0°92 | 34°70 | 27°83 OR O:0511/34°05 127530) ) 1 ye 5 || = xe || eyicery || yectss || —— || —= || = M05 |—=10-03)1134205.|||27°39)|6 =) — 20 | — 0°62 | 34:06 | 27°39 | — | — = 30 | — 0-61 | 34:06 | 27-39 | — | — = 40 | — 0:61 | 34°07 | 27-40 | — | — — 50) || 10-68 94207) 27-40) || — ||| — = 60 | — 0-61 | 34:07 |.27-40 | — | — — 80 | — 0°53 | 34:10 | 27-42 | — | — = 100 | — 0°35 | 34°18 | 27-48 150 | — 0°47 | 34°34 | 27°62 200 | — 0°56 | 34-41 | 27°67 300 | — 0°39 | 34°56 | 27°79 400 | — 0-28 | 34°57 | 27°79 BINS) || CP) || BES) | TTS) 750 0-01 | 34°60 | 27-80 1000 | — 0:06 | 34-61 | 27-82 1500 | — 0°17 | 34°65 | 27°85 Onl —et-OSN33°70) |f27-2 0 |e | By |] = ots) || sy3e7Rs) || ape || || = NOW |i-——2-009))|1 33-78) [27-20 | —— || — = 20 | — 1°69 | 33°78 | 27-21 | — | — = BON 1:0451'33779) 27:22) — | = | AON — ESA 33°83//27°25 | — | — | 50 | — 1-49 | 33°87 | 27:26] — | — | — Coq 23751135595 27733)|\ a= | = | 70 | — 0°86 | 34:09 | 27-42 | — | — = 80 | — 0-71 | 34°14 | 27°47 100 | — 0-61 | 34:21 | 27°51 150 | — 0°47 | 34°33 | 27°60 200 | — 0°49 | 34°33 | 27°60 300 | — 0°61 | 34°53 | 27°78 400 | — 0°51 | 34°56 | 27°80 500 | — 0-26 | 34-61 | 27°82 750 | 0°02 | 34°64 | 27°84 1000 O-01 | 34°65 | 27°84 1500 | — 0-19 | 34°65 | 27°85 BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS Gear N 100 B || N70B |/ N 100 B || N70B |{ 2, Depth (metres) 100-0 50-0 100-50 250-100 500-250 750-500 1000-730 Okie 100-0 50-0 100-50 250-100 500-250 750-500 1000~—750 995° 100-0 50-0 100-50 250-100 500-250 oom 1000-750 TIME From To 1220 — 1420 1444 | 1505 1847 — | 2255 2322 | 2344 1845 — | 2115 2135 | 2210 2240 | 2315 2335 | 2352 Length of tow (miles) cole eolto colo WS 199—202 Remarks KT AE ship moved pack ice ” ship moved KT to clear WS 203—206 R.R.S. William Scoresby SEA 3e . og Station Position Date | Hour eeene Weather eS Remarks Direction Direction eis) 1928 WS 203] 57° 42’ 00” S, 53° 12’ 00” W | 25 iv | 1845 4259 heavy swell br. gy. M. St. b.c. | 1012°6 | — 2:2] v. heavy swell WS 204] 56° 27’ 00” S, 54° 22’ 00” W | 26 iv | 1900 3388 br. gy. M. 4207 NWxN}| 1 27 IV | 1715 y- gy. M. WS 205] 55° 49’ 00” S, 56° 18’ 00” W 28 iv }og5o| 389 G. | SWxW]| 1 | SWxW] 1 WS 206 | 54° 43’ 00” S, 58° 02’ 00” W Station Depth (metres) HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS ONT Ww nN 54 5°5 5°6 5°6 5:60 55 55 5 54 Nomo Noe e) LY YC) Co tus Gig SACs WrAINMHMNO NS HOMO OM Ww +S R.R.S. William Scoresby WS 203—206 BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS Depth (metres) TIME Length Remarks From 100-0 500-250 USS 250-100 100-50 1000-750 50-0 N r00 B || N70B || 93° 100-0 500-310 250-100 100-50 (eee 1000~750 gI—-o 100-0 50-0 100-50 250-100 350-250 1915 2112 of tow To (miles) 2245 2346 WS 206—213 Station Position R.R.S. William Scoresby WIND Sounding (metres) Weather Barometer (millibars) Direction Direction WS 206] 54° 43’ 00” S, 58° 20’ 00” W cont. WS 207 | 54° 12’ 00” S, 58° 40’ 00” W WS 208] 54° 10’ 00” S, 59° 38’ 00” W WS 209] 54° 08’ 00” S, 60° 40’ 00” W WS 210] 50° 17’ 00” S, 60° 06’ 00” W WS 211 50° 17’ 00" S, 60° 06’ 00” W WS 212] 49° 22’ 00” S, 60° 10’ 00” W WS 213] 49° 22’ 00” S, 60° 10’ 00” W 0800 1230 9940 100 G. SWxs 161 gn. S. SW — SW 174 gn. S. 242 gn.S.M.P. 249 gn.S. M.P. 249 SE gn.S. M.P. 239 gn.S. MP. 30 Air Temp. ° Cent 4:2 Station Depth | Temp. (metres) | ° Cent. Age of moon (days) 5°89 50 39% 60 5°85 80 5°85 100 5°83 150 5°52 200 5°27 300 5°06 andl 6:02 5 6:02 IO 6-02 20 6:02 30 6:02 40 6-02 50 6-02 60 6:02 80 6:02 fo) 6:22 5 6:22 10 6:22 20 6-22 30 6:22 40 6:22 50 6-22 60 6:22 WS 209 | 10 o) 6-21 5 6:21 sf) 6°23 20 6:23 30 6:27 40 6-27 50 6-21 60 6-21 || ° Soo 34°10 34°10 34°10 34°14 34°16 34°16 34°20 34°23 34°34 34°97 S107, 34°07 34°07 Sy 34507) 34°07 34597 34°97 34°06 34:06 34:06 34:06 34:06 34:06 34:06 34:06 34:06 34:06 34:06 34:06 34:06 34°07 34°97 34°07 34°97 34°07 34°07 33°88 ot 26°87 26°87 26°88 26:92 26°93 26:97 27°03 27°07 26:84 26°84 26°84 26°84 26°84 26°84 26°84. 26°84 26°84. 26:80 26:80 26°80 26:80 26°80 26:80 26°80 26:80 26°80 26:80 26:80 26:80 26:80 26:80 26°81 26:81 R.R.S. William Scoresby HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS pH P.O; eaa8 O, Depth aaa? ccnp. Ll: Gear (metres) = — N50 V 100-0 = = N70V 50-0 = = +) 100-50 = — | N100B || —|— | N7BIj 75° N50 V N70V N 100 B || N70B |/J N50 V N70V N 100 B || N70B |/{ 70-0 70-0 65-0 80-0 80-0 36-0 TIME To From — | 1500 1600 — | 2044 2125 — | 0040 Length of tow (miles) H Ny ie) co colto colto Oe OI21 4 WS 206—213 Remarks KT. Heavy rain snow-squalls trawl hitched; did not fish properly trawl hitched; no catch WS 214—223 R.R.S. William Scoresby Station WS 214 WS 215 WS 216 WS 217 WS 218 WS 219 WS 220 WS 221 WS 222 WS 223 WIND SEA Position Date | Hour cca 9 9 Direction | § | Direction | 5 ez ez 1928 48° 25’ 00" S, 60° 40’ 00” W | 31 v | 0630 208 SE I SE I fades. 1100 219 Hie Gla Sk 47° 37’ 00” S, 60° 50’ 00” W | 31 v | 1500 219 SE I SE 2 f.gn.5. 1720 146 f.gn.S. 47° 37' 00" S, 60° 50’ 00” W | 1 vi |0645) 219f.S. E 3 E 3 1030| 133f.S. 46° 28’ 00” S, 60° 18’ 00” W | xvi | 1530 146 E 3 E 3 f.gn.S. 1820 146 f.gn.S. 45° 45°00" S, 59° 35’ 00" W | 2vi |0630| 311.5. E 3 E 3 1020] 247d.5. 47° 06’ 00” S, 62° 12’ 00” W | 3 vi |0630] 116d.5S. SE 2 SE 2 0955) 114d.58. 47° 56’ 00” S, 62° 38’ 00" W | 3 vi | 1530] 108 br. S. E 4 E 3 1740 | 104 br. 5. 48° 23’ 00" 5, 65° 10’ 00" W | 4 vi |0735 76 N 3 N 3 br. S. M P.1.St. Sh 1000 91 br. 5S. M P.1.St. Sh 48° 23' 00” S, 65° 00’ 00” W | 8 vi | 0615 100 NECGES | P4e eNie Ese: c. br. 5 Sh. 0930 106 c. br. S Sh. 49° 13’ 00" S, 64° 52’ W 8vi | 1445 114 NE 5 NE 4 c. br. S. Sh. 1715 II4 c. br. S. Sh. 32 Weather Barometer (millibars) 1028-9 1027°6 1024°3 1023°8 1018-9 IOI7"I 1004'8 1007°7 1009"I 1002°2 Air Temp. ° Cent Ww No) 44 3°9 3°3 3°9 3°9 3°9 das 72 Remarks slight E swell mod. E swell slight E swell mod. N swell heavy NE swell v. heavy N swell R.R.S. William Scoresby WS 214—223 HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS Station TIME Dength Remarks ———_———| of tow From To (miles) Depth | Temp. o/ O, Depth cc. pel. Gear (metres) Age of moon (days) 208 0630 | 0650 208-219 | Ogio trawl torn trawl hitched; did not fish 219-133 311-247 trawl hitched 100-106 114 II4-114 33 WS 224—235 R.R.S. William Scoresby SEA Sounding Stati iti Rema: Station Position (metres) emarks Barometer (millibars) Direction Direction 50° 18’ 00” S, 65° 07’ W 124 gn. 58. x 5 . . mod. N swell 126 gn.S. 50° 20’ 00" S, 62° 30’ 00” W 71 162 gn. 5. BGs ‘2 |mod. N swell Shee 161 gn. S. Sh. P. 49° 20’ 00” S, 62° 30’ 00” W 144 gn. S. 152 ¢n.S. 51° 08’ 00” S, 56° 50’ 00” W 50° 50’ 00” S, 56° 58’ 00” W 236 Sh. Cc. Ww. 5. 50° 35' 00” S, 57° 20’ 00” W 210 50° 10’ 00” S, 58° 42’ 00” W 50° 10’ 00" S, 58° 42’ 00” W 49° 25’ 00" S, 59° 45’ 00” W 49° 25'00"S, 59° 45’ 00” W 48° 52’ 00” S, 60° 25’ 00” W 47° 56’ 00” S, 61° 10’ 00” W p A e sea conf. 34 Station Age of moon (days) R.R.S. William Scoresby HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS Depth | Temp. (metres) | ° Cent. BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS Gear Depth (metres) 195 195-207 155 155-155 TIME Length of tow (miles) WS 224—235 Remarks trawl clear; did not fish on bottom continu- ously? trawl clear; did not fish on bottom continu- ously? trawl hitched and badly torn catch of trawl negligible ; left bottom with change of depth? trawl badly hitched trawl appeared to have fished properly trawl badly hitched; no catch R.R.S. William Scoresby WS 236—246 WIND Fabs Sounding Station Position Date | Hour (metres) Direction 1928 WS 236 | 46° 55’ 00" S, 60° 40’ 00” W | 6 vii | 1500 “the oes N 1755 | 300 d. gn. S.M. WS 237] 46° 00’ 00" S, 60° 05’ 00” W | 7 vil | 0950 150 N c.br.S.Sh 1235 256 c.br.S. Sh WS 238} 48° 30’ 00” S, 61° 50’ 00” W | 8 vii | 0820 148 NE Cabraoak St. b. Cy 1100 148 CabieiSak St. b. Cy WS 239] 51° 10’ 00” S, 62° 10’ 00” W | 15 vii | 1600 196 W c.d.S 1900 193 c.d.S WS 240] 51° 55’ 00" S, 65° 10’ 00” W | 16 vii | 0845 144 S c.br.S 1100 41 c. br. 5 WS 244 | 51° 55’ 00" S, 65° 10’ 00” W | 16 vii | 1505 143 WSW c. br. S 1700 157 c. br. S WS 242] 51° 06’ 00” 5, 66° 30’ 00” W | 17 vii | 0610 119 WSW 5 Glb tip JE ogt4. 119 Cok te lee WS 243] 51° 06’ 00” S, 64° 30’ 00” W | 17 vii | 1530 144 WSW c.d.S 1740 141 c.d.5 WS 244 | 52° 00’ 00” S, 62° 40’ 00” W | 18 vii | 0645 253 W f.d.S.M 0945 247 f.d.S.M WS 245 | 52° 36’ 00”S, 63° 40’ 00” W | 18 vii | 1535 304 SW d.gn.S. Md.s. P.Sh. 1900 290 d.gn.S. Md.s. P. Sh. WS 246 | 52° 25’ 00” S, 61° 00’ 00” W | 19 vii | 0855 267 SSW c.gn.S.P 1200 208 c.gn.S.P 1250 192 c.gn.S Sh. St. Po 36 Ww Nv 7-8 SEA Direction NE WSW WSW WSW SW SSW Weather Cc. oo i Barometer (millibars) 998-1 1003'5 985°9 9997), 995°8 IOOI*O 1002°7 1006°5 1010°7 1018-4 bio 6-7 I°7 — 06 oy) 3°9 359 Siz Remarks heavy N swell slight NE swell slight NW swell heavy WSW swell heavy SW swell slight W swell slight W swell mod. W swell R.R.S. William Scoresby WS 236—246 g HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS Station =f Deoth | T P.O. O | Deow TIME Length Remarks o~ t. emp. | qo pa. 2 . ept > a2 Genes Cae S “Too ot pH Bae ce. p.1 Gear Gees) noe To as WS 236] 18 ° 6-09 | 33°99 | 26-77} — | — _ DC 272 1508 | 1531 265 6:01 OTC bottle touched bottom ° 6:07 | 33°94 | 26-72 |} — | — — N 7-T Le 295 4-91 | 34°15 | 27-04] — | — = N4T 272-300 | 1608 | 1708 4 NCS-T WS 237 | 1 ) 6-1 “go | 26-69 | — | — — DC 150 fo) IOI — | soundings changed 9 $) || SES 9 5 955 9 145 5:29 | 34:10 | 26-95 | — | — — OTC abruptly 10 minutes ) 6-13 | 33°90 | 26-69 | — | — — N 7-T € 5 - before end of trawl Bolles | a¢o7 | 260) =) ==) 2 | ger || 15°25 |) 2055 || mass NCS-T WS 238 | 20 fo) 6:41 | 33°74 | 26°53 | — | — — DC 148 0830 | 0855 ae OREN SIESTA | ASE | a) a Sone trawl torn away from N Ut 148-148 | 0932 | 1032 4 foot-rope; no catch in NCS_T it or in fine nets WS 239 | 28 ) 5°91 | 33°74 | 26°59] — | — -- DC 196 1613 | 1634 190 5°68 | 33-90 | 26-75 |} — | — —- OTC I) SES |e) ee ee 1708 | 1811 175 | 5°93 | 34°00 | 26-79] — | — | — | Nar | '9"*% 4 NCS-T WS 240 | 29 fo) fe) || eons APPL y || |) = DC 144 0853 | ogio 140 es se ae | || es wee trawl badly hitched; no 2 SS eile Oe Woe (|| ea 5 144-141 | 0942 | 1044 4 catch. NCS-T torn 135 | 5°64 | 33°62 | 26-53] — | — | — | Nq-T |p *44°%4" | 094 ees NCS-T WS 241 | 29 OTC | _ trawl had not fished on Nie | HGS || MR) Re bottom; empty N 4-T WS 242] o fe) (OHA || seis || Aexey) || —= || = DC 119 0625 | 0650 110 6224533 -18) (20-0115 | — OTC | fe) 6:27 | 33°13 | 26:06 | — | — = N7-T |; 119-119 | 0740 | 0841 4 110 6:29 | 33°14 | 26:07 | — | — — N 4-T | WS 243] o fo) Gran || serene || Adwy || = || — = DC | 144 1535 | 1550 140 Hoon || ere || AOA) || —— || — — OTC | P fo) Spey || epee} || tote) || —— || —— = N7-T [ 144-141 | 1616 | 1716 4 F358 G:031195'°45) (20°34). i Naot WS 244) 1 fo) E077 || 3272) || 2oeee) || —= || = — DC 253 0648 | 0733 245 53a 4500 (20:07 |e = OTC | ; Ae | fe) Hone || oe e7e} || Aero || —— |) — = N 7-T 253-247 | 0813 | 0913 4 240 Rey || evicey) || eXeHets) |) <= || — = N4-T WS 245] 1 ° Goo || Sept) || Aeey, || —— || — DC 304. 1540 | 1630 285 537/ || eYkely || Acros |) = || — OTC | fe) BO || se Heq7 || Begs || == || = = N7-T 304-290 | 1705 | 1810 4 285 55244134200) 20:92) || — || — = N 4-T WS 246] 2 ° Reafi|| gers || oR || = || == || — DC 267 0900 | 0930 260 SOS) || Sie Rale) || AeRsze || —— |) — — OTC | Lon fo) BoA, || Sete) || ova | = | — aes | 267-208 | rors | 1115 4 200 “41 qo) || As e7k0) |) = |) = oe DIAS 359) 7 ae aes peel soee 37 ; WS 247—253 Station Position 1928 WS 247 | 52° 40’ 00" 5, 60° 05’ 00” W | 19 vil 20 Vil WS 248 | 52° 40’ 00” 5, 58° 30’ 00” W WS 249] 52° 10’ 00” 5, 57° 30’ 00” W | 20 vii WS 250] 51° 45’ 00” 5S, 57° 00’ 00” W | 20 vii WS 251 | 52° 02’ 00" S, 55° 05’ 00” W] 19-20 Vill WS 252 52° 20’ 00” S, 52° 22’ 00” W | 20 viii] 1700 WS 253] 52° 40’ 00” S, 49° 40’ 00” W | ar viii] 1300 R.R.S. William Scoresby SEA Sounding (metres) Direction Direction f.gn.S. 1578 2962 3895 Weather Barometer (millibars) 1006-2 AY] Remarks § Station ae 2 WS 247] 2 WS 248] 3 WSs 249] 3 WS 250] 3 WS 251 | 4-5 WS 252] 5 WS 253} 6 HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS R.R.S. William Scoresby BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS P.O; (een vee S*Too oe De mgm. eae Grau p.m. DLH ) 5°13 | 33°88 | 26-80} — | — — DC 200 5:21 | 33°99 | 26°87] — | — — OTC ° 5°19 | 33°88 | 26-80 N 7-T 235 5:28 | 33°98 | 26-86 | — | — | — N 4-T co) 5:21 | 33°93 | 26-81 | — | — — DLH 160 5:28 | 33°97 | 26°85 | — | — — DC fo) 5:09 | 34:01 | 26:90 | — | — — DC 245 FROG || Zyl) Ape | — || = OTC fo) 5°12 | 34-01 | 26-90 | — | — = N 7-T B05 apd) || Beet |) 7 SEs N4qT fo) 4°50 | 34°17 | 27°09 | 7-92 | 118 | — N50 V 5 4°50 | 34°18 | 27-10 | 8-06 | 134 | — | N7o0V sf) 4°49 | 34°18 | 27-11 | 8-or | 122 | — o 20 4°49 | 34°18 | 27°11 | 8-01 | 133 | — 55 30 4°48 | 34°18 | 27-11 | 8-02 | 122 | — 3 40 4°48 | 34°18 | 27-11 | 8-09 | 129 | — 5 50 4°48 | 34°18 | 27-11 | 7-91 | 112 | — % 60 4°48 | 34:18 | 27-11 | 8-02 | 129 | — | Ni100B 70 4:48 | 34°18 | 27°11 | 7-99 | 124 | — | N70B 80 4°48 | 34°18 | 27-11 | 7-90 | 136 100 4°47 | 34°18 | 27-11 | 8-or | 140 150 4°44 | 34°18 | 27-11 | 8-07 | 136 200 4°41 | 34°19 | 27°12 | 8-10 | 102 see) 4°31 | 34°18 | 27°13 | 7°95 | 93 tOO 4:07 | 34°16 | 27°13 | 7°94 | Tor 500 3°82 | 34:21 | 27:20 | 8-14] 115 75° | 3°09 | 34°18 | 27°25 | 8-00 | 137 ) 3°55 | 34°13 | 27°15 | 8-02 | 127 | — | N7o0V 5 | 3°48] 34°13 | 27°16 | 8:04 | 127 | — ” 10 | 3°68 | 34°14 | 27°16 | 7-99 | 133 | — » 20 3-64) (134-16) |) 27-1 897209) P1277) 5 30 BrOsi 4405) 27218) 7292) iter |) 5 40 3°61 | 34°15 | 27°18 | 8-01 | 125 | — ¥ 50 BGO sdens | 2721 oa|e7290)| ek LO: | N50 V 60 3°24 | 34°12 | 27°19 | 7°95 | 122 | — | N100B 70 3°21 | 34°12 | 27°19 | 77996] 129 | — | N70B 80 3°20 | 34°12 | 27-19 | 8:00 | 132 150 2°98 | 34°12 | 27°21 | 7-96 | 144 200 2°91 | 34°12 | 27°22 | 8-01 | 150 300 2°79 | 34°15 | 27°26 | 7:90 | 166 400 2°61 | 34:19 | 27-30 | 7-90 | 182 500 2°47 | 34:20 | 27°31 | 7:90 | 202 750 | 2°23 | 34°22 | 27°34 | 7°89 | 188 1000 | 2°39 | 34°43 | 27°51 | 7°85 | 190 fo) B77 34203) 27-145 |.6:02) || LO) | — N50 V 5 grat || gyicice) || ag Pay’l |! cestoe || z4e} dy N70V 10 Be7 | 24°13 27204) |Lo:02) rar |) —— ” 20 3°71 | 34°14 | 27°15 | 7°98 | 116 | — 5 30 3°69 | 34°14 | 27°16 | 8-02 | 129 | — % 40 3°68 | 34:14 | 27°16 | 8-or | 136 | — * 50 | 3°65 | 34°15 | 27°17 | Sor | 143 | — » 60 3°63 | 34:16 | 27°18 | 8-02 | 137 | — | NrooB Depth (metres) 172 } 210 | { 210-242 100-0 50-0 100-50 250-100 500-250 USE 1000-750 | os 50-0 100-50 250-100 500-250 750-480 1000-750 100-0 j 140-0 100-0 50-0 100-50 250-100 500-230 750-670 1000-670 102-0 TIME From To 0750 | 0850 1445 | 1507 1755 | 1850 1944 | 2047 2325 | — — | 0221 0439 | 0500 1700 | — — 1945 2143 | 2204 1300) — 1855 1914 | 1935 Length of tow (miles) Cael elite wre WS 247—253 Remarks A 18 ix 28 A 21 ix 28 KT A 24 ix 28 WS 253—256 R.R.S. William Scoresby ; me Sounding Station Position Date | Hour (metres) 1928 WS 253] 52° 40 00” S, 49° 40’ 00” W Jar vill cont. WS 254] 53° 03’ 00” S, 46° 58’ 00” W | 22 vili| 1010 3557 WS 255] 53° 23’ 00” S, 44° 10’ 00” W | 22-23 | 2325 3003 vill gy. M. WS 256 | 53° 42’ 00” S, 40° 33’ 00” W | 23-24 | 2130 4110 Viil WIND SEA Direction WxN WNW 40 Barometer (millibars) ro Ee a) HO Remarks Ho < i) 8 Sy Directions| sys q oa 3 | WxN 2 W 2 | WNW R.R.S. William Scoresby WS 253—256 HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS Station P.O; TIME Length ; Dek of tow (GREE) From To (miles) Depth] Temp. | go (metres)| ° Cent, | 5 /co ee aes Age of moon (days) 80 3°61 | 34-16 . . 140 1914 100 3°58 | 34:16 : ° 130 150 3°56 | 34°16 | 27- : 127 200 3°38 | 34°14 : : 130 329 ZO TAN SASS : : Mars} 400 2°76 | 34°12 : : 139 2°86 | 34°14 | 27° "92 | 135 ZEA ON Sate. : 3 NBS 2°57 3413.9 ; : 1) 7 0°30 | 33°92 : ¢ 145 100-0 A 27 ix 28 0°30 | 33°92 “240 (77: 144 100-50 0°28 | 33°92 24. | 7° 138 250-100 P2743 3592 ; 143 500-250 0°24 | 33°92 ; q r49 USB 0°26 | 33°94 : : 149 1000-750 0:24 | 33794 : : 153 5050 0°23 | 33°94 | 27° "go | 156 L eres 0°22 | 33°94 | 27° "93 | 151 J PLS) || See: : : 144 0°23 | 33°96 | 27° "93 | 165 0°22 | 34°02 c . 167 1°60 | 34:25 : : 190 NS) || Shes i ; ge) 2°11 | 34°37 | 27°48 | 7°94 | 167 2:09 | 34°54 : : 137 2°01 | 34°56 ° : 160 WS 255 | 7-8 0°32 | 33°89 | 27: : 135 50-0 A 28 ix 28 0°38 | 33°89 : A 133 100-50 0°35 | 33°89 | 27° "06 | 133 250-100 0°35 | 33°91 | 27° "05 | 134 500-270 0°34 | 33°92 | 27° "97 | 135 750-480 0°34 | 33°92 | 27° a 136 1000—700 0°34 | 33°92 | 27° "04 | 134 100-0 0°34 | 33°92 | 27° "00 | 141 YAR 0°33 | 33°92 | 27-24 | Sor | 138 ee 0°32 | 33°92 | 27° "00 | 139 0-48 | 33°94 | 27° “gt | 41 1-21 | 34°09 | 27° 84 | 159 1°76 | 34°30 | 27° "84 | 159 2°01 | 34°40 . : 162 2°05 | 34°43 | 27°54 | 7°90 | 168 2°07 | 34°52 ; : 160 1-96 | 34°60 | 27- 87 | 159 WS 256 | 8-9 1-09 | 33°83 . : 156 100-0 A 29 ix 28 1-08 | 33°83 C : 153 50-0 1-08 | 33°83 | 27: 2 153 100-50 1:08 | 33°83 : : 149 250-100 1-08 | 33°83 : 2 152 500-250 1-08 | 33°83 | 27° "94 | 155 750-500 1-08 | 33°83 : 155 1000~780 I-1r | 33°83 | 27° "90 | 155 \eookS r-11 | 33°83 | 27-23 | 7°89 | 155 0°89 | 33°91 | 27° ‘87 | 151 PES) || Seed || ah : 153 I-49 | 34°29 1-84 | 34°49 1°89 | 34°51 | 27° ‘70 | 198 1-90 | 34°55 | 27° "86 | 189 1°78 | 34°61 41 WS 257—262 R.R.S. William Scoresby WIND SEA b> & x : 5 wy ge Station Position Date | Hour are au 2 ‘eat 8 Weather Ee gg Remarks Direction é Direction é as | ° F 1928 ee Caen a edn nen ae WS 257 | 54° 04’ 00” S, 36° 18’ 00” W | 27 vili| 1600 188 NW /|6-7} NW 13-4] b.c. | 1003-5] o:0 WS 258 | 53° 56’ 00” S, 36° 06’ 00” W | 27 viii] 1915 157 NW 5 NW 5 bac 1002"1 | — 0-6 WS 259] 53° 49’ 00" S, 35° 53’ 30” W | 27-28 | 2305 549 WANK |) eo] SRASINIE |) C: 1000°8 | — 0:6 Viii WS 260] 53° 42’ 00” S, 35° 41’ 00” W | 28 viii| 0503 — E I W I b. 999'8 | — 0°6 WS 261 | 53° 34’ 30” S, 35° 28’ 30” W | 28 viii| 0650 3798 ESE I ESE I c 1002°6 | — I°I = E I E I oO. 10049 | — 1°7 WS 262] 53° 27’ 00” S, 35° 17’ 00” W | 28 viii| 1150 42 Station (days) Depth (metres) Age of moon WS 258 | 12 fe) WS 259 | 12- fo) 13 5 WS 260] 13 | — WS 261 | 13 fo) 150 200 300 400 500 122 I000 WS 262] 13 HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS R.R.S. William Scoresby Sy TY 272, SEBS WS 257—262 BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS a Depth TIME Length Remarks eat (metres) = | om BELO From To (miles) N70V 50-0 1610 | — — || AN sess 5 100-50 much stray on wires - I50-II0 N50V 100-0 — | 1658 N 100B || 2 = N70B || 84-0 1728 | 1748 = KT N70V 50-0 1935). — — ||\A 2x28 ~ 100-50 much stray on wires % I50-I10 N50 V 100-0 — | 2025 N 100 B || 2 z N70B |j gI-o 2055 | 2118 3 KT N70V 50-0 2315 | — ae LAN 225 *6 100-50 °¢ 250-100 : 500-250 N50 V 100-0 _— 0130 N 100 B || 2 z N70B |j 103-0 0332 | 0353 3 KT N 100 B |) 2 2 N70B |/ 86-0 0515 | 0535 3 KT N70V 50-0 0700 | — | PAun2xa28 5 100-50 os 250-100 a 500-250 - 750-520 " 1000~750 N50V 100-0 — | I0I5 N100B 2 : - KT N70B } 104-0 1031 | 1051 5 N 100 B || - - 9 KT N70B |{ 85-0 1200 | 1223 3 WS 263—268 R.R.S. William Scoresby WIND Date | H Sounding Remarks ane our) (metres) Barometer (millibars) Station Position Direction Direction 1928 WS 263 | 53° 20’ 00” S, 35° 04’ 00” W | 28 viii} 1320 3511 WS 264] 53° 13’ 30” S, 34° 51’ 00” W | 28 viii] 1840 WwW WS 265 | 52° 40’ 00” S, 37° 05’ 00” W | 29 vili| 1215 WNW 2215 WNW WS 266 | 52° 50’ 00” S, 37° 05’ 00” W } 29 vill| 1415 WS 267 | 53° o1’ 00” S, 37° 05’ 00” W | 29 vili| 1830 WS 268 | 53° 11’ 00” S, 37° 05’ 00” W | 29 vili| 2015 44 R.R.S. William Scoresby WS 263—268 8 HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS Eo Station 38 P.O TIME L h Remarks 2~ | Depth| Temp. | « 25a] | Os : Depth euge Ue ee eee es) Oe | (cree) eet aes WS 263 | 13 o | — 1°65 | 33°87 | 27°27 | 7-94 | 136 | — N50 V 100-0 1320 | — — |A 3x28 5 | — 1°65 | 33°87 | 27°28 | 7-91 | 132 | 7:96 | N70V 50-0 10 | — 1-70 | 33°87 | 27°28 | 7-94 | 133 | — ” LOOSS © 20 | — 1°70 | 33°87 | 27:28 | 7-91 | 130 | 8-02 3 250-100 30 | — 1°70 | 33°87 | 27:28 | 7-90 | 163 | — ' 500-0 40 | — 1°70 | 33°87 | 27-28 | 7-91 | 162 | 7-94 - 500-250 50 | — 1°70 | 33°87 | 27°28 | 7-92 | 160 | — 3 750-500 60 | — ue 33°87 cles ee r45 7:96 < 1000-750 | — | 1630 80 | — 1:69 | 33°87 | 27-28 | 7 169 | — |Nuioo B 5 z 100 | — 1-49 | 33°91 | 27-30] — | — | 7-48 | N70B B70,“ |e720, |) 2730) et ae 150 0°70 | 34°15 | 27°41 | 7°86 | 187 | 5-81 200 | 1-60 | 34°35 | 27°51 | 7°79 | 189 | 4°56 300 1°90 | 34°50 | 27-60 | 7-68 | 189 | 4:11 400 1°70 | 34°58 | 27-68 | 7-71 | 183 | 4:14 500 1-78 | 34°61 | 27°70 | 7°83 | 136 | 4:12 750 1°68 | 34°62 | 27°72 | 7°84] 144 | 4:21 1000 1°50 | 34°69 | 27°77 | 7°88 | 127 | 4:32 I pes 26423 pa } 97-0 1848 | 1908 KT WS 265 | 14 ean } 130-0 1230 | 1250 3 KT WS 266 | 14 o | — 0°78 | 33°89 | 27:26 | 7°81] 117 | — | N70V 50-0 IPAS) || = — |A 3x28 5 | — 0°80 | 33°89 | 27-26 | 7°89 | 150 | 7°69 . 100-50 10 | — 0°80 | 33°89 | 27-26 | 7°85 | 137 | — " 250-100 20 | — 0°80 | 33°89 | 27:26 | 7-90 | 145 | 7°68 500-250 30 | — 0°80 | 33°89 | 27-26 | 7°89 | 155 | — 5 750-500 40 | — 0°80 | 33°89 | 27:26 | 7°87 | 160 | 7-67 " 1000~760 50 | — 0°80 | 33°89 | 27-26 | 7°88 | 160 | — | Ns5o0V 100-0 — | 1640 60 | — 0°82 | 33-91 | 27:28 | 7°89 | 160 | 7-70 | N70B || 5 80 | — 0°82 | 33-91 | 27-28 oe 159 a N 100 B |/ ye BES 2733 5 ist 100 | — 0-82 | 33-91 | 27-28 | 7-90 | 159 | 7-70 150 0:26 | 34:05 | 27-34 | 7°82 | 139 | 7°62 200 1°89 | 34:24 | 27°40 | 7°79 | 142 | 6:38 300 | 1°94 | 34:44 | 27°55 | 7°78 | 149 | 5-12 ACO 2°01 | 34°50 | 27°59 | 7°77 | 158 | 4-40 500 | 2°05 | 34°53 | 27-62 | 7°85 | 144 | 4:06 750 | 195 | 34°66 | 27-72 | 7°85 | 144 | 4:02 1000 1°75 | 34°68 | 27-76 | 7°82 | 144 | 4:18 EET es Rote } 79-0 1845 | 1907 2 KT WS 268 | 14 o | — 1:40 | 33°89 | 27-28 | 7°89 | 125 | — | Ns50V |] 100-0 2020 | — — |A 4x28 5 | — 1:40 | 33°89 | 27:28 | 7°89 | 136 | — | N70V 50-0 10 | — 1-06 | 33-90 | 27:28 | 7-90 | 118 | — * 100-50 20 | — 1:06 | 33°90 | 27°28 | 7-91 | 116 | — % 250-100 30 | — 1:06 | 33-90 | 27°28 | 7-92 | 126 | — . 500-250 40 | — 1:06 | 33°90 | 27-28 | 7°85 | 122 | — %p 750-100 50 | — 1:06 | 33°90 | 27°28 | 7°86] 125 | — 5 750-500 60 | — 1:06 | 33-90 | 27-28 | 7-86 | 121 | — 3 1000-750 | — | 2300 80 | — 1:08 | 33-90 | 27-28 | 7°87 | 121 | — | N7oB }) 2 100 | — 1-08 | 33-92 | 27-30 | 7°88 | 121 | — | N100B pee 232% | 2340 w KT 150 | — O°I5 | 34:05 | 27:37 | 7°86 | 128 200 I°Io | 34°24 | 27°45 | 7°80 | 155 300 | 1-71 | 34°46 | 27°58 | 7-70 | 155 400 | 1°89 | 34°52 | 27-62 | 7°75 | 156 500 | 1°96 | 34°55 | 27°64 | 7°75 | 165 75° | 1°93 | 34°66 | 27-72 | 7-82 | 163 Hsiels) X°74 | 34°79 | 27°77 | 7°79 | 152 45 WS 269—275 R.R.S. William Scoresby WIND SEA ona Ss 6980 ie Position Date | Hour Gasca Weather Barometer (millibars) a. Be aro) Remarks 4 ° uw & =] Station Position Date | Hour ey eae 3 ee 8 Weather ae ed Remarks irection é irection é S& a 1928 ane io (eg cea | ame oe WS 275] 53° 38’ 00” S, 38° 34’ 00” W | 41x cont. WS 276 | 53° 45’ 00" S, 38° 22’ 00” W} 4ix | 1850 2121 NW 2 NW 3 | 0.c.f. | r001-5 | 0:0 | ship rolling heavily WS 277 | 53° 52’ 30” S, 38° 09’ 30” W | 5 ix | 0800 132 NW |4-6| NW 4 Cyt. 993°9 | Iz WS 278 | 54° 23’ 00" S, 35° 52’ 00” W | 12 ix | 1800 238 NW |6-7| NW 6 b. 987:6 | 0:6 1800 — NW |5-10| NW /4-7] 0.q. 99772 | 0-6 |v. heavy sea WS 279 | 54° 23’ 00” S, 35° 35’ 00” W | 13 ix WS 280] 54° 23’ 00S, 35° 18’ 00” W | 17 ix | 1330 234 Station Age of moon WS 276 | 20 WS 277 | 21 WS 278 | 28 WS 279 | 29 WS 280] 4 R.R.S. William Scoresby WS 275—280 HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS Depth (metres) Length of tow To (miles) 1721 100-50 250-100 500-250 US 2135 2220 100-0 50-0 100-50 200-120 124-0 27°27 | 7:88 27°27 We WS 280—286 R.R.S. William Scoresby WIND SEA SCOLeTG heey | | $< ——— Weather Position Hour (metres) Station Direction Direction WS 280] 54° 23’ 00” S, 35° 18’ 00” W cont. WS 281 | 54° 23’ 00"S, 35° 00’ 00” W | 17 ix | 1635 WS 282 | 54° 22’ 30” S, 34° 43’ 00” W | 17 1x | 1810 2597 WS 283] 54° 22’ 00” S, 34° 25’ 00” W | 17 ix | 2300 WS 284] 54° 21’ 45” S, 34° 08’ 00” W | 18 ix | 0615 3640 WS 285 | 54° 21’ 30” S, 33° 53’ 30” W | 18 ix | ro10 18 ix | 1830 4023 WS 286 | 55° 00’ 00” S, 32° 55’ 00” W 50 Barometer (millibars) Remarks R.R.S. William Scoresby WS 280—286 HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS Station Depth | Temp. ; : TIME Length Remarks cmetr es) (ie Cent |e co :| ce. p. 1. Sia OL tow, i To (miles) Age of moon (days) — 0:98 — 1:00 : : .; 200-100 — I:00 . . | — 1:00 af | — 0:98 — 0:98 we93 — 0°85 — 9°43 0°45 g2-0 KT A 10x28 78-0 Kel 100-0 A 10x28 50-0 100-50 250-100 500-250 + ILOO—O 89-0 KT 100-0 A 11x 28 50-0 100-50 250-100 500-250 759-500 1000~780 | 100-0 j 51 WS 286—292 R.R.S. William Scoresby WIND SEA ee | Ser os | §¢ Station Position Date | Hour eS 9 eerste Weather Se Bd _ Remarks Di : u 5 7 2 da Ho irection & Direction é sé a 1928 WS 286] 55° 00’ 00” S, 32° 55’ 00” W] 18 ix cont. WS 287 | 54° 54’ 00” S, 32° 08’ 00” W | 19 ix | 0800 4023 — fo) — fo) 0.c. | 1008-6] 06 | station worked inside light pack ice, a few miles from edge WS 288 | 54° 52’ 00” S, 32° 19’ 00” W | 19 ix | 1410 — N 2 N I Cc: IOII'5 | — 1-7] Station worked just outside edge of pack ice WS 289] 54° 55’ 30”S, 35° 30'00” W | 1x | 1430 311 SWS 7] SWaee|i3=5 b. 1013°3 | o-o | blowing v. heavily— station abandoned WS 290] From 54° 23/10" S, 35° 44’00” W| 1x |2000 = NW 3 NW 3 | o.r.m. | 1016-6 | — 1-1 to 54 12'45"S, 35° 24'30" W] 2x |o4oo = ESE 3 ESE 2 Cs 10175 | — I'l WS 291 | 54° 53’ 00"S, 35° 31’00” W | 2x |0930 283 WS Ws 7 WS WV ns Cc: 1016:6 | 0-3 |v. heavy sea WS 292] 55° 02’ 00"'S, 35° 16’ 40” W | 3x |1500 113 WSW | 3 WSW | 2 oO. 1018-5 | 2:2 | light WSW swell 52 R.R.S. William Scoresby WS 286—292 F HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS Station | 32 g~ | Depth | Temp. | ¢ » . F081, a Depth ne Length ee = |(metres)} ° Cent. | 9 /co uv pH ae ceape!: Gear Gees) Gee nee ae ‘WS 286 150 | — 0-15 | 34:22 | 27°50 | 7°78 | 153 cont. 200 0°18 | 34°43 | 27°65 | 7°78 | 153 300 I-02 | 34°60 | 27°74 | 7-71 | 156 400 I-21 | 34°68 | 27-80 | 7-78 | 153 500 1-22 | 34°68 | 27-80 | 7°82 | 149 750 | 1-01 | 34°70 | 27°83 | 7°81 | 139 1000 0-90 | 34°69 | 27°83 | 7°89 | 135 WS 287] 6 © | — 1-70 | 33°88 | 27-29 | 7°83 | 74] — | Ns50V_| 100-0 | 0815 | — S| Avaexes 5 | — 1-70 | 33°95 | 27°34 | 7°87] 138 | — | N70V 50-0 10 | — 1°78 | 34:00 | 27°38 | 7-88 | 144 | — “3 100-50 20 | — 1-78 | 34:00 | 27-38 | 7°87 | 139 | — 29 250-100 30 | — 1°78 | 34-00 | 27-38 | 7°89 | 145 | — 55 500-250 40 | — 1°79 | 34:00 | 27°38 | 7°85 | 150 | — » 750-500 es a L719) 34:08 | 27539 ie 143°) — ae I000-750 | — | 1055 ©) | UES) || SAPO AO NA || || ae 100 B || oan 80 | — 1-70 | 34:02 | 27-40 | 7°83 | 145] — | N70B |{ OES es | eee t KT 100 | — 1°52 | 34:02 | 27-40 | 7°81 | 145 150 | 0°50 | 34°34 | 27°56 | 7°77 | 143 200 | 0°78 | 34°54 | 27°71 | 7°76 | 141 300 | = 1-18 | 34°61 | 27°74 | 7°79 | 144 400 | 1-14 | 34°61 | 27°75 | 7°78 | 144 500 I-21 | 34°62 | 27-76 | 7°86] 145 750 | 0°88 | 34-63 | 27°78 | 7-91 | 141 1000 0°53 | 34°66 | 27-82 | 7-97 | 138 WS 288] 6 — | N1r00B })\ a Z N 70 B if 102-0 1429 1449 3 KT WS 289} 17 oO | — 1:08 | 33°74 | 27°15 | 7:94 | 123 | — | N70V 50-0 1430 | 1500 | — |A 12x28 5 | — 1:12 | 33°75 | 27:16 | 8-00 | 107 | 7-98 IO | — 1-12 | 33°75 | 27°16 | 7-90 | 123 20 | — 1-12 | 33°74 | 27°15 | 7°94 | 134 | 8:10 30 | — 112 | 33°75 | 27°16 | 7°95 | 134 40 | — 1°12 | 33°74 | 27°15 | 7°96 | 139 | 7°38 50 | — 1-12 | 33°75 | 27°16 | 7°95 | 144 WS 290 | 17 N 70H O-5 2000 | 2015 | — _ | 32 consecutive hauls Dea (A-GG)each of 15 mins. 18 5 %5 0345 | 0400 duration. Samples CC and DD lost. Sunset 18133; sunrise 0526 WS 291 | 18 © ||— 4:08} 33°75 | 27:16 | 7-96) 155 | — | N7oWV | 200-100] tors | — — |A 12x28 Salas EONS S275 27-20 7-97 | 237 |) » 100-50 IO | — 1-12) | 33°75 | 27°16 | 7-96 | 136 | — ¥ 50-0 = || wie PXo) || aici : 27200))7-96)) 155) || == i Nixoo)B))\\ 2 ae | ee 2 : 30 | = 1-13 ee 27:16 | 7-93 | 121 | — | N70B |j 170° 1227 | 1247 3 |KT 40 | — 1-14 | 33°75 | 27°16 | 7-96 | 116 50 | — 1-13 | 33°75 | 27°26 | 7°95 | 113 60) |= r-139/133°715)| 27-10)||7-91 | 123 80 | — 1-14 | 33°78 | 27°19 | 7°92 | 139 100 | — 1-14 | 33°78 | 27°19 | 7°99 | 121 150 | — 1:08 | 33°78 | 27°19 | 7-91 | 114 200 | — 0-70 | 33°85 | 27-23 | 7:94. | 121 250 OB ON 4e03 274° 7690) 134: WS 292 | 19 o | — 0:98 | 33-77 | 27°17 | 7°92 | 119 | — | N70V 50-0 1505 | — — |A 13x28 5 | — 1:00 | 33°77 | 27°17 | 7-90 | 118 | — 9 100-50 Lo | — 1:04 | 33°77 | 27°17 | 7°92 | 124 | — | N50V 100-0 — | 1525 20) — 5-06 ar e27aley | p92: I20 —— EN) roo ||| aoe , ; zs 30 | — 1:06 ee Aiea 70) eL22, || N70B || (eo nee noo a et ~I 53 WS 292—298 Station Position R.R.S. William Scoresby Sounding (metres) 1928 WS 292] 55° 02’ 00" S, 35° 16’ 40” W] 3x cont. WS 293] 55° 09’ 00” S, 35° 05’00" W} 3x WS 294] 55° 17’ 00” S, 34° 53’00" W | 3x WS 295 | 55° 23’ 40” S, 34° 41’ 00” W | 3-4 x WS 296 | 55° 31’ 00" S, 34°29’ 00” W | 4x WS 297 | 55° 34’ 05” S, 33° 1400” W | 4x Shy Sa Dit Moy NY || Bare Direction WSW 54 Direction Weather Barometer (millibars) Air Temp. ° Cent 2°2 1018-1 | o-0 Remarks light WSW swell W swell 1017°6 | — 0-3 oo |station work- ed 1 mile to windward of dense pack R.R.S. William Scoresby WS 292—298 8 HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS ge Station | 58 P.O. a TIME ean Remarks S liockes| eee |S%o | oe | PH |mam| | Gear | caekey [| of tm p.m. From To (miles) WS 292 AO — L-O6N 38-77) |27-0-7)|| 7:93) | 127 cont. EO! || — 1-08) 33°77 || 27°17 | 7:92 | 119 60 | — I-10 | 33°77 | 27°17 | 7°93 | 126 80 | — I-10 | 33°80 | 27°20 | 7°95 | 126 100 | — 1°10 | 33°80 | 27-20 | 7-91 | 136 WS 293 | 19 o | — 0:97 | 33°81 | 27°21 | 7°93 | 141 | — N50 V 100-0 1720) | — — ANTS x25 5 | — 0-99 | 33°81 | 27:21 | 7°93 | 138 | 8:06 | N70V 50-0 10 | — 1:00 | 33°81 | 27-21 | 7°93 | 159 | — + 100-50 — | 1748 20 | — 1:00 | 33°81 | 27:21 | 7°93 | 144 | — | Nr0oB || 5 E 30 | — 1-00 | 33°81 | 27-21 | 7-94 | 162 | — | N70B |{ ome ueoOt gne23 2 aS 40 | — 1°00 | 33°81 | 27-21 | 7°95 | 155 | 7°76 50 | — 1-00 | 33°81 | 27-21 | 7°94 | 155 60 | — 1:00 | 33°81 | 27-21 | 7°94 | 155 80 | — 1-00 | 33°83 | 27°23 | 7°94 | 135 100 | — 1-00 | 33°84 | 27:23 | 7°95 | 126 | 7-76 NEA) 7 ee g8-o 1951 | 2011 KT WS 295 | 19- o | — 1-10 | 33°83 | 27°23 | 7-91 | 123 N50 V 100-0 2132 | — A 15x28 20 5 | — 1:10 | 33°83 | 27:23 | 7°92 | 137 | 6:09 | N70 V 50-0 Considerable stray on TON} — 1-12) 33°83) || 27-23, || 7-93 | 138 | — 7 100-50 wires 20 | — 1°12 | 33°83 | 27-23 | 7°93 | 138 | 7:60 FA 250-100 JO || = eS 33°83 27:23) 7-92 || 133) || => » DoCEz 5° 40 | — I-10 | 33°83 | 27°23 | 7°92 | 133 | 7°75 » USTED Ge) || = renee || SR || yg || Geone || aes 5 1000-750 | — _ | o108 60 | — 1°12 | 33°83 | 27:23 | 7-91 | 118 | 7:99 | N100B || © 2 KT 80 | — 1-08 | 33°84 | 27:23] 7-95 | 126| — | N70B |{ ed i eos : 100 | — 1:00 | 33°83 | 27°23 | 7°94. | 136 1) I-12 | 34°21 | 27-42 | 7°85 | 144 | 5°77 200 | 1°60 | 34°30 | 27°45 | 7°84 | 160 | 4:99 300 | 182 | 34-41 | 27°52 | 7°84 | 173 | 4°43 400 1:95 | 34°46 | 27°56 | 7-81 | 162 | 4:20 500 | 1-96 | 34°53 | 27°62 | 7-93 | 162 750 2:29 | 34°61 | 27-65 | 7:89 | 156 | 4:01 LO09 1-95 | 34°72 | 27°77 | 7°95 | 119 | 4:06 Wi = = fs a9 S 296 | 20 NEE on 0338 | 0359 P KT WS 297 | 20 o | — 1:60 | 33:90 | 27:30 | 7-90] 116 | — | N70V 50-0 1020 | — — |A 16x28 5 | — 1-68 | 33°88 | 27-29 | 7-94. | 134 | — 5 100-50 LO || — 1-68 | 33:89 | 27-29) | 7-90'| 133 | — 5 250-100 2,0)|| —sl:70)|| 33588) 27°20) | 7:90 | 13 n | —— 5 500-210 30 | — 1-69 | 33°89 | 27-29 | 7°89 | 129 | — » 750-500 Mon || —eE-70)\033.G0)|'27-301l)7-91 || 1203|| — 5 1000~750 50 | — 1°70 | 33°90 | 27°30 | 7:89 | 129 | — N50V 100-0 — || Lens 60 | — 1°70 | 33°92 | 27°32 | 7-90] 130 | — | Nx00B || ‘ om ae 2 KT 80 | — 1-65 | 33-94 | 27:33 | 7°86 | 113 | — | N70B |jJ ee moo W329 i too | — 1:63 | 33°98 | 27°37 | 7°87 | 120 150 0°40 | 34:24 | 27°50 | 7°84 | 126 200 I'II | 34°40 | 27°57 | 7°80 | 128 300 1-49 | 34°52 | 27°65 | 7°77 | 134 400 1°50 | 34°61 | 27°71 | 7°75 | 128 500 1:60 | 34°63 | 27°73 | 7°88 | 110 750 | 1-46 | 34°65 | 27°75 | 7°85 | 106 1000 1°32 | 34:68 | 27-79 | 7°90 | 103 WS 298 | 21 o | — 1:76 | 33-92 | 27°32 | 7°87 | 143 — N70V 50-0 0640 — — Ne 11g) 3s 5 | — 1°76 | 33-92 | 27°32 | 7°88 | 147 | — 3 100-50 10 | — 1-78 | 33°94 | 27°33 | 7°89 | 149 | — » 250-100 WS 298—303 R.R.S. William Scoresby WIND SEA Station Position Date | Hour eae a Direction = Direction ca 1928 WS 298} 55° 27’ 30’ S, 32°21’ 40° W | 5x cont. WS 299] 55° 18’ 30” S, 32°05 20” W | 5x |1152 — Ww 3 W WS 300] 55° 07’ 30” S, 31° 56’ 55” W | 5x | 1400 4057 Ww I Ww WS 301 | 55° 00’ 05” S, 32° 08’ 25” W | 5x | 1900 — NW I — WS 302} 54° 57’ 20S, 31° 4935” W | 6x |0455 — = O = WS 303] 54° 51’ 25" 5, 31° 20’ 10” W | 6x |0745 4590 — fo) = 56 » | Weather 13} u 3 Ry I oO. 2 16) Co) 0.g ie) 10) re) oO Seas || cee 5= ae Remarks ae |e ice. At end of station the ship had drifted right to edge of ice. Water v. transparent 1012°5 | 0-6 | station worked at edge of pack ice 1012°3 | — 0-3 | station worked at edge of pack ice 1013°5 | — 0°6 | station worked 8 miles out- side pack ice 10126 | — 1-0 | station worked in edge of pack ice 1013°4 | — 0-6 | much ice R.R.S. William Scoresby WS 298—303 HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS Station TIME Length Remarks ——— a] OE Oe From To (miles) Age of moon (days) 1eOy Depth | Temp. 205 Gee = Gan / pH mniem p.m. 2 +e Depth cCupels Gear (metres) Ny 160 N70V 500-250 152 3 750-500 155 : 1000-800 155 Ns5o0V 100-0 0945 I a Rea j 94-0 1008 | 1028 156 169 HT 198 198 181 181 181 N NNN NNN TAN How wo H OW BR HAM OH AH — hb - if N ~sI OWW DrIwWwWtE NN N IWIN SINT SIS ST SN I Ny WS 299 | 21 50-0 A 18x28 100-50 250-100 500-250 URS ' 1000~750 N50 V 100-0 N 100 B || N 70 B , IOO—O T 9% ORE 7°86 7°82 7°81 7 100-0 50-0 100-50 250-100 500-250 Toe 1000~750 , IL0g—-O a7 WS 304—308 R.R.S. William Scoresby Soumchiae: |S iS Weather Remarks Hour (metres) Barometer (millibars) Air Temp Station Position Direction 1928 WS 304] 54° 54’ 40” S, 30° 21’ 20” W | 6x WS 305 | 54° 44’ 00” S, 29° 49’ 00" W | 7x 1009'0 | — 1:6] V. many WS 306 | 54° 41’ 50S, 30° 49° 35" W | 7x | 1412 j icebergs WS 307 | 54° 19’ 30” S, 30° 31’ 30° W] 7x 11735 NW 1008-7 | — 2-8 | station worked 1 mile from edge of pack ice o | o.p.s. | 1005-7 | — 0-6} v. slight W swell WS 308] 54° 04’ 05”S, 30° 18’ 00” W | 8x |0815 R.R.S. William Scoresby BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS § HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS Eg Station | $2 Ses) m P.O; o- Peper i Ce ame Sieise ot pH mgm. al p.m. WS 304] 22 o | — 1°58 | 34:02 | 27:40 | 7°88 | 137 | — 5 | — 1°60 | 34-02 | 27-40 | 7°88 | 135 | — 10 | — 1°58 | 34:02 | 27°40 | 7-90 | 135 | — 20 | — 1°65 | 34:02 | 27-40 | 7°89°| 135 | — 30 | — 1°68 | 34:03 | 27-41 | 7°87 | 135 | — 40 | — 1°68 | 34:02 | 27-40 | 7-90 | 135 | — SOR een || 348022 1 27-4051,7-90))| 23'5)) | a 60 | — 1-78 | 34:03 | 27-41 | 7-90 | 142 | — 80 | — 1°80 | 34:05 | 27-42 | 7-93 | 142 | — 100 | — 1°72 | 34:08 | 27-45 | 7°89 | 142 150 | 0°15 | 34°45 | 27°67 | 7°79 | 155 200 | 0-66 | 34°57 | 27°74 | 7°85 | 155 300 0°88 | 34°62 | 27-78 | 7°82 | 149 400 0°86 | 34°65 | 27°80 | 7°84 | 144 500 | 0°79 | 34°68 | 27-82 | 7°87 | 145 750 | 0°64 | 34°67 | 27°82 | 7-90 | 147 1000 0°46 | 34:67 | 27-83 | 7-90 | 148 WS 305 | 23 ©} |= 2-62) |34°02)(27-40) | 7-80) | 139) ||| — bil 2 1-02) 2AsO2N 27-40 \7-88 |) 145, | — 10 | — 1:68 | 34-02 | 27-40 | 7°89 | 143 | — 20 | — 1:68 | 34:01 | 27-39 | 7°89 | 143 | — 30 | — 1°72 | 34-01 | 27°39 | 7-90 | 138 | — 40 | — 1°75 | 34°01 | 27°39 | 7°87 | 141 | — 50 | — 1°76 | 34-01 | 27-39 | 7-90 | 138 | — 60 | — 1°79 | 34:02 | 27-40 | 7-90 | 148 | — 80 | — 1-80 | 34:02 | 27-40 | 7-91 | 149 | — 100 | — 1-62 | 34-11 | 27-47 | 7°88 | 159 150 0:00 | 34°44 | 27°68 | 7-81 | 149 200 | 0°58 | 34°56 | 27°74 | 7°82 | 147 300 | 0°82 | 34°65 | 27°79 | 7°82 | 147 400 0°80 | 34°65 | 27-79 | 7°81 | 148 500 | 9°90 | 34°67 | 27°81 | 7-91 | 135 750 | 0°69 | 34°67 | 27°82 | 7°89 | 135 1000 | 0°49 | 34°68 | 27-84 | 7-94 | 145 WS 306 | 23 WS 307 | 23 o | — 1°55 | 33°97 | 27°36 | 7°88 | 12 = 5 | — 1°55 | 33°97 | 27°36 | 7°88 | 134 | — 10 | — 1°56 | 33-99 | 27°38 | 7°89 | 123 | — 15 | — 1°70 20 | — 1°74 | 33°99 | 27°38 | 7°88 | 123 | — 30 | — 1-76 | 33°98 | 27°37 | 7°88 | 128 | — 40 | — 1°74 | 34:01 | 27°39 | 7°88 | 135 | — 50 | — 1°74 | 34°02 | 27-40 | 7°88 | 135 | — 60 | — 1°75 | 34°03 | 27-41 | 7°87 | 125 | — 80 | — 1°79 | 34°03 | 27°41 | 7°89 | 133 100 | — 1-80 | 34°03 | 27-41 | 7°87 | 12 150 | — 1°16 | 34°23 | 27°55 | 7°85 | 137 175 | — 0°02 | 34°46 | 27-69 | 7°77 | 147 200 | 0°75 | 34°50 | 27°67 | 7°80 | 143 300 0:68 | 34°64 | 27-80 | 7-80 | 143 400 | 0°68 | 34-67 | 27°82 | 7°79 | 135 500 0-66 | 34°68 | 27-83 | 7°84 | 135 75° | 0°54 | 34°68 | 27-84 | 7-87 | 135 1000 0°43 | 34:68 | 27°84 | 7-90 | 12 WS 308 | 24 Gear 59 Depth (metres) | 110-0 100-0 50-0 100-50 250-100 500-250 750-500 1000~750 100-0 50-0 100-50 250-100 500-250 759-509 1000-780 100-0 j 105-0 r I20—-0 100-0 50-0 100-50 250-100 500-250 759-500 1000-780 TIME From To 1843 | 1908 1920 — | 2205 0620 | — = || tolgtexy 0945 | 1005 1427 | 1447 1751 | 1811 1840 — | 2125 0830 | 0850 Length of tow (miles) alan cote colo WS 304—308 Remarks KT A 22x28 ACR bxe25 KT KT KT A 24x28 Kel WS 309—315 Station Position WS 309] 53° 58’ 50” S, 28° 50’ 10” W WS 310] 54° 00’ 00” S, 28° 38’ 00” W 54° 45° 00" S, 35° 11’ 00” W From 54° 00’ 00" S, 36° 12’00” W to 53°48" 30" 5, ae 40' 30" W 54. 48’ 00” S, 33° 28’ 00” W 53° 36’ 00" S, 41° 05’ 00” W WS 315] 53° 26’ 30” S, 43° 49’ 00” W R.R.S. William Scoresby Sounding (metres) Direction 2 Xil 60 Remarks Barometer (millibars) Air Temp. ° Cent SW 2 3 (2 — 1-1 | station worked at edge of pack ice WSW 10059 | — 1°1 | Station worked in bay in edge of pack ice iC — 2:8] Wx N swell. 8} Mod. gale 2 = )0 2 — |station worked on board whale catcher A.W. Sorle, 3 mile from pack ice 4 |o.m.d. R.R.S. William Scoresby WS 309—315 HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS Station TIME ibaa Remarks of tow From ‘ic (miles) P.O; mgm. 0: p.m.* Depth (metres) Age of moon (days) Depth | Temp. oy pe (metres) | ° Cent, Gear ce. p. 1. | N100B 1610 WS 310] 24 Ny WAUKHSSHGd Sd OnNTW EW HN Ha INISI SIS SSINI NT ST ST ° aay alae OOM NN NWN N NNNNNNNNDNDN ~I (oe) A es io) na as Ww KT. Nets fished for + mile at 116 m. 12 consecutive oblique hauls (B—M) each of approx. 20 mins. dura- tion. Sunset 1844 water samples lost over- board KT bottle struck bottom 50-0 - A 21 xii 28 100-50 250-100 20 NNNNNNNNNDN DN SSS STS SST I “NI ~I 61 : WS 315—318 R.R.S. William Scoresby WIND SEA eae Be Sone | SKS Se Station Position Date | Hour Gnctres) Weather Remarks Direction Direction Barometer (millibars) Air Temp. ° Cent Force Force 1928 WS 315] 53° 26’ 30S, 43° 49’ 00” W | 2 xii cont. WS 316] 52° 56’ 00” S, 46° 26’ 00” W | 3 xii | 1115 723 W 3 — 4 oO. 981:2 | 3:1 |sea conf. WS 317 | 52° 41’ 00” S, 49° 39’ 30” W | 4 xii | 0425 336 NW R NW I b.c. | 1004:2 | 6-7 | heavy swell daGARe vis. 8 rN) o No) No} ay Ne) ron N WS 318] 52° 26’ 00"S, 52°07’ 00” W | 4-5 | 2005 3186 NW 3 NW Xil 62 R.R.S. William Scoresby WS 315—318 g HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS EG Station | s 2 Remarks oe Depth | Temp. oy P.Os O. ae. Depth. TIME Length =< | (metres) | ° Cent. 8 “Too of ne! aan ce. p. 1. = Gree) ns cael Gnile) WS 315 200 1°30 | 34°19 | 27-40 | 7°84 | 179 cont. 300 I-QI | 34°40 | 27°52 | 7-80 | 188 400 | 2°00 | 34°49 | 27°58 | 7°79 | 200 500 | 2°07 | 34°55 | 27°63 | 7-79 | 188 600 2°03 | 34:61 | 27-69 | 7°87 | 185 800 1°95 | 34°63 | 27-70 | 7°84 | 200 1000 1-80 | 34°68 | 27-75 | 7°84 | 214 1500 I-21 | 34:68 | 27-80 | 7°89 | 179 WS 316 | 21 ° 1°88 | 33°88 | 27-11 | 8:07 | 107 | — N70V 50-0 I120 | — — |A 24 xii 28 5 1°85 | 33°88 | 27-11 | 8-08 | 105 | — 3 100-50 10 1-78 | 33°88 | 27-12 | 8-09 | 104] — _ 250-100 20 1°78 | 33°87 | 27-11 | 8-09 | 113 | — 3 500-250 30 1°73 | 33°87 | 27°11 | 8:08 | 105 | — a 750-500 40 168 | 33°88 | 27-12 | 8-08 | 105 | — - 1000-750 50 1°55 | 33°89 | 27°13 | 8:07 | 105 | — N50 V 100-0 — 1635 — net choked with dia- 60 0°82 | 33°88 | 27-18 | 8-06 | 127 toms—split on raising 80 0-60 | 33°90 | 27:20 | 8-05 | 121 | — |Nz100B}] 107-0 1656 | 1716 = KT [out of water 100 0:68 | 33-91 | 27-21 | 8-04 | 121 eo AS] Sees) || aap || PB She 200 | 1°58 | 34°15 | 27°35 | 7°87 | 148 ele) 1-95 | 34°27 | 27°41 | 7°84 | 157 400 1-98 | 34:36 | 27°48 | 7-81 | 168 500 | 2°15 | 34°46 | 27°55 | 7°87 | 168 600 2°19 | 34°53 | 27°60 | 7-82 | 170 800 2°16 | 34°62 | 27-69 | 7°86 | 162 1000 2:04 | 34:64 | 27°71 | 7°89 | 170 1500 1-60 | 34°68 | 27°77 | 7-92 | 158 1650 1-44 | 34°68 | 27-78 | 7-90 | 158 WS 317 | 22 fo) 4°49 | 34:10 | 27-04 | 8-04 | 103 | — | N70V 50-0 0430 | — — |A 27x11 28 5 4°50 | 34:09 | 27-03 | 8-05 | 106 | — 100-50 10 4°50 | 34:09 | 27:03 | 8:05 | 106 | — 5% 250-100 20 4°49 | 34:10 | 27-04. | 8:05 | 106 | — 5 500-250 30 4°46 | 34:11 | 27:05 | 8-05 | 106 | — " 750-500 40 4°34 | 34:09 | 27-05 | 8-04 | 106 | — 5 1000-790 | — | 0705 50 4:27 | 34°10 | 27:06 | 8-04 | 111 | — Ns5o0V 100-0 ogo5 | OgI5 60 4°13 | 34°10 | 27-08 | 8-04 | 113 | — | N1i100B]| __ 2 - 80} 3°41 sie 27-15 | 8-04 | 115 | — | N70B |{ 7° ° eS ere 3 KT 100 2°96 | 34:07 | 27°17 | 8-04 | 116 150 | 2°73 | 34°07 | 27°19 | 7°98 | 121 200 2°74 | 34°11 | 27°22 | 7:95 | 142 300 | 2°64 | 34:20 | 27°30 | 7-95 | 146 qr 2°40 | 34°27 | 27°38 | 7°87 | 153 500 | 2°54 | 34°33 | 27°41 | 7°90 | 160 600 2°50 | 34°40 | 27-47 | 7°87 | 168 800 | 2°42 | 34°47 | 27°54 | 7°90 | 168 1000 2°39 | 34°52 | 27°58 | 7°83 | 18z 1500 2:27 | 34:63 | 27-68 | 8-20 | 149 3200 0°87 | 34°72 | 27°85 | 8:04. | 145 WS 318 | 22- fo) 5°34. | 34°17 | 27:00 | 8-07 | 106 | — | N70V 50-0 2015 | — — |A 27 xii 28 23 5 5°35 34:18 27°01 8-05 Ill — oH 100-50 considerable stray on sie) 5°34 | 34°17 | 27:00 | 8-08 | 115 | — 250-100 wires for earlier hauls 20 5234q)|) 34-171) 277,00) | 5-08 | 17 || —— * 500-250 30 5°34. | 34°18 | 27-01 | 8-08 | 113 | — 5 750-500 40 | 5°33 | 34°17 | 27-00 | 8-08 | 113 | — » 1000-790 50 5-20)|'34-07 ||| 2720 8-09) || 110) |) — N50V 100-0 — | 2310 60 -07 | 34°18 | 27:04 | 8-09 | 123 | — | Ni100B]| 9 | 29 rr 80 pe aa aan 8:05 | 128 | — | N70B ee 2 alla oo an 100 4°17 | 34°18 | 27-14 | 8:05 | 133 150 | 3°89 | 34°18 | 27°17 | 7°96 | 117 63 WS 318—322 R.R.S. William Scoresby Remarks finer material WIND SEA na | Sounding oa § & Station Position Date | Hour (Gee) A » | Weather Ex HO Direction 5 Direction 5 a £ S| * 1928 WS 318] 52° 26’ 00" S, 52°07’ 00” W | 4-5 cont. Xil WS 3819] 52° o1’ 00" S, 54° 52°00” W | 5 xii | 1340 1602 NNW |3-4| NNW |3-4 b. 9877 | 8-8 G.c.5S. vis. 7 WS 320] 53° 34’ 00” S, 41° 06’ 00” W | 15-16 | 2317 981 WNW | 4 | WNW | 3 b. I007*I | 2°5 xi vis. 7 WS 3821 | 53° 52’ 40" S, 38° 10’ 00” W | 16 xii | 1700 146 NNW | 5 NW 6 o.r. 994°3 | 2:2 vis. 4 WS 822) 53° 45’ 30” S, 38° 23’ 00” W 16-17 | 2105 258 N 5 N 4 Out 9981 | 2:8 xii c. bl. S. from bottom sample washed out R.R.S. William Scoresby WS 318—322 § HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS Eg Station os PO; TIME Tae Remarks 2~ | Depth | Temp. D5 : Dep euge 2 ee) : Gant. =) ee pH mane cc. p. 1. Gear SS isan To Gnile) WS 318 200 3°65 | 34°19 | 27°20 | 7°94 | 123 cont. 300 Relea Act | 27-245 7-94 |er33 400 2°57 | 34°16 | 27-28 | 7-91 | 126 500 2°51 | 34°18 | 27-30 | 7-94 | 128 600 | 2°48 | 34:23 | 27°34 | 7°91 | 145 800 | 2°61 | 34°35 | 27°42 | 7°89 | 155 1000 2°48 | 34:46 | 27°52 | 7°84 | 170 1500 2°24 | 34°61 | 27:66 | 8-00 | 151 3000 1°39 | 34°72 | 27°82 | 7-92 | 109 WS 319] 23 fo) 6-11 | 34°16 | 26-90 | 8-12 | 105 | — N70V 50-0 131503) — |A 28 xii 28 5 6:09 | 34°17 | 26-91 | 8-11 | 106 | — id 100-50 10 6:09 | 34°16 | 26-90 | 8-11 | 107 | — = 250-100 20 6-06 | 34°16 | 26-90 | 8-12 | 105 | — . 500-250 30 6:04 | 34°16 | 26-91 | 8-12 | 108 | — “ 750-500 40 5°81 | 34°16 | 26-94 | 8-11 | 111 | — % 1000~750 50 5°71 | 34°16 | 26-95 | 8-11 | 113 | — N50 V 100-0 = |) wos 60 42 | 34°16 | 26-98 | 8-09 | 117 | — | N1r00B 2 Ps : Ba 80 ee 34:16 | 27:02 | 8-06 | 125 | — | N70B ais m7 EOL e780 3 KT 100 4°39 | 34°16 | 27-10 | 8-05 | 136 150 4°41 | 34°24 | 27°16 | 7-96 | 117 AN© A2AN 3452327 27 | 7:92 || 123 399 SE || SPS | SaPere || 72) || Iss) 400 | 3°33 | 34°18 | 27:22 | 7-91 | 140 500 | 3°07 | 34°16 | 27-23 | 7-91 | 140 600 2°84 | 34:20 | 27-28 | 7-91 | 140 800 | 2°71 | 34°30 | 27°38 | 7°89 | 153 1000 2°62 | 34°43 | 27°49 | 7°86 | 170 1500 2°37 | 34:61 | 27°65 | 7°80 | 160 WS 320 | 3-4 fo) 1°85 | 33°94 | 27°16 | 8:04 | 109 | — | N50 V 100-0 2325 | — — |A 29 xii 28 5 M95) 1133294: ||| 27210) 8:05 || 174. |) — N70V 50-0 10 1°85 | 33°94 | 27-16 | 8:07 | 115 | — H 100-50 20 1°83 | 33°96 | 27°18 | 8:05 | 119 | — 5 250-100 30 1°70 | 33°98 | 27-19 | 8:06 | 120 | — * 500-250 40 1-69 | 33°98 | 27-19 | 8-06 | 123 | — 5 750-500 50 1°70 | 34:01 | 27-22 | 8-06 | 127 | — > goo~750 | — | 0300 60 1°70 | 34°02 | 27°23 | 8:05 | 127] — | Nui100B| 118-0 0334 | 0354 2 Kel 80 1°69 | 34:06 | 27:27 | 8-05 | 133 | — N70B 164-0 0420 | 0440 $ KT 100 1-69 | 34:10 | 27°30 | 8-04 | 133 159 WET || See 2 || 27S || PL || a 200 1-81 | 34°15 | 27:33 | 7°98 | 164 300 1-80 | 34:29 | 27°44 | 7°85 | 186 400 | 1-98 | 34°37 | 27°49 | 7°86 | 189 500 | 2:05 | 34°42 | 27°53 | 7°87 | 184 600 2°09 | 34:48 | 27°57 | 7°86 | 184 800 2:06 | 34:62 | 27-69 | 7°89 | 192 goo 2:02 | 34:68 | 27-74 | 7:86 | 194 WS 321] 4 fo) 0°63 || 33°75 | 27°09 | 8-or | 119 | — N50V 100-0 1705 | — — |A 2129 5 0:60 | 33°76 | 27:10 | 8:04 | 114 | 8:17 | N7oV 50-0 10 0:60 | 33°76 | 27-10 | 8-or | 113 | — 100-50 — | 1800 20 0°58 | 33°75 | 27:09 | 8:02 | 113 | 8-03 | NrooB || 5 aa 30 ae 33°76 | 27°10 | 8-03 | 120 | — | N7oB |/{ Lo058 ELE) | Os e eh 40 0°50 | 33°77 | 27:11 | 8:00 | 120 | 7-96 50 | 0°38 | 33°75 | 27°10 | 7°99 | 120 60 0°14 | 33°83 | 27°18 | 7-98 | 128 | 7-75 80 | — 0°03 | 33-91 | 27°25 | 7°95 | 139 100 | — 0:03 | 33°92 | 27:26 | 7°95 | 139 | 7°37 WS 322 | 4-5 fo) 0-80 | 33°8z | 27-12 | 8-07 r| — | Ns5o0V 100-0 2115 | — — |A 2129 5 0:80 | 33°79 | 27:11 | 8:06 | 123 | 8-09 | N70 V 50-0 WS 322—327 R.R.S. William Scoresby Remarks Sounding Weather Date | Hour (metres) Barometer (millibars) Air Temp. * Cent. Station Position Direction Direction 1928 23° 00” W | 16-17 xl WS 822} 53° 45’ 30” S, 38° cont. WS 323] 53° 38’ 30” S, 38° 35’ 10" W heavy swell WS 324] 53° 31’ 40” 5, 38° 47’ 30” W | 21 xii | 1015 SE x E |\4-5| SE x E 21 Xl | 1205 vy. heavy swell WS 325 | 53° 24’ 30” S, 39° 00’ 00” W 21 xii | 1920 WS 3826 | 53° 17’ 10" S, 39° 12’ 10” W WS 327] 53° 35’ 00” S, 37° 50’ 00” W | 22 xii | 0330 R.R.S. William Scoresby WS 322—327 § HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS Ee —— Station | =2 Remarks * pepe pane: Safes ot pH ee Ox Gear Depth babi cartel Bee : pamesy|CcaP (metres) From To (miles) 0°80 | 33°79 | 27°11 | 8-04 | 128 N70 V 100-50 cont. 20 0°80 | 33°81 | 27-12 | 8-06 | 128 | 8-08 3 200-100 | — | 2205 30 0°78 | 33°81 | 27°12 | 8-05 | 135 | — | Nx100B || 5 ; 40 0°78 | 33°81 | 27°12 | 8-05 | 135 | 8-07 | N70B || 280 234% | Ce0x 3 Ei 50 0°64 | 33°81 | 27°13 | 8-05 | 135 60 0°63 | 33°81 | 27°13 | 8-04. | 140 | 8:03 80 0°38 | 33°80 | 27-14 | 8-02 | 142 100 0°10 | 33°87 | 27-21 | 7-97 | 162 | 7-62 150 0°31 | 33°90 | 27°22 | 7-90 | 162 | 6-64 200 | 1°16 | 34:27 | 27°47 | 7°85 | 179 | 5°45 1°32 179 WS 323 | 9- fo) 1°12 | 33°78 | 27-08 | 7-99 | 109 |} — N50 V 100-0 2205 | — — |A 3129 10 5 1°12 | 33°77 | 27:07 | 8:02 | 110 | 7°96 | N70 V 50-0 — |considerable stray on 10 1°14 | 33°77 | 27°07 | 8:02 | 110 | — 55 100-50 wires 20 0°84 | 33°78 | 27-10 | 8-o1 | 117 | 8-06 . 250-100 30 0°73 | 33°78 | 27°11 | 8-or | 110 | — i 500-250 40 0°65 | 33°78 | 27-11 | 8-01 | 110 | 8-04 5 750-500 50 0:60 | 33°78 | 27-11 | 8-01 | 110 | — 3 1000-750 | — | 0000 60 0°55 | 33°80 | 27°13 | 8:00 | 114 | 7-91 | N100B ; 80 0:34 | 33°85 | 27°18 | 8:00 | 126 | — | N70B |{ re OSAAE OA O2 3 — 100 0:28 | 33°85 | 27-18 | 8-00 | 126 | 7-82 150 0°78 | 34:15 | 27°40 | 7°87 | 162 | 6-13 200 1°48 | 34:30 | 27°47 | 7°83 | 166 | 5-31 300 | 1-98 | 34°48 | 27°58 | 7°81 | 179 | 4°36 400 | 2°01 | 34°54 | 27°63 | 7°82 | 177 | 4°31 500 | 2°01 | 34°53 | 27°62 | 7°90 | 177 600 2°02 | 34°56 | 27-64 | 7-97 | 170 | 4:16 800 | 1-98 | 34°65 | 27°72 | 7°87 | 179 | 4:24 1000 1°87 | 34:66 | 27-73 | 7°88 | 179 | 4:15 1500 | 1°58 | 34°69 | 27°78 | 7°92 | 179 2000 1°17 | 34°70 | 27°82 | 7-92 | 162 | 4:77 WS 324} 10 N 100 B || KT eo ‘i (o} cro WS 325] 10 fo) 0:83 | 33°79 | 27-11 | 8:04 | 112 | — | N5oV 100-0 1210 | — — |A 3129 5 0°83 | 33°79 | 27°11 | 8-04 | 115 | 8:15 | N70V 50-0 considerable stray on 10 0:83 | 33°79 | 27-11 | 8:04 | 116 | — 3 100-50 wires 20 0°83 | 33°79 | 27°11 | 8-04 | 118 | 7-84 55 250-100 30 0:83) || 33°79) 27-11 || 8:04 | 118 | — 5 500-250 40 0°83 | 33°80 | 27-11 | 8-05 | 116 | 8-or _ 750-500 50 | 0°83 | 33°79 | 27°11 | 8:05 | 115 » 1ooo-750 | — | 1545 60 0°83 | 33°79 | 27-11 | 8-05 | 116 | 7-99 | N 100B || £ * 7 80 ne aaa Boe 8-04 | 121 ee N70B |j 7°9° HAO || eM 3 _ sSI~sININI WS 328—332 Station Position WS 328 | 54° 04’ 00” S, 36° 18’ 00” W WS 329] 53° 56’ 30” S, 36° 06’ 00” W WS 330] 53° 49’ 30" S, 35° 53’ 30” W WS 331 | 53° 42’ 00” S, 35° 40’ 40” W R.R.S. William Scoresby _| Sounding Date | Hour (neces) 1928 27 Xii|1100] 192 R. 27 Xi | 1350 165 d. gy. gn.s. 27 Xil | 1637 1031 27 Xil | 2142 — 27-28 | 2335 3813 WS 3382] 53° 35’ 00” S, 35° 29’ 00” W Xil WIND SEA HA | 8 oe eliaeie 2 2 Weather ais ES Direction é Direction 5 BE ae E 2 E 2 p.s 989°8 | 1-7 viS. 7 E 3 E 2 oO. ggo'l | 3°2 vis. 6 ENE 2 E 2 0. 989°3 | 1:6 vis ENE E 2 oO. 989°3 | 1-6 ENE ENE 4 fers 988-0 | 0-5 vis. 68 Remarks R.R.S. William Scoresby WS 328—332 § Ee Station | <= = WS 328 | 15 WS 329} 15 WS 330] 15 WS 331 | 15 WS 332 | 15- 16 HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS Depth | Temp. | g 0) P PA EAOe |i co) Deo TIME Length Remarks (metres) | ° Cent. [oo 7 e ea conp.l! Gear (metres) From To cane fo) 1-03 | 33°75 | 27°06 | 8-07 | 102 |] — | NsoV 100-0 1105 | — = \ 4129 5 1-03 | 33°75 | 27°06 | 8:06 | 106 | 8-05 | N70 V 50-0 10 1°03 | 33°75 | 27°06 | 8:07 | 102 | — _ 100-50 20 ae 33°74 | 27 aol 102 | 8-24 5 160-100 | — |! 1200 30 0°76 | 33°75 | 27°0 ze) 107 — |Nu100B A pa 40 0:60 | 33°79 | 27:12 ee 111 | 802 | N70B 102-0 1222 | 1242 2 K 50 | 9°50 | 33°79 | 27°13 | 8-05 | 115 60 0°40 | 33°79 | 27°13 | 8-06 | 120 | 7-98 80 0°23 | 33°79 | 27°14 | 8:05 | 120 100 O-12 | 33°83 | 27°18 | 8:05 | 128 | 7-86 150 | 0°23 | 33°98 | 27-29 | 7-90 | 149 | 6-79 fe) 1-25 | 33°79 | 27°08 | 8-07 | 102 | — | N5oV 100-0 1355 | — — A 4129 5 I-21 | 33°80 | 27:09 | 8-08 | 111 | 8-31 | N70V 50-0 10 I'l5 33°79 27°09 oe 113 a ae 100-50 = || arigye 20 1°03 | 33°75 | 27°09 | 8:0 120 7 100 B . cae : Sed 30 0:98 | 33°79 | 27°10 | 8-08 | 123 ee N70B cubs T5143 | 1533 3 KT 40 0°95 | 33°78 | 27-09 | 8-07 | 124 | 8-08 50 0:89 | 33°79 | 27°10 | 8:07 | 127 60 0°50 | 33°78 | 27°12 | 8:06 | 139 | 7-89 80 0:26 | 33°83 | 27-17 | 8:01 | 148 100 | 0°23 | 34°00 | 27°31 | 7°95 | 157 | 6-95 150 0°68 | 34:10 | 27-36 | 7°89 | 174 | 6-22 ) 0°82 | 33°83 | 27°14. | 8:05 | 109 | — | N50 V 100-0 1640 | — — A 5129 5 0°80 | 33°83 | 27-14 | 8:05 | 112 | 8-15 | N70 V 50-0 10 0°74 | 33°83 | 27°14 | 8-05 | 112 | — 100-50 20 0°63 | 33°82 | 27-14 | 8-05 | 114 | 8-13 re 250-100 30 0:62 | 33°82 | 27°14 | 8:05 | 114 | — = 500-250 40 ©2473-8351 27:10))|'8:05 || 116 ||| 8:12 750-500 50 0°25 | 33°83 | 27°17 | 8:04 | 118 | — y goo-760 | — | 1930 60 0:22 | 33°83 | 27°17 | 8:03 | 124 | 8-08 | NrooB |) ie. 5 af 80 O-10 ae 27:18 | 8-00 | 124 | — | N70B |{ a0 role 3 ae 100 0-20 | 33°89 | 27°22 | 7°97 | 131 | 7°54 125 — | 34:06) — | 7°87) 151 150 0:94 | 34°18 | 27-41 | 7°85 | 166 | 5-81 200 1°38 | 34:26 | 27-45 | 7°81 | 179 | 5:2 300 | 1°85 | 34°43 | 27°55 | 7°79 | 186 | 4:50 400 2:00 | 34°50 | 27°59 | 7°79 | 181 | 4:20 500 | 2°03 | 34°58 | 27°65 | 7°87 | 174 | 4°15 600 2:00 | 34:60 | 27°67 | 7-90 | 170 | 4°12 800 1°87 | 34°62 | 27°70 | 7-86 | 18x | 4:22 950 1°84 | 34:66 | 27-73 | 7°88 | 186 | 4:27 N 100 B || ' KT iain |i) 2 2152 | 2213 2 x fo) 0°58 | 33°78 | 27-11 | 8:07 | 100 | — N50V 100-0 2340 | — — |A 7129 5 0°56 | 33°78 | 27°11 | 8:07 | 105 | 8:26 | N70 V 50-0 se) 0°54 | 33°78 | 27-12 | 8:07 | 107 | — 3 100-50 20 0°52 | 33°78 | 27°12 | 8-07 | 107 | 8-54 8 250-100 30 ORSO) |e Be7.ou 2 7l2n||.0:07)|| Loo) | — 5 500-250 40 0°50 | 33°78 | 27°12 | 8:07 | 105 | 8-53 . 750-500 50 0:48 | 33°78 | 27-12 | 8:07 | 106 | — 5 1000-750 | — | 0245 60 0°30 | 33°78 | 27:13 | 8:06 | 109 | 8:14 |] NrooB || | meh 3 om 80 | — ae aos 27-15 | 8-05 | 123 | — | N70B |{ ‘77 ° O558) | 255° 5 KE 100 | — 0°43 | 33°87 | 27°24 | 7°95 | 140 | 7°70 150 0°30 | 34°11 | 27°39 | 7°87 | 164 | 6-09 200 1:28 | 34°34 | 27°52 | 7°80 | 192 | 5-00 300 | 1°53 | 34°47 | 27°60 | 7°80 | 179 | 4°51 400 1°82 | 34°55 | 27°65 | 7:80 | 174 | 4:22 500 1°86 | 34°56 | 27°65 | 7-80 | 170 | 4:27 69 WS 332—338 Station Position Sounding (metres) WS 3382 | 53° 35’ 00" S, 35° 29’ 00” W cont. WS 333] 53° 28’ 00” S, 35° 16’ 30” W | 28 xii | 0850 WS 334] 53° 19’ 00” 5S, 35° 10’ 30” W | 30 xii | 0800 WS 335] 53° 11’ 00” S, 34° 55’ 00” W | 30 xii | 1530 WS 336 | 53° 06’ 00" S, 34° 44’ 00” W | 30-31 | 1720 Xil WS 387 | 52° 59’ 30” S, 34° 26’ 00” W | 31 xii 1929 | WS 338 | 53° 52’ 00” S, 37° 06’ 00” W | 7-8i 3795 It. gy. Oz. 3647 It. gy. Oz. R.R.S. William Scoresby WIND Direction Direction 7° Weather Barometer (millibars) O°5 Remarks v. heavy swell | § Ee Station | 58 2 WS 332 cont. WS 333 | 16 WS 334] 18 WS 335] 18 WS 336 | 18— 19 WS 337 | 19 WS 338 | 26— 27 R.R.S. William Scoresby HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS WS 332—338 BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS P.O; pes eee Ss" a pH acters ao p.m. 600 1-86 | 34°59 | 27°68 | 7°86 | 170 | 4:25 800 | 1°74 | 34°66 | 27-74 | 7°86 | 174 | 4°34 1000 | 1°55 | 34°67 | 27°76 | 7°85 | 179 | 4°47 1500 1°34 | 34°67 | 27°78 | 7-91 | 181 | 4°75 3500 0-18 | 34°64 | 27°83 | 7-90 | 186 | 5-15 o| 0°43 | 33°78 | 27°12 | 7°99 | 112 | — 5 0°42 | 33°78 | 27-12 | 8-or | 117 | 7-89 10 Aa Sis 1d || a! || AON) NP AM 20 0-41 | 33°78 | 27°12 | 7°95 | 119 | 7:88 30 0°40 | 33°78 | 27-12 | 7:96] 119 | — 40 | 0°40 | 33°78 | 27°12 | 7-97 | 117 | 8-03 50 0:40 | 33°82 | 27°15 | 7-96 | 120 | — 60 0°40 | 33°82 | 27°15 | 7°95 | 108 | 7-85 80 0°30 | 33°80 | 27:15 | 7-96 | 114 | — 100 | — 0°37 | 33°83 | 27°20 | 7°95 | 116 | 7-81 12 = | S88 || || ASA) te 150 | — 0:06 | 34-19 | 27-48 | 7-86 | 160 | 6-17 200 1°13 | 34:40 | 27°58 | 7-80 | 177 | 5:03 300 1°75 | 34°56 | 27:66 | 7°80] 177 | 4:26 400 1°78 | 34°62 | 27-71 | 7°81 | 172 | 4:28 500 | 1°75 | 34°64 | 27°73 | 7°87 | 172 | 4:38 600 1:68 | 34:67 | 27-76 | 7°86 | 170 | 4°33 800 | 1°58 | 34°70 | 27°79 | 7°84 | 170 | 4°43 1000 | 1°34. | 34°70 | 27°80 | 7-90 | 179 | 4-48 1500 | 0°87 | 34°69 | 27°83 | 7:90 | 179 | 4:62 3500 0-01 | 34°65 | 27°84 | 8-12 | 151 | 4:37 fe) 1°22 | 33°78 | 27:08 | 8-02 | 109 | — 5 +22 | 33°80 | 27-09 | 8-02 | 111 | 7°59 10 22 | 33°79 | 27°08 | 8-02 | 112 | — 20 1:22 | 33°81 | 27-10 | 8:03 | 109 | 7°58 30 I-17 | 33°81 | 27-10 | 8-02 | 109 | — 40 I-15 | 33°81 | 27-10 | 8-02 | 105 | 7-74 50 I°I4 | 33°81 | 27-10 | 8-02 | 110 | — 60 LoL sul) 33.80! | 27210) || S:Or || 108, |) 7-72, 80 0:00 | 33°81 | 27°17 | 7°97 | 116 100 | — 0-48 | 33°92 | 27°28 | 7-91 | 127 | 7°41 150 | 0°78 | 34°23 | 27°46 | 7°83 | 164 | 5°52 200 | 1°58 | 34°38 | 27°53 | 7°81 | 174 | 4:69 300 | 1°76 | 34°49 | 27-60 | 7-76 | 174 | 4:28 400 1°88 | 34°58 | 27-67 | 7-79 | 166 | 4:13 500 1°86 | 34°63 | 27-71 | 7°84. | 166 | 4:26 600 1-76 | 34°66 | 27°74 | 7°84 | 162 | 4:29 800 1°65 | 34°70 | 27°78 | 7°89 | 158 | 4:28 1000 | 1°43 | 34°69 | 27°79 | 7°89 | 155 | 4°36 1500 | 0°99 | 34°69 | 27°82 | 8-or | 155 | 4°53) 3000 | 0:20 | 34°66 | 27°84 | 7-95 | 164 | 4°73 ) 1°70 | 33°78 | 27:04 | 8:07 | 109 | — 10 I-70 | 33°78 | 27-04 | 8-07 | 112 | — 20 1°64 | 33°77 | 27°04 | 8:04. | 115 | — 30 0:98 | 33°78 | 27-09 | 8:03 | 120 | — : Dep TIME Length Remarks ear (metres) ee Lee | IO. tow From To (miles) N 100 B || . 5 oe 2 KT N70B || 95-0 993 | 9923 3 N50 V 100-0 o805 | 0815 — AW 729 N70V 50-0 0850 <3 100-50 r 250-100 » 500-250 » 750-510 4 1000-770 | — I105 N 100 B || 8 hs KT. Nets fished N70B |f *7°° prea | ase! 8 128 m. for ;\, mile oa \ 113-0 1536 | 1556 5 KT N50V 100-0 1820 | — — |A 8129 N70V 50-0 - 100-50 - 250-100 - 500-250 » 7509-500 a 1000-760 | — | 2040 nf N70B 109-0 0047 | 0107 2 KT NOE: | 79-0 0229 | 0249 2 KT N50 V 100-0 22550 —: A 11129 N70V 50-0 3 100-50 — | 0005 zee N 100 B 97-0 0040 | 0058 KT at WS 338—342 R.R.S. William Scoresby WIND SEA yo c oe | &e Station Position Date | Hour] Sounding A » | Weather ES BO Remarks . (roe tres) Direction é Direction 5 ge a 1929 WS 338] 53° 52’ 00” S, 37° 06’ 00” W | 7-81 cont. WS 339] 53° 42’ 00” S, 37° 0g’ 00” W | 81 |o240 180 W 3 Ww I c. 998-6 | 11 vis. § WS 340] 53° 32’ 00” S, 37° 12’ 30” W 81 | 0640 740 WwW 3 W © 999°3 | 2:2 sm. d.G. vis. 8 WS 341 | 53° 23’ 30” S, 37° 08’ 00” W | 8i |1105| 1102R. SSW |3-4 SW G 999° | 3°4 vis. 8 1330)" | — s. f. 5 WS 342] 53° 12’ 00"S, 37° 06’ 00” W | 8i | 1600 1154 SW 3 SW Gs I000:0 | 3:3 vis. 8 72 R.R.S. William Scoresby WS 338—342 HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS Station Deas | arenp Lye P.O, ® — TIME Wenge Remarks (metres)| ° Cent, | > /ce neers |(Ce D | Sen GEES of tow p.m. i soa From To (miles) Age of moon (days) + 40 0°90 50 0-90 60 80 N70B 97-0 0040 | 0058 i 4 NNN NWN N SISININININI HoH 27 : : ah 3 100-0 50-0 100-50 160-100 gI-o 140-0 RN NN N ~SININI NI “I “I vf nN 100-0 50-0 100-50 250-100 500-250 700-500 | — IW WWW WwW Ww IW WWW WwW WwW III SINT SION go-o OgI5 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 CS ESSE FS ES FS SSS SY 27 . ed a . 100-0 50-0 100-50 250-100 500-250 [lms O° 1000~770 | ELO=O 100-0 50-0 100-50 250-100 500-250 Ups 1000-780 103-0 j 73 WS 342—345 R.R.S. William Scoresby WIND SEA mee |e Stati Positi Date iE Sounding Weath 28 Bg Remark tation ‘osition ate our (metres) 9 2 eather 6 = B oO emarks Directs S || ions 2 Ee irection é irection é S & az be = 75 ed aes WS 342] 53° 12’ 00" S, 37° 06’ 00” W | 8i cont. WS 343] 53° 02’ 00” S, 37° 06’ 00” W | 8-91 | 2105 2856 SW 3 SW B b. 10007 | I°4 gn. gy. M. Vis. 3 WS 344] 52° 50’ 00" S, 37° or’ 00” W | gi |0345 2215 SSW 3 SSW 3 (o 999°7 | 1:9 cuGs vis. 8 WS 345 | 52° 41’ 00” S, 37° 06’ 00” W | gi | 1000 2174 SW 2 SW 2 e: 9991 | 5:0 caGe vis. 8 74 R.R.S. William Scoresby WS 342—345 HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS PO; TIME ibe Remarks Beads Ce SO. ot pH mgm. eae Gear ees ———__———_ of ae p.m. From To (miles) WS 342 400 1°98 | 34°51 | 27°60 | 7-76 | 174 cont. 600 2:01 | 34°60 | 27°68 | 7°89 | 174 800 1-92 | 34°64 | 27°71 | 7°85 | 166 1000 1°79 | 34°67 | 27-75 | 7°96 | 166 WS 348 | 27- ° 1°93 | 33°77 | 27°02 | 8:02 | 105 | — N50 V 100-0 2110 | — <= 28 10 1-92 | 33°77 | 27°02 | 8-02 | 105 | — N70V 50-0 20 1°91 | 33°78 | 27°03 | 8-02 | 108 | — 100-50 25 Igo 30 1°13 | 33°78 | 27:08 | 8-or | rrr | — 55 250-100 40 1-04 | 33°78 | 27:09 | 8-00 | 116 | — 55 500-250 50 1:00 | 33°78 | 27-09 | 8-00 | 126 | — 0 750-500 60 0°82 | 33°79 | 27°11 | 8-00 | 124 | — 5 1000-750 | — | 2335 80 0:63 | 33°80 | 27°13 | 7°99 | 124 | — | N1i00B || KT. Nets towed for 4 100 0°32 | 33°84 | 27°18 | 7-97 | 126 | — N70B |{ Re mar Vea aean 3 mile at 82 m. : 150 0-60 | 34:11 | 27°38 | 7°84 | 160 200 1°40 | 34:26 | 27-45 | 7-81 | 170 309 1°90 | 34°43 | 27°55 | 777° | 174 400 | 2:00 | 34°50 | 27°59 | 7°76 | 174 600 2:06 | 34°57 | 27°65 | 7:86 | 174 800 1-96 | 34°62 | 27°69 | 7°85 | 166 1000 1-80 | 34°67 | 27°75 | 7°85 | 166 1500 1°41 | 34°68 | 27-78 | 7°85 | 166 2000 1°10 | 34:66 | 27°79 | 7°89 | 160 WS 344 | 28 fo) HOON |I33-77) 127-048 ||S-O1n | L21 | Ni Sony’ 100-0 0350 | — — |A 15129 fe) riiste) || Be keyAoh || Ay Mels |licskxone || aay |) N70V 50-0 20 T2501 33777) 2705) | S.0 | 11S) | — 3 100-50 30 1°39 || 33°77. | 27-00 | 8:00 | 118 | — 4; 250-100 40 Meg Onlhaa-7774|'277200)|.6-O1. |e 120) | % 500-250 50 1:04 | 33°77 | 27°08 | 8-00 | 124 | — " 750-500 60 0°97 | 33°76 | 27:07 | 8-00 | 124 | — 56 1000-790 | — | 0615 80 0:39 | 33°79 | 27°13 | 8:00 | 124 | — | NrooB || 5 2 - 100 0-16 | 33-90 | 27-23 | 7-95 | 142 | — | N70B |J Goro Sues | Go $ aa 150 | 0°96 | 34-14 | 27°38 | 7°84 | 157 200 1°62 | 34°31 | 27°47 | 7°81 | 164 300 | 1°94 | 34°46 | 27°57 | 7°78 | 166 400 2:00 | 34°60 | 27-67 | 7-76 | 166 600 1°95 | 34°66 | 27°73 | 7-8 | 162 800 1°85 | 34°69 | 27°76 | 7-80 | — 1000 1-68 | 34°70 | 27°78 | 7°80 | 166 1500 1°21 | 34°70 | 27-81 | 7°87 | 166 2000 0°95 | 34°70 | 27°83 | 7°85 | 170 WS 345 | 28 fo) 1:26 | 33:82 | 27-10 | 8-02 | 105 | — | N50V 100-0 1005 || — — |A 15129 $e) 1-22) /|(33-00 ||| 27-10) || 8:02) || Tag |) — N70V 50-0 20 T2201] 33260 |27-10) |||'8:03)|| 109) | | — 1 100-50 30 0793; 33:8 || 27-12)|/8:02) || 113 |) — 56 250-100 40 OS 43582427207) ||6-O38l LES) | —— ” DOOR =o 50 O:145)/'33-82) 27-171 8-03) ||| 1240 —— » 750-500 60 Omnsalg3cS2u|272070|08:03) | t20 0 |e 3 1000-750 | — | 1215 80 | — 0:03 | 33°88 | 27-23 | 7:97 | 1330 | — | Nz00B/| 92. 3 * 2 100 | — 0-04 | 33-99 | 27°31 oe 148 | — | N70B |jJ ao ao ee ee 150 0°58 | 34°17 | 27°43 | 7°86 | 160 200 1:60 | 34:36 | 27°51 | 7-81 | 166 300 1°95 | 34°50 | 27°60 | 7-79 | 166 400 2:00 | 34°58 | 27:66 | 7-78 | 168 600 1-96 | 34°65 | 27°72 | 8-05 | 158 : 8-08 | 153 72D) || 255 7-91 | 166 7°88 | 170 a WS 346—351 Station Position WS 346] 52° 31’ 20” S, 37° 07’ 00” W WS 347 | 52° 23’ 30” S, 37° 08’ 00” W WS 348 | 54° 23’ 10” 5, 35° 52’ 00” W WS 349] 54° 23’ 00” S, 35° 32’ 30” W WS 350] 54° 23’ 30” 5S, 35° 17’ 00” W WS 351 | 54° 21’ 30” S, 34° 59’ 00” W R.R.S. William Scoresby WIND Date | Hour Wee Direction 1929 gi |1420 = SW gi |1555 2524 SW Ili | 1220 135 SE x E f. gy. M. Sh. Sp. IIi | 1505 267 S) f.gn. 5. Ili | 1720 256 S Iri | 1958 1170 S) gy. M.R. 76 SEA 3) 5 | Direction em 2 SW 2 SW 4) SE XE 4 S 4-5 Ss As S Se | & 9 Weather 5S Ie) e ae | < 2 G: 9991 | 570 vis. 8 2 G: 10000 | 4°4 vis. 8 4 bach |) £008-2))| 2-2 vis. 8 4 & ERS) || 2S) vis 4-5 @ 1008-9 | 0-8 vis. 7 4-5 Ck 1008-9 | 08 vis. 7 Remarks R.R.S. William Scoresby WS 346—351 § HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS Ee Station | 32 5 Remarks 2~ | Depth| Temp. | ¢ o, P:O; oO, 7 Depth TIME Length = metres) | °C Silico ot pH |mgm.|_~2 Gear P ————_———] of ; oe oat aaa pa || pt eet) From To (miles) WS 346 | 28 N NCan: I 10-0 1428 | 1448 3 KT | _ | WS 347] 28 fo) 1-38 | 33°78 | 27:06 | 8-06 | 108 | 8-30 | NsoV 100-0 1557 | — — A 16129 | 10 1°34 | 33°77 | 27:06 | 8-06 | 108 | — | N70V 50-0 20 1°24 | 33°78 | 27°07 | 8-06 | 111 | 7-85 ss 100-50 30 I-14 | 33°77 | 27°07 | 8:06 | 113 | — % 250-100 40 | 0°44 | 33°77 | 27°11 | 8:06 | 113 | 8-45 - 500-250 } 50 | — o-or || 33°76 | 27°13 | 8:05 | 124 | — FF 750-500 60 | — 0°05 | 33°78 | 27°15 | 8-05 | 124 | 8-18 5 1000-780 | — | 1820 80 | — 0:18 | 33°78 | 27°15 | 8-or | 130 | — | Nx100B }) y . : 100 | — 0-40 | 33-94 | 27-29 | 7-94. | 148 | 7-42 | N7oB | 40° | 1939 | 1959) § | KT 150 | 0°63 | 34°21 | 27-45 | 7°83 | 166 | 5-75 200 1°40 | 34°37 | 27°53 | 7°81 | 168 | 4-91 300 1°80 | 34°52 | 27°62 | 7°80 | 170 | 4:44 400 | 1°85 | 34°61 | 27-69 | 7°79 | 172 | 4:24 600 1°87 | 34°65 | 27-72 | 8-12 | 162 | 4:00 800 1-69 | 34°66 | 27°75 | 8-03 | 151 | 3°94 1000 | 1°42 | 34°67 | 27°77 | 7°95 | 164 | 4:40 | 1500 1-04 | 34°68 | 27°81 | 7-91 | 170 | 4°71 2000 — | 3468} — |7-90| 172 | 4:83 WS 348] 1 fo) 1-36 | 33°82 | 27-10 | 8-03 | 106 | — N50 V 100-0 1225 | — PAT 29 10 1°30 | 33°83 | 27°11 | 8-or | 106 | — N70V 50-0 ) 20 1:25 ons 27°10 ae a) — * 100-50 — | 1245 | 30 1-23 | 33°82 | 27-10 | 8-02 | 11 — |Nro00B]| _ 3 2 z 40 1-20 | 33°81 | 27-10 | 8-or | 110 | — | N70B |{f 97° 1334 | 1354 g ES 50 0-78 | 33°82 | 27°13 | 8-or | 121 60 0°55 | 33°83 | 27°15 | 8-00 | 121 80 0°48 | 33°84 | 27°17 | 8-00 | 121 100 | 0°43 | 33°87 | 27°19 | 7°97 | 124 WS 349] 1 ° 1:06 | 33°83 | 27°12 | 8-04 | 115 | — N50 V 100-0 I5tIo | — —- A171i2 B3503 27 4 5 5 7129 10 1-04 | 33°82 | 27-12 | 8-03 | 117 | — N70V 50-0 20 102 | 33°83 | 27°12 | 8:02 | 119 | — 3 100-50 30 ae 33°85 27°14 pee me — 5 250-100 | — | 1545 40 oO 33°84 | 27°15 | 8:01 | 11 — |Nr100B || ae f 2 > 50 0-60 | 33°85 | 27°17 | 8-o1 | 121 | — | N70B |/ 100-0 HUIS) ek $ uot 60 0°54 | 33°85 | 27°17 | 8-or | 124 80 0°50 | 33°84 | 27-17 | 8-01 | 126 100 0:40 | 33°85 | 27°18 | 8-00 | 126 150 0°50 | 34:02 | 27°31 | 7°89 | 151 200 1-06 | 34°21 | 27°43 | 7°85 | 155 WS 350] 1 fo) I'I0 | 33°80 | 27-10 | 8-or | 106 | — | N50 V 100-0 7) || = — |A17129 10 HONS || G¥eHteto) |) A7Arme) || xekxoue || aire ||) N70V 50-0 20 1:05 | 33°80 | 27-10 | 8-02 | 110 | — 3 100-50 30 1:05 | 33°80 | 27-10 | 8-or | 110 | — - 230-100 | — | 1810 40 LOM (933-00 || 2720 r8:02) | ra) || — | IN to0)B) ||| S 842 2 2 KT 50 | 0-50 | 33°81 | 27-14 | 8-01 | 123 | — | N70B |J ‘+ ° ee tee : se 60 0°41 | 33°86 | 27-19 | 8:00 | 127 80 0°25 | 33°92 | 27°24 | 7°95 | 139 100 | 0°27 | 34°03 | 27°33 | 7°89 | 145 150 | 0°64 | 34°14 | 27-40 | 7°84 | 155 200 | 1°45 | 34°32 | 27°49 | 7°82 | 158 WS 351] 1 fo) 0°72 | 33°78 | 27°11 | 8:03 | 100 | — | N50 V 100-0 2000 | — — |A18i2g 10 0-72} — — | 8-01 | 100 — N70V 50-0 20 0:72) |(33:5227-TAy| 6:02) 103) || x 100-50 30 o-72| — — | 8-02] 108 | — i 250-100 40 0:72) (133-79) 27; LE |\8:03) || LO2 || —— 3 500-250 50 0°65 | 33°79 | 27°12 | 8:02 | 105 | — 58 750-500 WS 351—354 R.R.S. William Scoresby 1:6 WIND SEA alee ae os Sounding Nee 28 5 § Station Position Date | Hour (metres) 2 9 eather BES HO Direction é Direction é ae a 192 WS 351| 54° 21’ 30” S, 34° 59’ 00° W | 111 cont. WS 352] 54° 20’ 00” S, 34° 42’ 00" W | 121 |0023 2352 SSW 4 SSW 3 @: 1007°4 | 0'5 vis. 6 WS 353] 54° 18’ 00” S, 34° 25’00” W | 121 |o610 4041 SSW 4 SSW 4 G 1005°4| 1:6 It. gy. M. vis. 8 WS 354 | 54° 23’ 20” S, 34°07’ 00” W | 121 | 1435 4750 SSW 4 SSW 4 Gs 10059 vis. 7 78 Remarks heavy swell WS 352 WS 354 Age of moon (days) 2 2 Depth (metres) 60 80 100 125 150 200 300 400 600 800 1000 HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS Temp. * Cent. 0:60 0-02 0:00 0°38 I'I0 TAS 1-98 2°00 1:98 I-90 I-71 0:60 0:60 0:60 0:60 0:60 0°52 Orls 0:06 0:05 1:00 I'I5 1°68 I-go I°gO Ig 1°79 1°56 I-14 0°63 0°63 0°59 0°55 0°50 0°50 — 0°36 —o-4I —o-g1 0:27 0°49 OFT 1:87 1°92 1-78 1°58 1-24 0°82 0°52 Orl5 0°49 0750 0°50 0°50 0:29 — 0:26 me ONS 7 = TRS) 19) — o-o1 R.R.S. William Scoresby BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS P.O; ate o 25 O, 5 “loo g pHi an cc. p.1 33°79 | 27°12 | 8-02 | 110 | — 33°88 | 27°22 | 7°95 | 124 | — 33°93 | 27°26 | 7-90 | 139 | — 34°03 | 27°32 | 7°86 | 139 34°20 | 27°42 | 7°81 | 149 34°35 | 27°52 | 7°77 | 155 34°52 | 27°61 | 7°74 | 157 34°59 | 27°67 | 7°74 | 151 34°61 | 27-68 | 7°83 | 145 34°64 | 27°71 | 7°85 | 146 34°65 | 27°74 | 7°82 | 146 33°78 | 27°11 | 8-o1 | 106 | — 33°78 || 27-11 | 8:00 || 108 | — 33°78 | 27-11 | 8:00 | 110 | — 33°78 | 27-11 | 8-00 | rrr | — 33°79 | 27°12 | 8:02 | 10g | — 33°79 | 27°12 | 8:00 | 115 | — 38°S0)|(27-20) 17-924) 135 33°97 | 27°29 | 7°85 | 148 | — 33°96 | 27-29 | 7°86 | 148 | — 34°23 | 27°45 | 7°78 | 158 34°24 | 27°45 | 7°77 | 162 34°40 | 27°54 | 7°76 | 166 — — |7:-74 | 166 34°61 | 27°69 | 7°75 | 166 34°61 | 27-69 | 8-06 | 158 34°65 | 27°73 | 8:07 | 157 34°66 | 27°76 | 7-90 | 153 34°65 | 27°78 | 7°84 | 170 34°65 | 27-81 | 7-80 | 170 33°71 | 27°05 | 8:25} 99] — BBe7la || 27,000.87 05) | 106) || — RD || Q7POyp | tse ||| 1igk || R37 27-00) |,8203) |) 03) | Bge7Tall27-00) i212) |) 0x2 | —— 33°75 | 27°13 | 8:05 | 113 | — 23°78 | 27-16 |/8:0n | 127 || — 33°95 | 27°32 | 7°91 | 145 | — 34°18 | 27°45 | 7°84] 15t | — 34°25 | 27°50 | 7°83 | 151 34°35 | 27°56 | 7°82 | 151 34°56 | 27°65 | 7°82 | 151 34°59 | 27°67 | 7°85 | 146 34°64 | 27°72 | 7°86 | 146 34°65 | 27°75 | 7°88 | 146 34°66 | 27-78 | 7°87 | 149 34°61 | 27°77 | 7°87 | 153 34°61 | 27°78 | 7-89 | 155 34°60 | 27°80 | 7-90 | 157 33°72 | 27°07 | 8:07 | 90 | — BB ZN TOF oso 5 | LOL | —— 33°72 | 27:07 | 8:05 | ror | — 33772127207) 1005, ||| £00) | —— 33°73 | 27:09 | 8:06 | 108 | — 23-020 i27-19)|7-98)| EES | —— 33°97 | 27°23)|'797 | 129 | — 33°89 | 27°26 | 7-96 | 124 | — 34°95 | 27°39 | 7°87 | 139 | — 34°28 | 27°55 | 7°83 | 140 N70V N 100 B N70B N100B N70B N 100 B N70B | J | } J Depth (metres) 1000-750 go-o 100-0 50-0 100-50 250-100 500-250 Toes tS 1000-750 I1g-O 131-0 100-0 50-0 100-50 250-100 500-250 USO 1000-750 122-0 100-0 50-0 100-50 250-100 500-250 750-460 1000~750 128-0 TIME Length of tow From To (miles) — | 2214 2307 | 2327 | 3 0027 | — — 0255 0420 | 0440 3 0455 | 0515 5 0615 | — — — | ogoo 1212 | 1232 2 1440 | — = =a 1745 1954 | 2014 3 WS 351—354 Remarks Ket A 18129 KT KT A 19129 KT A 19129 KT WS 354—357 R.R.S. William Scoresby WIND SEA ey a, pH & 2 come ae Sounding Wreath es 2 § R k Station Position Date | Hour (metres) eS 9 eather ae BO emarks Direction 5 Direction | 5 3 a ae 1000-750 | — | 2140 70 1-96 | 33°86 | 27°09 | 7-96] 131 | — |Niro0oB]| __ | 5 rey 80 — 0:06 | 33°89 | 27-23 | 7-91 | 135 | — | N70B |{ ‘75 ° SEER TS z em 100 | — 0-10 | 34:00 | 27°32 | 7°89 | 148 150 | IIL | 34°23 | 27°44 | 7°86 | 153 200 I-52 | 34°31 | 27°47 | 7°82 | 160 400 2°03 | 34°52 | 27°61 | 7°80 | 164 600 2°00 | 34°64 | 27-71 | 7°79 | 162 800 I'QI | 34°67 | 27-74 | 7-92 | 160 1000 1:80 | 34°70 | 27°77 | 7°92 | 155 jee) 1-33 | 34°70 | 27°80 | 7°89 | 155 2000 0°88 | 34:70 | 27°83 | 7°84 | 157 3000 0°30 | 34°67 | 27-84 | 7°84] 158 WS 376 | 29 fo) I*45 | 33°79 | 27°07 | 7°97 | 105 | — | NsoV 100-0 1410 | — — | A 2oiii 29 10 1°42 | 33°78 | 27°06 | 7-99 | 105 | — N70V 50-0 20 I-41 | 33°78 | 27°06 | 7-99 | 105 | — - 100-50 30 1-42 | 33°79 | 27°06 | 8-00 | 105 | — 3 250-100 40 Te3 77 3Q-S20|2722O)||Ss00) || LET | —— 5) 500-250 50 1°37 | 33°82 | 27°10 | 7-99 | 108 | — Fr 750-500 60 YL) Biateyey || Armen |) 7A \e) || seek || —— * 1000-750 | — | 1645 Oo o-2 95 | 27°27 | 7:92 | 124 | — |N100B]| 2 2, 2 KT $0 — 0°39 Ae 27°35 | 7:89 | 126 | — | N7oB |/ eS EEE aoe S 100 | — 0°38 | 34°11 | 27-42 | 7°87 | 130 150 | O51 | 34°32 | 27°55 | 7°81 | 136 200 | 0°94 | 34°45 | 27°63 | 7°73 | 136 300 1-48 | 34°56 | 27-68 | 7-80 | 136 400 | 1°41 | 34°64 | 27°75 600 | 1°37 | 34°68 | 27°79 | 7°79 | 131 800 1°25 | 34°67 | 27-79 | 7°86 | 131 1000 1:07 | 34°69 | 27°81 | 7-87 | 130 1500 | 0°65 | 34°69 | 27°84 | 7:90 | 139 2000 0°37 | 34°65 | 27°82 | 7°86} 139 | 3000 | — ort | 34°62 | 27-81 | 7°86 | 139 WS 377 | 29 o| 1°33 | 33-90 | 27:16] 7-94 | 124 | — | Ns50V | rt00-0 | 1445 | — — | A 20111 29 10 ie2/7/\|| 33°09) 27-10) ||7:96 || 132 || — N70V 50-0 20 I-19 | 33°89 | 27:16 | 7°96 | 132 | — 96 100-50 30 1-16 | 33°89 | 27-12 | 7°96 | 130 | — % 250-100 40 LeTTa 33°99) p27207i|| 7290!) L30.| —— » SOOS2Z5° 50 rioaeae || Seon’ || Aprons) |i Ro\y | uy) |) + 750-500 60 | 0°79 | 33°96 | 27°25 | 7°94 | 132 | — ” SIS 72) ES 87 WS 377—380 R.R.S. William Scoresby Sounding Weather Remarks Hour (metres) Station Position Date Barometer (millibars) Direction Direction 1929 WS 877] 58° 34’ 00” S, 44° 47’ 00” W | git cont. WS 3878 | 59° 20’ 20"S, 45° 51’ 25” W | 10 i1 | 0950 2853 NE x N| 2 WS 379 | 59° 35’ 00", 47° 15’ 00" W | 11-12 4047 WSW 1 gy. Oz. WS 380 | 60° 22’ 00”, 50° 33’ 00” W | 1211 | 2020 1365 WNW |3-4] WNW | 3 | o.f.r. CuGake vis. I 8 _ | ee Station rons) 2 WS 377 cont. WS 378| 1 WS 379 | 2-3 WS 380] 3 R.R.S. William Scoresby HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS Depth | Temp. (metres)| ° Cent. 80 0-81 150 1°37 200 1°84 shee 1°97 400 1°53 600 1:60 800 1°38 1000 I'O1 1500 0°63 2000 0°29 fo) or12 10 0:09 20 0:02 30 0°03 G2 0°53 50 o18 60 Ol 80 0°49 100 0-47 150 1°29 200 1°49 300 1°63 400 1°50 600 277 800 107 1000 0-71 1500 0°33 2000 0:08 9 0°74 se) 0°73 20 0:60 30 0-60 40 o's 2 0743 60 0°29 80 | — 0:05 100 0:00 150 o-o1 200 0:46 300 0:62 400 0:83 600 o-gI 800 0°59 1000 0:29 1500 o-21 2000 o-o1 3000 | — 0-22 o |—o-19 10 | — o-Io 20 0:03 30 0-16 40 0°23 50 0°27 60 0:26 80 0:26 WS 377—380 BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS P.O; | 0, ot | pH Baca Gear een 27°37 | 7°82 | 145 | — |NrooB]| | 27°57 7°79 | 157 | — | N7oB |i *3* 27°63 | 7°73 | 157 27°68 | 7°79 | 157 27°72 | 7°78 | 157 27°78 | 7°80 | 157 27°78 | 7°83 | 155 27°78 | 7°87 | 151 27°79 | 7°87 | 151 27°80 | 7°87 | 153 26:86 | 7-90 | 131 | — | NsoV 100-0 26°86 | 7-91 | 133 | — N70V 50-0 26:96 | 7-91 | 137 | — 3 100-50 PagPACG| \7Xa\e) || sexe) |) —— s 250-100 27:29 | 7°89 | 140 | — D 500-250 ASS) | TPS || 3 || » USES 27°43 | 7°87 | 146 | — ” 1000-750 Zp 9) | EST a NOOB | 27°60 | 7°79 | 160 | — N70B || 93 27°66 | 7°72 | 160 27°69 | 7°76 | 158 27°73. | 7°77 | 162 27°74 | 7°78 | 162 27°78 | 7°88 | 153 27°78 | 7°87 | 153 27°78 | 7°87 | 153 27°80 | 7°84 | 164 27°81 | 7:86 | 164 27°22 | 7:91 | 1336 | — | Nzr00B |) 27-21 | 7-91 | 136 | — | N70B |{ he 27°30 | 7°89 | 140} — | N50V 100-0 27°34 | 7°88 | 140 | — N70V 50-0 27°35 | 7°87 | 140 | — 2 100-50 27°36 | 7°79 | 148 | — 2» 250-100 27°39 | 7°87 | 149 | — » 500-250 2752 eto) 249) | ” UBS 27 5ONT70y 151 | » 1000~750 27°65 | 7°79 | 162 27°69 | 7°79 | 155 27°73 | 7°80 | 155 27°72 | 7:80 | 162 27°77 | 7°91 | 158 27°78 | 7°93 | 158 27°79 | 7°88 | 157 27°79 | 7°88 | 166 27°81 | 7°87 | 166 27°82 | 7°84 | 164 27:09 | 7°89 | 148 | — | N100B || Bat Pagpatly || GRO, || a2) || — N70B |] 3 Pg RPBX || 7330) || lA || N70V 50-0 277-208-700) | 057) || 55 100-50 ZFS NTIS || AST. || ae ” ele Aig Paks) | GAtsKa) ||| ati7) || —= s 500-250 27°42 | 7°87 | 157 | — y T5520 27°48 | 7°86 | 158 | — N50V 100-0 TIME From To 1806 | 1826 0958 | — — 1205 1317 | 1337 2041 | 2101 2115 == || ceRe 2025 | 2045 2115 - — 001s Weneth Remarks of tow (miles) KT Colpo A 21 i129 colno va A KT A 21 ili 29 eo[to KT considerable wires A 21 111 29 cote stray on WS 380—384 R.R.S. William Scoresby WIND SEA Station Position Date | Hour] “ounding : g_| Weather Direction | § | Direction | § er es 192 WS 380] 60° 22’ 00” S, 50° 33’ 00” W | 12 11 cont. WS 381 | 61° 26’ 00” S, 56° 19’ 00” W | 14 11 | 2150 425 — fo) — fo) 0. d. gy.S. vis. I WS 382 | 62° 15’ 35” S, 58° 18’ 30” W | 15 ii | 13312 425 WSW | 5 WSW | 3 b. br. gy. M. vis. 8 WS 383 | 62° 20’ 40” S, 58° 13’ 00” W | 15 ii | 1535 2085 WSW WSW b. d. gn. M. vis. 8 WS 384 | 62° 25’ 40” S, 58° 06’ 10” W | 15 ii | 1927 1957 SW SW bees gy. gn. M. vis. 7 go f= ag Remarks ae | a 985:2 | 3°3 989°3| 4:4 989°3 | 4°4 990°3 | 3°3 R.R.S. William Scoresby WS 380—384 8 HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS Ee Station | 38 P.O. TIME iv i Remarks a Depth | Temp. | ¢ 0, = a™5 (0); Z Depth engt < (metres)| ° Cent. | > /00 : le oan? CCypele Gear Gaewes) oom To Gale) WS 380 600 0°50 | 34°58 | 27°76 | 7-81 | 174 cont. 800 0°39 | 34°61 | 27°79 | 7°75 | 168 1000 0°35 | 34°61 | 27°79 | 7°89 | 160 WS 381] 5 fo) 1°65 | 34:02 | 27°23 | 7°79 | 136 | — | NrooB |) : 7 10 1-54 | 34:04 | 27:26 | 7-91 | 143 | — | N70B |{ '°*° Sea) eat) 3 ae “96 20 1°32 | 34:04 | 27°27 | 7°96 | 149 — N50 V 100-0 2225 aes 30 1°15 | 34:06 | 27-30 | 7-92 | 149 | — N70V 50-0 40 OFS} || SVU ARS) || hy || S|) Sa » LOCS5o 5° OTP! || SAE | FST NE || ESS || ae » Z5ORTOO 60 0°62 | 34°13 | 27°39 | 7°91 | 160 | — . 400-250 | — | 2325 80 0:29 | 34°22 | 27°48 | 7°82 | 160 100 0:26 | 34:24 | 27°50 | 7°86 | 158 150 | 0°22 | 34°35 | 27°59 | 7°86 | 158 200 0°39 | 34°43 | 27°65 | 7°82 | 160 300 | 0°64 | 34°55 | 27°73 | 7°84 | 164 400 | 0°62 | 34°54 | 27°72 | 7°84 | 164 WS 382] 6 fe) 1°62 | 33°94 | 27°17 | 7°97 | 139 | — N50 V 100-0 1335 | — — |A 221129 10 MGS 330527520 7:90N 143 | N70V 50-0 Ao) DAT 33:94) 27:29 | 7:95 | 143 || ae ” 100852 30 LeL4y 34-07 27°31 | 7-90) | 150 | — e 250-100 40 0:91 || 44enm|27-364! 7-908 158 | —— 3 400-250 | — | 1423 50 0°82 | 34:14 | 27°39 | 7790] 158 | — | NrooB || 2 60 ©-69) 34cn9) (27-4451 7-86) | 151 |e N70B |{ ieee zo || sol : 80 0°68 | 34:23 | 27°47 | 7°83 | 151 100 0:69 | 34°29 | 27°52 | 7°82 | 157 159 OPEN) || SHES aby II 7G> || eke 200 | 0°37 | 34°41 | 27°63 | 7°77 | 157 300 0°51 | 34°51 | 27-70 | 7°76 | 160 400 | 0°53 | 34°60 | 27-78 | 7-76 | 158 WS 383] 6 fe) 2:09 | 34:00 | 27°18 | 7-90 | 135 | — | N5o0V 100-0 1540 | — — |A2z2 i129 10 209) 34°00) 27°18, |||7°89) |) 135 | — N70V 50-0 very great stray on wires 20 1°59 | 34:04 | 27°26 | 7°88 | 135 | — 5 100-50 30 mors} || Syicere || yaks |Get) || oueyy) || 55 250-100 40 0°95 | 34°11 | 27°35 | 7°85 | 145 | — ” HOOe 25° 50 | 0°62 | 34-11 | 27°37 | 7°87 | 143 | — » 750-480 Pe 0°44 | 34°19 0p ne 145 | — ne ae — | 1740 S) 0:13 | 34°21 | 27°48 | 7° I5r | — 100 oe 2 100 | — o-11 | 34°29 Ba Ly a — | N7oB |j 733° ¥843)/ 1903 : 150 | — 0-51 | 34°31 | 27°59 | 7°83 | 153 200 | — 0°68 | 34°37 | 27°65 | 7°83 | 153 300 | — O51 | 34°45 | 27-71 | 7°81 | 153 400 | — 0°88 | 34°52 | 27-78 | 7-82 | 157 600 | — 0-90 | 34°54 | 27°80 | 7-70 | 151 800 | — 0°72 | 34°55 | 27°80 | 7°85 | 157 1000 | — 0°94 | 34°54 | 27°80 | 7°84 | 157 1500 | — 1°47 | 34°58 | 27°85 | 7°85 | 157 WS 384] 6 fo) 2°13 | 34:05 | 27:22 | 7-92 | 1330 | — | N50V 100-0 1930!) — — | A 23 ili 29 10 ZTANBAsO5 || 27-22)(7-95 | 13005 —— N70V 50-0 20 ZO Aes) \\277°23)\\'7-97) 130s | — : 100-50 30 oH, || eV ony WAL RAG || teks) || ately) || — ¥ 250-100 40 | 0°59 | 34:20 | 27°45 | 7°89 | 139 | — » 500-250 50 | 0°44 | 34°22 | 27°47 | 7°89 | 142 | — » 750-500 60 0:14. | 34:28 | 27°54 | 7°89 | 148 | — 5 1000-750 | — | 2130 80 | — 0:37 | 34:37 | 27°63 | 7°85 | 157 | — | NxooB || cs 100 | — 0-72 Wee Se 2-87 et SSN NGo Bi o> CELE EEE 150 | — 0°88 | 34°47 | 27°74 | 7°85 | 157 200 | — 0°92 | 34°47 | 27°74 | 7°86 | 157 250 | — 0-40 | 34°58 | 27°81 | 7°86 | 157 gI WS 384—388 Station Position R.R.S. William Scoresby Hour Sounding (metres) WS 384] 62° 25’ 40" S, 58° 06’ 10” cont. WS 385 | 62° 32’ 00"S, 57° 55’ 00” W WS 386 | 62° 41’ 00" S, 57° 44’ 00” W WS 887 | 62° 49’ 00” 5, 57° 40’ 00” W WS 388 | 62° 55’ 30” S, 57° 40’ 00” W 16 li 16 ii |0420 16 ii | 0850 16 li | 1220 1392 c. gn. M.G. WIND Direction WSW Direction Weather 6 WSW Barometer (millibars) R.R.S. William Scoresby WS 384—388 g HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS Ee Station ce P.O TIME Te, Remarks x~ | Depth | Temp. | o, 2 past O, - Depth 1 ength < | (metres)| ° Cent. | ~ /° pH ae cenpell: eas (metres) ion To as WS 384 300 | — 0°31 | 34°62 | 27-84 | 7°84 | 157 cont. 350 | — 0°56 | 34°62 | 27-85 | 7-85 | 157 400 | — 0°61 | 34-62 | 27°85 | 7-86 | 157 600 | — 1-08 | 34-61 | 27-86 | 7-90 | 155 800 | — 1-19 | 34°61 | 27-86 | 7-90 | 157 1000 | — 1°48 | 34°63 | 27°89 | 7°79 | 160 1500 | — 1°56 | 34°67 | 27-92 | 7°96 | 157 WS 385] 7 fo) 1°30 | 33°69 | 26-99 | 7°96 | 130 | — N50 V 100-0 0005 | — — |A 23 i129 10 1-30 | 33°69 | 26-99 | 7:96] 136 | — | N70V 50-0 20 1°15 | 33°86 | 27-14 | 7°83 | 137 | — 53 100-50 30 0°93 | 34°08 | 27°33 | 7°95 | 140 | — ” 2Eo—Ucle 40 0°85 | 34°12 | 27°37 | 7°96 | 140 | — 35 500-250 50 | — 0°05 | 34°19 | 27-48 | 7°87 | 146 | — ” 750-500 60 | — 0°37 | 34°25 | 27°54 | 7°87} 146 | — 5 1000-750 } — | 0215 80 | — 0°64 | 34°30 | 27°59 | 786] 151 | — | NrooB/| | 5 E 100 | — o-71 | 34:43 | 27-70 | 7°86 | 151 | — | N70B |j ‘77° mea [cs Y HT 150 | — 0°81 | 34°47 | 27°74 | 7°83 | 153 200 | — 0°86 | 34:52 | 27-78 | 7°85 | 153 300 | — 0°88 | 34°59 | 27°84 | 7-84 | 158 400 | — 1:00 | 34°59 | 27°84 | 7-82 | 160 600 | — 1°12 | 34:61 | 27°86 | 7-86 | 160 800 | — 1°33 | 34°62 | 27°88 | 7-85 | 164 1000 | — 1°52 | 34:63 | 27°89 | 7:86 | 160 1500 | — 1:63 | 34°67 | 27-93 | 7°85 | 160 WS 386] 7 fo) 1-06 | 33°58 | 26-92 | 7-88 | 12 — | Nsov 100-0 0423 | — — |A25 ii29 10 1-04) ||| 33°58, | 26-92 | 7-87 | 136 | — N70V 50-0 20 RON) || SS TD || 7) || OH || SIE | » NSO 3o) 30 1-30 34:00 | 27-25) |7-95 | 145 | — 7 250-100 35 ee *p 500-250 ro HOE)! SPO | ray yoy || Mefe) | ” Tale O° 50 0°82 | 34:08 | 27-34 | 7-96 | 143 | — p 1000-750 | — | 0637 60 0°27:| 34°14 | 27-42 | 7°84] 148 | — |Nro0oB]| _ = 2 KT 80 | — 0:97 | 34:20 | 27°52 | 7°89 | 149 | — | N70B |{ 77 ° Sg | ee 100 | — 0-90 | 34°27 | 27°58 | 7°88 | 155 150 | — 0°53 | 34°43 | 27°69 | 7°82 | 164 200 | — 1°19 | 34°47 | 27°75 | 7°79 | 160 300 | — 1:09 | 34°53 | 27°80 | 7-81 | 160 400 | — 0°94 | 34°56 | 27°81 | 7-84 | 158 600 | — ror | 34°58 | 27-84 | 7-91 | 153 800 | — 1°16 | 34°58 | 27°84 | 7:87 | 157 1000 | — 1°33 | 34°58 | 27°84 | 7°85 | 157 WS 387| 7 fe) 1-29 | 34°09 | 27°32 | 7-92 | 139 | — | Ns5o0V 100-0 0855) — | A 25 ili 29 10 I°I2 | 34°09 | 27°33 | 7:92 | 148 | — N70 V 50-0 20 0°49 | 34°15 | 27°41 | 7-91 | 162 | — 5 100-50 30 | — 0:42 | 34-15 | 27-46 | 7-86 | 164 | — 5 250-100 40 | — 0°78 | 34°15 | 27-48 | 7°88 | 170 | — 5 500-250 | — | 0953 50 | — 1:05 | 34:20 | 27°53 | 786] 177 | — |NrooB]|| _, a Sey 2 KT 60 | — 0-99 | 34:27 | 27°58 | 7°86] 177 | — | N70B |J Pome pees ae 80 | — I-09 | 34:28 | 27°59 | 7°86 | 174 100 | — 1-27 | 34°33 | 27°64 | 7°86 | 170 150 | — 1°07 | 34°45 | 27°73 | 7°85 | 170 200 | — I-21 | 34°51 | 27-78 | 7°85 | 168 300 | — 0°95 | 34°53 | 27°79 | 7°84 | 174 400 | — I-OL | 34°55 | 27°81 | 7°85 | 172 600 | — 0°97 | 34°56 | 27°82 | 7-85 | 172 WS 388] 7 fo) 0772) 34°14 |l/27-39))|(-7-90) |) 172 | — || N50 V 100-0 12229) 9 —— — |A 25 ili 29 10 O64) |) 34-14) |(277-40) (77-01 || 172 |) — N70V 50-0 20 0°62 | 34°14 | 27°40 | 7-91 | 174 | — r 100-50 WS 388—392 R.R.S. William Scoresby WIND Remarks ° Cent. Weather Sounding (metres) Air Temp. Barometer (millibars) Station Position Direction Direction WS 388] 62° 55’ 30” S, 57° 40’ 00” W cont. WS 389] 63° 17’ 00” S, 58° 51’ 05” W 16-17 |2350| 749 il WS 390 | 63° 10’ 30” S, 59° o1' 00” W v. heavy sea WS 391 | 63° 02’ 00” 5, 59° 12’ 00” W gi WS 392] 62° 52’ 00” S, 59° 26’ 00” W | 17 ii | 1930 5 d 94 R.R.S. William Scoresby WS 388—392 g HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS Ee Station 38 P.O TIME on Remarks g~ | Depth| Temp. | g¢ o = a8 O, : Depth engt = | (metres) | ° Cent. | > loo oe ee eae ce. p. 1. Gear eneues) 5 ee ae a ee WS 388 30 0:07 | 34°18 | 27-46 | 7-90 | 177 | — N70V 250-100 cont 40 | — 0°27 | 34°23 | 27°52 ie 177} — s 400-250 | — | 1318 On| 102530 342239272531 7 077, — |N100B = - oe — 0-78 | 34-24 | 27-55 | 7-88] 177 | — N70 I0I-o 1348 | 1408 z KT 80 | — 0:96 | 34°30 | 27-60 | 7°82 | 174 100 | — 1°04 | 34°33 | 27°63 | 7°8r | 174 150 | — 1-28 | 34-41 | 27°70 | 7°87 | 177 200 | — 1°31 | 34°43 | 27°72 | 7°85 | 177 300 | — 1°16 | 34°51 | 27-78 | 7°87 | 179 400 | — 1°13 | 34°51 | 27°78 | 7°86 | 179 WS 389] 7 fe) I-or | 34°10 | 27°34 | 7°87 | 124 — |N100B 5 2 10 I*1g | 34:09 | 27-32 | 7-96 ae — | N70B cade SLIGS) olee 2 io 6 iii 20 0°51 | 34°20 | 27°45 | 7°87 | 145 = N50V 100-0 2145 Oe ae 30 0:63 | 34:21 | 27°45 | 7°85 | 146 | — | N70V 50-0 40 O-7ANl 24°28) (27250) || 7°87 | Sr |) — 49 100-50 — | 2210 50 | — 0°49 | 34°35 | 27°62 | 7°85 | 153 60 | — 0-40 | 34°34 | 27°61 | 7°87 | 153 80 | — 0°55 | 34°40 | 27°67 | 7-90 | 157 100 | — 0-91 | 34°41 | 27-69 | 7°75 | 158 WS 390 | 7-8 fo) 2:09 | 34:00 | 27-19 | 7°86] 118 | — N50V 100-0 2355 | — — |A 26ii29 if) 2°09 | 34:00 | 27-19 | 7°97 | 124 | — N70V 50-0 20 2-028) 340119|27220))|(7-05) | 24) || — 3 100-50 30 LOU || 34-00 27-20 |7-94) || 130 |) — _ 250-100 ate E42 | 34500 | 27:24 | 7°95 | 133 | = wee 52052500 OOSS Ho 0°74 | 34°99 | 27°35 | 7 3) || roo | 2 eee esis = | Neow Co | tt le 80 | — 0:61 | 34°21 | 27°52 | 7°87 | 142 100 | — 0°76 | 34:27 | 27°57 | 7°86 | 142 150 | — 0:86 | 34-38 | 27-66 | 7°82 | 149 200 | — 0-91 | 34°45 | 27°72 | 7°85 | 149 300 | — 1°16 | 34°49 | 27°77 | 7°86 | 145 400 | — 1°12 | 34°50 | 27°77 | 7°88 | 143 600 | — 1:08 | 34°55 | 27°81 | 7°88 | 143 | WS 391] 8 ° 1-85 | 34:02 | 27:22 | 8-02 | 126 | — | N5oV | 100-0 o450 | — — | A 26 iti 29 ; 10 1°89 | 34:01 | 27-21 | 7-99 | 127] — | N70V 50-0 great stray on wires 20 1°87 | 34:02 | 27:22 | 7-999 | 127 | — 3 100-50 30 I-09 | 34-11 | 27°35 | 7:96 | 128 | — 5 250-100 40 O-5ON (44-05) b27-4m 78732 | > 500-250 50 O-17)|| 34°18) | 27-46 | 7-87) | 137 || — x 750-500 | — | 0623 60 0°04 21 | 27-49 | 7-90 | 137 | — | Nx00B || 2 zn 80) || — 0°31 oe 27°54) 7:89) 139 | = N70B |{ PS, Ci [eta s a 100 | — 0°85 | 34°30 | 27-60 | 7:86 | 142 150 | — 0°86 | 34-42 | 27-69 | 7°84 | 145 200 | — 0°98 | 34°45 | 27°73 | 7°81 | 145 300 | — 0°96 | 34°52 | 27°78 | 7°82 | 146 400 | — 0°99 | 34°54 | 27°80 | 7°87 | 149 600 | — 1°07 | 34°56 | 27°82 | 7°87 | 148 800 | — 1°12 | 34°57 | 27°83 | 7°87 | 148 WS 392] 8 ° 1-42 | 34:02 | 27:25 | 7-99 | 111 | — N50 V 100-0 1935 | — = PAS 27 129 10 22 Ol 4-03 27-20) [7-90 | LL7) | N70V 50-0 20 1°29)||| 34:05) 27-29) (7:97) LLOQ) || —— ~ 100-50 go) 0°59 | 34°10 | 27°37 | 7°96 | 125 | — ” 25 tee 40 | — 0:21 | 34:20 | 27°49 | 7°92 | 125 | — » 400-250 | — | 2050 SO) | 10:21 “23 |27-n2 7-80) || 13m || — | NizooB || 7-7 2 < oa owe te she is 7 — | NqoB |f 120° | 2134 | 2754 KE 80 | — 0°56 | 34:27 | 27°56 | 7-87 | 136 100 | — 0°65 | 34:36 | 27-64 | 7°87 | 136 150 | — 0-71 | 34°37 | 27°65 | 7°87 | 139 95 WS 392—397 R.R.S. William Scoresby Remarks ° Cent. S di . Hour renee Weather Barometer (millibars) Air Temp. Station Position Direction Direction WS 392] 62° 52’ 00” S, 59° 26’ 00” W cont. WS 393 | 62° 42’ 00"'5, 59° 41’ 00” W WS 894 | 62° 51’ 00” S, 60° 40’ 00” W | 18 ii WS 395 | 63° 48’ 30” S, 62° 26’ 00” W | 19 11 WS 396 | 63° 38’ 30” S, 62° 28’ 30” W | 19 1 INE SXaN) | 945 |PNE RX En 3 o.m. 984°4 | 0-6 vis. 2-4 WS 397 | 63° 29’ 25S, 62° 37’ 00” W | 19 ii | 1900 WS 392 cont. WS 393 | 8-9 WS 394] 9 WS 395] 10 WS 396 | 10 WS 397 | 10 200 300 400 R.R.S. William Scoresby HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS Depth | Temp. (metres) BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS WS 392—397 Remarks te P,0; || 6. a TIME Length ° Cent. 5 To or pH eae cc. p.1 Gear (ne Geom To eral) — 0°79 | 34°51 | 27°77 | 7°87 | 139 — 1:05 | 34°52 | 27°79 | 7°87 | 139 — 1:08 | 34°54 | 27°80 | 7°83 | 139 1°59 | 33°86 | 27°11 | 7-996] 109 | — | NrooB Pe 7 1°59 | 33°85 | 27°10 | 7-97 | 118 | — N70B ie 2340 || 0000 3 are - 1-49)|| 33°86 | 27-12 || 7-92 | 113 | — N50 V 100-0 0015 ic ? 0°59 | 33°93 | 27°23 | 7°93 | 124 | — | N70V 50-0 — 0°10 | 33°94 | 27:28 | 7-91 | 124 | — 100-50 — 0:28 | 33°95 | 27:29 | 7°89 |] 130 | — 95 250-100 — o'I§ | 33°98 | 27°31 | 7°87 | 130 | — ¥ 500-250 — 0°08 | 34°02 | 27°34 | 7°85 | 133 | — »» 750-500 — 0:08 | 34°14 | 27°44 | 7°85 | 133 | — 5 goo-650 | — | 0245 0°13 | 34°20 | 27-47 | 7°81 | 133 0°33 | 34°34 | 27°58 | 7°80 | 139 0°52 | 34°46 | 27-66 | 7°75 | 132 0°70 | 34°57 | 27°74 | 7°81 | 139 — 0°56 | 34°54 | 27°78 | 7°81 | 136 — 0°84 | 34°50 | 27°76 | 7°85 | 136 — 0°95 | 34°56 | 27°81 | 7°84 | 136 — 1°23 | 34°57 | 27°83 | 7°89 | 139 — 1°33 | 34°55 | 27°82 bottle had touched bottom ESO} |3 4500) 27-20\\7207 ||) 120) | — N50 V 100-0 0759) |) — — |A 26iii 29 1-89 | 33°99 | 27°19 | 7°96 | 128 | — N70V 50-0 1-89 | 33°98 | 27°18 | 7-96 | 131 | — ¥ 100-50 1°87, || 34-00 | 27°20 | 7-92 | 132 | — > 200-100 | — | 0830 1:79) || 34:00! 27-21 ||7-97 ||| 132 | — || NiroolB | 7 2 - 0-77 | 34:03 | 27°30 | 7-92 | 132 | — | N70B |J ea) 0859 | 0919 3 KT 0:26 | 34°11 | 27-40 | 7-90 | 143 o-14 | 34°21 | 27-48 | 7-89 | 139 0°34 | 34°24 | 27°50 | 7°88 | 148 0°36 | 34°36 | 27°59 | 7°83 | 148 0°55 | 34°49 | 27°68 | 7°86 | 148 2:26 | 33°46 | 26-74 | 8-00 | 119 | — | N50V 100-0 1333 | — — |A 28 ili 29 220334302672) |: |, 120) || — N70V 50-0 2228) (038AAal 20-72) |6:00)||(123) | S 100-50 2°09 | 33°45 | 26°75 | 8:00 | 120 | — " 250-100 | — | 1412 0°69 | 33°74 | 27°07 | 7-91 | 136 | — | Ni0oB || 2 > —O2Ii oe 257-22) eel 43 —— N70B |/{ aaa E4408 1507 $ es — 009 | 33°94 | 27°28 | 7-91 | 146 — 0:01 | 34°16 | 27-45 | 7°87 | 151 O-1I | 34:27 | 27°53 | 7°85 | 160 0-01 | 34°42 | 27-65 | 7-86 | 160 0:06 | 34°44 | 27-67 | 7°81 | 160 2°12 | 33°46 | 26°75 | 8-00 | 124 | — N50 V 100-0 ne || — — |A 28 ii 29 2:05 | 33°47 | 26°77 | 8:00 | 128 | — N70V 50-0 I-9t | 33°49 | 26°79 | 7°99 | 130) — ” LOO—5O 1°13 | 33°69 | 27-01 | 7°94 | 131 = i 250-100 | — 1645 O77, 33°77, 27-09) | 793) 139) —— | Nxco Bs - - 2 |KT an 33°85 Back oe 140 | — | N70B |J ae ae 1733 | 1753 : fo 0°29 | 33°95 | 27°26 | 7:90 | 140 — 0°83 | 34°05 | 27°40 | 7°85 | 151 — 0°63 | 34°13 | 27°45 | 7°83 | 153 — 0-01 | 34°32 | 27°58 | 7°83 | 153 0°32 | 34°43 | 27°65 | 7°83 | 158 1-18 | 34°66 | 27-78 | 7-81 | 158 2O)|| 33350-20753) 7297) || LO) ||) —— N50 V 100-0 1905 | — — |A 28129 1°79 | 33°71 | 26:98 | 8-00 | 188 | — N70V 50-0 MY WS 397—400 R.R.S. William Scoresby WIND Station Position Date | Hour ee 9 Direction | § jem | 1929, WS 397] 63° 29’ 25" S, 62° 37°00" W} 1911 cont. WS 398 | 63° 09’ 00” S, 62° 27’ 00” W | 2011 | 0850 274 NW 3 d.gn.S. WS 399 | 62° 50’ 00" S, 61° 58’ 30” W | 2011 | 1400 738 NE It. gy. M.d.58. WS 400 | 62° 07’ 00” S, 62° 33’ 00” W | 2111 |o4rs 4517 NNE gy. Oz. 98 SEA 3) Direction | § em NW I NNE oe a os Es Weather ES ie 3) Remarks ae | 2 o.m.s.| 988-1] 0-5 o.s.g. | 989:8] 1:4 vis. 2-4. 0. 995°3 | 0:6 vis. 4-5 R.R.S. William Scoresby WS 397—400 g HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS Ee Station $8 P.O TIME Te h Remarks 2~ | Depth | Temp. ° e Bea O, Depth eueL <= | (metres) | ° Cent. S *eo : pH one ceup. 1: CoS: (metres) Foon lire aes WS 397 20 OAS || ately || zu GAGs || was) |) ~ 70 Ae ; 100-50 — | 1930 cont. 30 1:07 | 33°92 | 27°20 | 7°95 | 121 = 100 2 Z fer lee ga 02)| 27-30 | 71031130 || —= || No lj 79° || 2003) 2023) SIRT 5° SS || ECT || A7F si) eh | a 60 | 0°50 | 34°07 | 27°35 | 7°89 | 136 80 0:34 | 34°22 | 27-48 | 7°87 | 136 100 | 0°39 | 34°29 | 27°53 | 7°86 | 136 150 | 0°59 | 34°46 | 27-66 | 7°84 | 136 WS 398 | 11 fe) 1°76 | 33°80 | 27-05 | 7°96 | 12 — | Nsov 100-0 sss — |A 28 i129 10 1°50 | 33°87 | 27°13 | 7:96 | 1336 | — | N70V 50-0 20 1:22 | 33°89 | 27°16 | 7°95 | 136 | — sp 100-50 30 1:09 | 33°90 | 27°18 | 7°87 | 136 | — 9) 250-100 | — | 0930 40 0:96 | 33:94 | 27°22 | 7°93 | 1440 | — | N100B || z 2 = Bel Woealias gyi 26ll 790 | 240)| == | NqeR | 72° | 70°° | 1978) FS 60 0°74. | 34:00 | 27°28 | 7:90 | 140 80 | 0°59 | 34°05 | 27°33 | 7°90 | 145 100 | 0°48 | 34°09 | 27°37 | 7°87 | 140 150 0°21 | 34:28 | 27°53 | 7°87 | 146 200 0:60 | 34°50 | 27-69 | 7°80 | 151 WS 399 | 11 ) 2:69 | 33°67 | 26°87 | 8-01 | 113 | — | N50V 100-0 1405 | — PAS 201126 10 2°68 | 33°66 | 26°86 | 8-00 | 115 | — | N70V 50-0 20 2°59 | 33°74 | 26-94 | 8:03 | 116 | — * 100-50 30 2°12 | 33°76 | 26-99 | 8-00 | 114 | — . 250-100 40 0-10 | 33°83 | 27°18 | 7-93 | 126 | — 20 500-250 50 | — o-or | 33°84 | 27-19 | 7°84 | 126 | — ” 700-500 | — | 1515 60 | — 0°35 | 33:93 | 27:28 | 7°81 | 131 | — | Nxr00B || = 2 Z Bee alecoa ese enlia7 |= | Naow fr5> | 1545) teem ie ES 100 | — 0°37 | 34°14 | 27°45 | 7°82 | 137 39 0°02 | 34°27 | 27°54 | 7°79 | 14° 200 0°44 | 34:40 | 27°62 | 7°81 | 143 300 | 0°75 | 34°51 | 27°69 | 7°79 | 143 400 | 1-06 | 34°59 | 27°73 | 7°75 | 142 600 | 0°59 | 34°60 | 27°77 | 7°81 | 137 20 2°11 30 2°23 these temperatures ob- 35 2°03 |p — _ | |= = _— = — _ — served between 1515 40 0°75 and 1530 50 0-06 WS 400 | 12 fo) 2°42 | 33°69 | 26-91 | 7°97] 114 | — | N50V 100-0 0430 | — — |A 2g ili 29 10 2°46 | 33°65 | 26:88 | 7-99 | 119 | — | N70V 50-0 20 2°46 | 33°65 | 26°88 | 8:or | 119 | — 3 100-50 30 2°47 | 33°68 | 26-90 | 7°89 | 139 | — 250-100 40 | 1°59 | 33°71 | 26-99 | 7°99 | 124 | — » 500-250 5° 0734 | 33277 | 27°22) | 7°97 || 124.) = ” USS 60 0:06 | 33°78 | 27°14 | 7°98 | 126 | — 7 1000-750 | — | 0700 80 | — 1:07 | 33°86 | 27:25 | 7°95 | 139 | — | Ni00B || 7 2 7 100 | — 0:66 | 34:00 | 27:35 | 7°88 | 146 | — | N70B |jJ aoe ROCA port g eu ESS 0°53 | 34°30 | 27°53 | 7°82 | 151 200 | 1°14 | 34°45 | 27°61 | 7°74 | 151 600 | 1°72 | 34°66 | 27°74 | 7°75 | 131 800 | 1°55 | 34°68 | 27°77 | 7°87 | 152 1000 1°47 | 34°70 | 27°80 | 7°88 | 146 1500 ‘II | 34°70 | 27°82 | 7-90 | 151 2000 0-70 | 34°69 | 27°84 | 8:00 | 151 3000 | 0°44 | 34°69 | 27°85 | 7°93 | 151 99 WS 401—403 R.R.S. William Scoresby WIND SEA ear Viele Stati Positi D H Sounding Ww 2s § E i tation osition ate our! (metres) xe 9 oe 9 Veather 5S ES 6) Remarks Direction é Direction é Ss & aN 1929 WS 401 | 61° 20’ 00” S, 63° 12’ 00” W | 21-22 | 1930 35606 NE x E /3-4| NExE]| 3 oO. Loor2 | 1-2 il vis. I WS 402 | 60° 32’ 00” S, 63° 57’ 00” W | 221i | 0850 3786 NE 3 NE 3 Co) IO0I‘4 | 1-9 vis. 7 WS 403] 59° 40’ 00” S, 64° 35’ 00” W | 22-23 | 2040 3721 IND, 5 15; || 3} || INNS S18; |] 2 oO. 100375 | 2:2 H gy: Oz. vis. I 100 R.R.S. William Scoresby WS 401—403 g HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS ° ne Station $8 P.O TIME Remarks e~ | Depth| Temp. s eb O, Depth 2 Length <2 | (metres)| ° Cent. S *oo ot pH Bee cc. p. 1. Gear Gacees) pee To eas 3°08 | 33°76 | 26-91 | 7-97 | 113 | — N50V 100-0 1935 | — — |A 291129 13 10 3:08 | 33°76 | 26-91 | 8-00 | 115 | — N70V 50-0 20 3°08 | 33°77 | 26-92 | 7-92 | 124 | — ss 100-50 30 | 3°08 | 33°77 | 26-92 | 7°95 | 119 | — » 250-100 40 2°71 | 33°77 | 26°95 | 7-92 | 119 | — »» 500-250 50 1°45 | 33°83 | 27°10 | 7°93 | 123 a 5 750-500 water sample from 80 m. 60 0°70 | 33°87 | 27°18 | 7°93 | 131 — as I000—750 — 2200 turbid 80 0°35 | 33°88 | 27-20 | 7°67 | 113 — |N100B }) 100 | — o-14 | 33°91 | 27°25 | 7°89 | 131 = N70B |{ 155° OOF Rone 3 KT 150 0°32 | 34°17 | 27°44 | 7°87 | 151 200 | 0°93 | 34°31 | 27°52 | 7°80 | 157 300 | 1°64 | 34°49 | 27°61 | 7°76 | 157 400 1°83 600 | 1°93 | 34°64 | 27°71 | 7°86 | 149 800 1°90 | 34°65 | 27°72 | 7°81 | 145 1000 1°78 | 34°69 | 27-76 | 7°87 | 145 1500 1°42 | 34°70 | 27°80 | 7°83 | 137 2000 1°13 | 34°69 | 27-81 | 7°83 | 145 34°68 146 WS 402} 13 ° 3°46 | 33°78 | 26-89 | 7-96 | 108 | — | Ns5o0V 100-0 ogoo | — — |A 3011129 10} 3°47 | 33°78 | 26°89 | 7°97 | 113 | — | N70V 50-0 20 3°47 | 33°77 | 26°88 | 7-94 | 118 | — x 100-50 , 30 1°93 | 33°83 | 27-06 | 7-96 | 127 | — a 250-100 40 1°48 | 33°82 | 27-09 | 7°97 | 125 | — . 500-250 5° 0°75 | 33°8r | 27°13 | 7°96 | 127 | — ” 750-500 60 | — 0°51 | 33°87 | 27:24 | 7°96 | 139 | — 3 1000-750 | — | 1140 80) ||| — 5-2 86 | 27-26 | 7- 140 | — | N1r00B }) , A : soo | 034 33:96 | 2730 | 7ro4 | 42] — | Now [j 25° [tt] rast] F/T 150 | 0°73 | 34°08 | 27°34 | 7°88 | 148 200 | 0°99 | 34°17 | 27°40 | 7°87 | 148 300 | 180 | 34°34 | 27-48 | 7-81 | 157 400 | 1°92 | 34°42 | 27°54. | 7°77 | 158 600 1°89 | 34°52 | 27-61 | 7-90 | 153 800 2:08 | 34°62 | 27-68 | 7-81 | 153 1000 2°04 | 34°63 | 27°69 | 7-84 | 153 1500 | 1°67 | 34°70 | 27°78 | 7-84 | 149 2000 1°43 | 34°68 | 27°78 | 7-90 | 149 : 149 WS 408 | 13- fe) 4°13 | 33°83 | 26°86 | 7-97} 118 | — | Ns5o0V 100-0 2045 | — — |Atriv29 14 10 4°14 | 33°83 | 26°86 | 8-02 | 116 | — | N70V 50-0 20 4°13 | 33°83 | 26:86 | 8-or | 123 | — * 100-50 30 4°17 | 33°84 | 26°87 | 8-or | 125 | — % 250-100 35 4°16 26 500-250 B/D ee | ae emo || eel) cae tae ” IEE 40 3°75 | 33°84 | 26-91 | 7-96 | 127 | — p 1000-750 | — | 2355 KT Colne - 104-0 0133 | 0153 1ol WS 404—407 R.R.S. William Scoresby ous Sounding Position Date | Hour (metres) Station Direction 1929 WS 404 | 58° 49’ 00" S, 65° 15’ 00” W | 23 i1 | 0840 3470 NNE WS 405 | 57° 53’ 00” S, 66° 10’ 00” W | 23-24 | 2102 2941 0830 56° 50’ 30” S, 67° 03’ 00" W | 24 ii lt-Secas 25 li | 2140 130 WS 407 | 54° 10’ 00” S, 63° 32’ 00” W sm. St. 102 1234 WSW Direction Weather Barometer (millibars) 1005'I 977°9 Remarks heavy swell 6-1 |v. high long swell 8-3. | high swell R.R.S. William Scoresby WS 404—407 g HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS ae Station 38 P.O : [ TIME L th Remarks g~ | Depth} Temp. | ¢ 0, are 2 104-0 2318 | 2340 — 0-6 104-0 2132 | 2150 99-0 2311 | 2329 100-0 0950 50-0 100-50 250-100 | — + I41I—-O - LIQ—-O 100-0 50-0 100-50 250-100 ° ui ° ox ° NI ° nN n | ol an SS 28—38 South Sandwich Islands WIND Eh eh oe : Sounding Station Position Date | Hour (metres) Ay Direction 5 ca 1928 3 SS 28 | 59° 26’ 00" S, 25° 24’00” W | 111 | 1900 — WxN 1455 SS 29 | 60° 05’ 30” S, 24° 19’ 00” W | 131 |og50 = INGaWinlle SS 30 | 60° 08’ 30” S, 24° 19’ 00” W | 131 | 1115 — INISEME | 3) SS 31 | 60° 59’ 00” S, 25° 55’ 30” W | 181 | 1200 = SWxW | 2-3 SS 32 | 60° 57’ 00” S, 25° 57’ 30” W | 181 | 1420 — SWxW | 3 SS 33 | 60° 52’ 00” S, 25° 29’ 00” W | 201 | 1600 — SxW | 4 SS 34 | 60° 51’ 00” S, 26° 25’ 00” W | 211i | 1900 — SoA || 2 SS 35 | 60° 49’ 00” 5, 26° 32’ 00” W | 2ri | 2025 — SS lla=@ SS 36 | 60° 58’ 00” S, 26° 20’ 00” W |} 241 | 1030 — NE x E | 1-2 SS 37 | 61° 00’ 20” S, 26° 26’ 00” W | 241 | 1200 — NE Xx Esl 2 SS 38 | 61° 05’ 00” S, 26° 20’ 00” W | 271 |1110 — SxW | 5 118 SEA Direction WwxN Nx W N x W SWxW SWxW Sx W Weather oO. Onute e. f. Barometer (millibars) 998 999 997 998 996 1007 1007 IOI4 1013 1004 a Ee i= ro) Remarks ei —o-4 05 | slight SW swell 06 | slight SW swell I'l | slight NE swell I'o. | mod. NE swell 03 NOD —o'5 | slight NE swell 103) 2:2 = 1:5 South Sandwich Islands SS 28—38 g HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS Ee Station 3.8 P.O. TIME ene Remarks 2— | Depth| Temp. | « o, “AS || (0): Depth ength a (aeeies) a Cae 8 “loo ou pH ae CONpels Gear (ieee) Foon To Gnile) SS 28 | 18 30 |—o-2 | 33-771 | 2710} — | — — Ns5oV 100-0 1900 40 |—o-5 | 33°80] 27:18 | — | — — N70V 50-0 SOM team a aeO 5272335) eal ——! Pp %9 100-(0) COR 20m 3arg0) 27-35) |e 250-(0) | — | 2300 80 |— 1-7 | 34°13 | 27-48 100 |—1°5 | 34°18 | 27°53 C5 |e a2 34532 127,93 150 | — 0°45 | 34°36 | 27°63 200 O15 | 34557 | 27°77 250 0-4 | 34°63 | 27-81 SS 29 | 20 o |—o-7 | 33:10 | 26:62 | — | — — Nae ee 1016 || 1031 2 KT SS 30 | 20 OW 0:35) 338243 20°72) —9 | | Neon } 219-0 1122 | 1139 3 KT SS St | 25 DOSS GSO ete ed | oe een i 135-0 1221 | 1240 2 |KT eisai 25 D | = OS) S| 2 | | ale Roun } 115-0 1440 | 1459 3 |KT SS 33 | 27 o |—o8 | 33-11 | 26:63 | — | — — N50V 100-0 1945 5 |—o0:8 | 33°16 | 26:68 | — | — — N70V 50-0 LO) || =10:715)|| 33°16) 26:68) — || —— — 4 100-(0) Z0 ||— 075, || 33°40 | 26:86 | — | — — 5 250-100 | — | 2100 30 |—o8 | 33°87 | 27°25 40 |— 13° | 33°96 | 27°34 50 | — 1°65 | 34°07 | 27°44 60 | — 1-7 | 34°09 | 27°45 80 |— 1-6 | 34:20 | 27°54 HS) |] TEES || Bee || IS HI! | SCZ) || Sere || <7Fds 200 o-15 | 34°58 | 27°78 250 0-4 | 34°63 | 27°81 eee || 2 27593282975) — | — | — NTR Nageo lxorg | coat | # [KT SS 35 | 28 OH et 5O5 11035123) 1E2 0074 | iene |||, a || Loos | 119-0 2032 | 2051 3 RT N70B |j eon 2) 0} | — 6:35 |133°22 | 26-71 | — | — | — Nee } 128-0 | 1037| 1055 | 3 |KT SS 37 | 2 OP Or 7 33x3h 20803) = | Sates ; 130-0 1204 | 1220 2 KT SS 38 5 @ jis || ergy ||apAeo | — |) = N50 V 100-0 IIIO Ba feet 335.74 2702 | ae a NTOLVS|, © 5e-0 NO) || = uAIS || BOI Ag ene | Ga => ”» 100-50 ZO 125) 133957427021 |e ” BOO meat icone HO) || = Us} || BFS || 7A 40 |— 1°55 | 33°58 | 27°05 50 |—1°7 | 34°29 | 27°61 60 | — 1-65 | 34:29 | 27-61 80 | — 1-65 | 34°33 | 27°64 100 |— 1:3 | 34°37 | 27°67 150 | — 0-6 | 34°52 | 27°7 200 | — 0°15 | 34°58 | 27°80 250 0-0 | 34°65 | 27°84 119 SS 39—53 Station , SS 44 61° 21 GI IAC0" 95205 167 307 Wi 61° 19’ 00" S, 26° 06’ 00” W Ore 219801 1S 20— 20030) NV 62° 23’ 00” S, 27° 04’ 00” W 2G] Ay “Thy gf tly! Cy NY 62° 00’ 20” S, 27° 05’ 00” W 62° 13/00” S, 27° 10’ 00” W 61° 30’ 00” S, 23° 20’ 00” W Position Date South Sandwich Islands Hour Sounding (metres) WIND SEA Direction Force 30" 5S, 26° 25’ 00” W 61° 45’ 00” S, 26° 50’ 00” W 62° 45’ 00” S, 25° 42’ 00” W 62° 21’ 30” S, 24° 02’ 30” W 62° 19’ 20” S, 24° 02’ 00” W 62° 11’ 30” S, 21° 30’ 00” W 62° 15’ 00” S, 21° 36’ 20” W 1635 1440 1730 SWxW | 2 Wxs SW xS SSW | 3 SEX Ss 120 Weather oO . rs Oo Direction 5 fy ExN |23 & SWxW | 2 Wwxs ssw | 3] . Air Temp. ° Cent Barometer (millibars) —o6 Remarks slight N swell mod. NE swell slight NW swell mod. NW swell slight N swell South Sandwich Islands SS 39—53 SS 39 SS 40 SS 414 SS 43 — 0°85 | 33°73 — 0°85 — 1:05 — 055 Z Lal ) } ce] j 995° - L1Q-O 141-0 iene 2) 8 HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS E@ Station | 3 TM Remarks pe Fee ee lee || on lnen|o | Gar) | Dems |e < (metres) | ° Cent. p.m.?| °¢-P- 1 (metres) Tea To (miles) 1142 1314 1658 L757 1420 1734 2057 SS 48 | 19 N50 V 100-0 1405 N70V 50-0 ¥ 100-50 > 250-100 | — | 1520 colo oes SS 54—58 Date | South Sandwich Islands Hour Sounding (metres) Station Position SS 54. 60° 59’ 20” S, 2a 21’ 50” W SS 55 | 61° o1’ 00” S, 23° 30’ 00” W SS 56 | 61° 49’ 00" S, 23° 54’ 00” W SS 57 | 61° 49’ 30” S, 23° 28’ 00” W SS 58 | 61° 55’ 00” 5S, 23° 40’ 00” W 20 il 20 ii 22 il 23 il 23 il 2000 2150 1630 1740 1995 WIND SEA uD ar 38 Be Weather & = pe Remarks Fi dead ee oh Reet nC A fap ee u w oa 2 irection é Direction é & & a = o-I — 0-1 || 0. fs 995 |— 03 — O-I — o-1| o.f.s 995 |}—90'5 SWxS /3-1] SWxS | 3-1 @ 1002 |— 1:0 o-I o-I oO. 1005 | — 0-6] slight SE swell fe) o-I (a) 1006 | — 1:2] mod. SE swell South Sandwich Islands SS 54—58 HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS Station P,O; Rare TIME Teena Remarks mgm.| oc, ( Gear Gece Sp an|| GE a p.m. ; To (miles) Age of moon (days) Depth | ‘Temp. 6 (Genes) ° Cent. ) ies pH 1-4 = unr 250-100 Un 4 6 6 ‘7 5 a 7 “4 123 RS 1—8 Ross Sea WIND SEA wae oe. ; : a6 eR Station Position Date | Hour pee 2 9 Weather gs eg Remarks Directi © | Directi 8 Se || tue irection é irection é geé a 1928 as RS 1 | 63° 33’ 00” S, 168° 30’ 00” E| 22 xi | 1220 = WANA W965) WEN ea oO. 997'0 | — 2:5 | Station worked in open lead in pack ice RS 2 | 63° 30’ 00” S, 168° 50’ 00” E | 22 xi | 2000 = ASIA | @ |) WANN |] 2 oO. 997'0 | — 2°5 | Station worked in open lead in pack ice RS 3 | 63° 25’ 00" S, 169° 50’ 00” E | 23 xi | 1400 = WNW | 4 | WNW | 4 oO. 1005'0 | — 2°5 | station worked in open lead in pack ice RS 4 | 64° 15’ 00"S, 171° 00’ 00” E} 26 xi | 1330 1200 NW 4 NW 3 0. 971°9 | — 3:0} lying in pack ice RS 5 | 66° 35’ 00” S, 177° 40’ 00” E| 4 xii | 0930 = NE 4 NE 2 — 993°6 | — 1°5 | station worked at edge of pack ice RS 6 | 68° 11'00"S, 179° or’ 00” W | 10 xii | 0930 = WNW | 5 | WNW | 5 Ge LOL2 35) (1 LO RS 7 | 68° 10’ 00"S, 178° 00’ 00” W | 13 xii | og40 — NW 4 NW 3 CuSs 988-8 | — 1:0 RS 8 | 69°07’ 00"5, 179° 39’ 00” W | 17 xii | — — SW 3 _ “= 0. 967°5 | — 2:0 124 Ross Sea RS 1—8 g HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS ge Station 38 P.O, TIME enor Remarks o> | Depth} Temp. | go, 2.5 . ength B | cmetres)| °Cent.| S°/co | of | PH ass | ens Gay nal RS1 | to N 100 B 95-0 1240 | 1255 4 KT RS 2 | to N 100 B 85-0 2000 | 2015 7 KT RS 3 | 12 Ni100B] 131-0 I4I7 | 1435 3 Ker RS 4 | 15 o | — 1-60 | 34:00 | 27:38 | — | — — | Ns5oV 100-0 1347 | 1348 5 | — 1°76 | 34-01 | 27°39 10 | — 1°80 | 34°08 | 27°45 20 | — 1°80 | 34:08 | 27-45 30 | — 1°75 | 34°18 | 27°53 40 | — 1:85 | 34°16 | 27-52 50 | — 1°85 | 34°18 | 27°54 60 | — 1°85 | 34:22 | 27°56 80 | — 0:20 | 34:29 | 27°56 LOO FDS) || SHE) || SAAT) 150 1°18 | 34°61 | 27°75 200 1°18 | 34°63 | 27°76 300 1°25 | 34°66 | 27°77 400 1-20 | 34°67 | 27°79 500 1-07 | 34°66 | 27°79 “RS5 | 22 © |— 1°45 | 33°89 | 27:28 | — | — — N50V 100-0 2014 | 2018 5 | — 1°50 | 33°89 | 27-2 10 | — 1°50] 33°89 | 27-2 20 | — 1:60 | 33°89 | 27:2 JO > 72 SEF || 7 = Aho) NETS) || Sunes |p See 2) || = 7S || Sure || eee) Gomes 80 | —o-go | 34:39 | 27°68 100 | — 0°35 | 34°43 | 27°68 110 0°25 | 34°58 | 27°77 125 0°65 | 34°57 | 27°74 150 1:05 | 34°62 | 27°77 300 1°32 | 34°66 | 27°77 500 I-15 | 34°71 | 27°83 RS6 | 28 O | = 1-45) 34:01 || 27-38 | — | — — |Nut100B | _ 100-0 0953 | 1015 3 _ Bef 2505)/ 34:01 127-30), —— | => x 117-0 1044 | 1104 3 KT LON | O54 (34-00 27-39) | —— | IN S0lV 100-0 2010 | 2011 20 | — 1-65 | 34-01 | 27°39 JD | 27! SNe | oe 40 | — 1°80 | 34:22 | 27°55 60 | — 1°80 | 34°22 | 27°55 80 | — 1°80 | 34:23 | 27°57 100 | — 1°35 | 34°36 | 27°66 150 | 0°50 | 34°50 | 27°69 RS7 I N100B| 146-0 0944 | 1006 3 KT RS 8 (Gal collection of diatoms from melted ice 125 RS 9—19 Ross Sea WIND SEA se || Ss : aa aS Station Position Date | Hour oes a » | Weather gs BS Remarks Direction 3 Direction 8 é € Be ° Retry arate nea ei at l,m (Ope een | ay em RS 9_ | 70° 02’00"S, 180° 10’ 00” W | 18 xii | 2115 = SW 3) = —]| s.q. 993°6 | — 3:0 | in heavy pack ice RS 10 | 70° 26’ 00” 5, 177° 43’ 00” E | 20 xii | 1645 -- SW |8&10o) — - s. 952°3 RS 11 | 72° 02’ 00” S, 177° 50’ 00” E | 23 xii | 1100 — SW 3 — —]| b.c. 988-1 RS 12 | 72° 12’ 00"S, 177° 50’ 00” E } 23 xii | 2159 — SW 3 SW 3 |D) © 952°3 RS 13 | 73° 30’ 00” S, 179° 00’ 00” E | 27 xii | 1318 522 SE 4 SE 4 0. 952°3 gy. M. RS 14 | 73° 32’ 00” S, 177° 45’ 00” E | 31 xii | 1332 = SW 2 SW 2 b. Ne) 1929 RS 15 | 74° 45’ 00"S, 179° 45’ 00” E} 11 |2015 324 NW 3 NW 3 b. 997°5 bl. St. RS 16 | 74° 42’ 00” S, 177° 48’ 00" E}] 2i | 1805 250 N 2 Saar = b. 996°3 Di. Oz. RS 17 | 74° 06’ 00"S, 178° 55’00”E] 31 |0g958 — NW I NW I b. 100074 RS 18 | 73° 07’ 00"S, 176° 15’00”E] 4i |1530 = NE 2 NE 2 0. IO00I‘O RS 19 | 73° 08’ 00" S, 175° 50’ 00” E| 6i |0020 400 h. NNW | 4 — — b. ~ | 1000-4. 126 Station RS 9 RS 14 RS 15 RS 16 RS 17 RS 18 RS 19 Age of moon (days) 12 5) 20 21 HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS Ross Sea RS 9—19 BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS PO; imezen)| Cent, | 8 los | et | PHT fmm.) 0%) | Gear o | — 1:60 | 33°98 | 27°37] — | — — | Ns5oV 50 | — 1°80 | 34°22 | 27°55 | — | — — |Nui1o00H 80 | — 0°30 | 34°36 | 27-62 go 0°20 | 34°48 | 27-70 100 0°79 | 34°53 | 27°71 300 1°45 | 34°67 | 27°77 500 I-30 | 34°70 | 27-81 o | — 1-00 | 34°14 | 27-48 | — | — — N50 V 50 | — 1°80 | 34:24 | 27°58 80 0:00 | 34°51 | 27°73 go | 0°60 | 34°58 | 27°75 100 0°85 | 34°59 | 27°75 300 1°48 | 34°70 | 27-80 400 1°35 | 34°70 | 27-81 500 1°20 | 34°75 | 27°86 o | — 0:80 | 34:18 | 27-50 | — | — — |Nr100B 5 || = weete) || eytons))|| yogi |) || = N50 V IO | — I-E5 | 34°18 | 27-51 ZOD ae ea Stel Oh 27052 30! | — 1°20 | 34°19)! 27-53 40 | — 1°50 | 34:22 | 27°55 60 | — 1°40 | 34°24 | 27°57 80 | — 0°95 | 34°38 | 27°67 TOO | — 9°45 | 34°49 | 27°73 150 0:20 | 34°58 | 27°78 200 | 0°80 | 34°64 | 27°79 300 I-00 | 34°67 | 27°80 400 1-00 | 34°66 | 27°79 500 1-00 |-34°67 | 27-80 Io | — 0-80 | 34-14 | 27-47 | — | — — | Nsov 20 | — 1-05 | 34°14 | 27°48 AOD E451) 34527 [2752 60 | — 1-60 | 34:26 | 27°59 80 | — 1:20 | 34°35 | 27°66 100 | — 0°80 | 34°46 | 27°72 150 0-40 | 34°61 | 27-80 200 0°75 | 34°61 | 27°77 300 0:00 | 34°66 | 27°85 400 | — 0°30 | 34°67 | 27°88 SUG) || ey = N100B N100B N100B N100B — — N 100 H N100B fo} 1°50 N50V Io | 0°75 | 34°35 | 27°56 Depth TIME Length Remarks (metres) F of ON rom To (miles) 100-0 2207 | 2208 3-0 | 0320 | 0345 | 23 100-0 1826 | 1827 collection of diatoms from melted ice gi-o 2159 | 2224 : KT 100-0 2346 | 2347 100-0 1319 | 1320 55-0 1326 | 1356 2 |KTr 46-0 2018 | 2105 4 KT 37-0 1808 | 1850 2$ | KT gi-o | 2012 | 2105 25 iE 137-0 1008 | 1030 2 KT I-o 1530 | 1550 ; : 95-0 1618 | 1640 2 KT 100-0 0058 | 0059 RS 19—23 Ross Sea WIND 4 aa Sounding 7 Station Position (metres) Weather Barometer (millibars) Air Temp. ° Cent Direction Direction RS 19 | 73° 08’ 00” S, 175° 50’ 00” E cont. RS 20 | 72° 30’ 00” S, 176° 18’ 00" E] 8i NW-SW| 6 RS 21 | 73° 30’ 00” S, 178° 00’ 00” E} 101 425 R. RS 22 | 74° 27’ 00"5,.179° 07’ 00” W] 151 RS 23 | 74° 20’ 00” S, 179° 50’ 00” E} 171 128 Station a a RS 19 cont. RS 20 | 27 RS 21 | 29 RS 22 5 RS 23 7 Depth (metres) 150 210 HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS Ross Sea BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS 1 P.O; TIME Length Temp. | co Bab O, : Deptt 2 3 Gant. S “leo or pH Sane Capel: Gear Gaietes) Room To Gale — 0°45 | 34°35 | 27°63 — 100 | 34°35 | 27°65 — 1°15 | 34°36 | 27°65 — 1°30 | 34°35 | 27°66 ei S0)|| 3444) 2 787° — 0°78 | 34°50 | 27°75 0°65 | 34°61 | 27°78 0°35 | 34°65 | 27°82 — 1:25 | 34°61 | 27-88 — 1°75 | 34°67 | 27°93 — 1:95 | 34:81 | 28-06 0:00 N50 V 100-0 2352 | 2353 — 0°45 Ni00B | 119-0 0535 | 0600 tt | KT —o'80 — 0°95 | 34°30 | 27°60 — 0°90 | 34°39 | 27°68 — 0-80 0°50 | 34°59 | 27°77 — 0-40 | 33°83 | 27-21} — | — — |Nui100H O-5 1040 | 1100 2 — 0°52 | 33°85 | 27°22] — | — — N50 V 100-0 I51I | 1512 — 0°55 | 33°85 | 27:22 — 0°55 | 33°85 | 27°22 ay LSE) |EesD pee — 1:40 | 34°16 | 27°50 — 1°50 | 34°31 | 27°63 — 100 | 34°41 | 27-69 — 0°35 | 34°42 | 27-66 0°25 | 34°62 | 27°81 0°70 | 34°62 | 27°79 | 0:20 | 34°65 | 27°83 — 0°30 | 34:68 | 27-89 10:3011/ 34°80) 127799) | — 1) —— I a= = == rag lel oe 0°50 0°50 974591133193) “7123 0°20 | 33°94 | 27:26 TS ORSI | Seets) | eas) — 0°60 | 34°27 | 27°56 — 0°98 | 34°37 | 27°66 — I'Io | 34°40 | 27°68 = HIS) || EP aese || SOAS) — 0°65 | 34°52 | 27°77 — 0°45 | 34°57 | 27°80 —~ 0-70 — 0°50 | 34°61 | 27°85 O85) e4e07n 27241 | — |e == N50 V | 100-0 2145 | 2146 PID || eed | 7 PD) || Sar Ed || Saha ETO || Seria) | aha OTC IS A224 27S 0°65 | 34°17 | 27°42 = O25 || SHEL || 27/5) — 0°80 | 34°33 | 27°61 — 1:00 | 34°42 | 27°69 — 0°95 | 34°48 | 27°75 — 0°90 | 34°57 | 27°83 — 105 | 34°57 | 27°83 — 0°90 | 34°57 | 27°83 129 RS 19—23 Remarks bottle touched bottom RS 24—29 Station Ross Sea WIND Direction SEA Direction RS 24 | 75°09’ 00" S, 179° 32’ 00” W RS 25 | 74° 46’00"S, 179° 12'00” W RS 26 | 72°55'00"S, 179° 53’ 00” W RS 27 | 73° 10’ 00” S, 179° 00’ 00” E RS 28 | 73° 07’ 00” 5, 178° 30’ 00” E RS 29 | 72° 44’ 00"S, 179° 55’ 00” W Sounding Date | Hour (metres) 1929 221 |0930 465 Di. Oz. 241 |0930| — 390 Di. Oz. 301 |2100} 700-goo S. St. 311 | 1330 800 2ii |OIIO — I4 li | 2100 1000 SSW W NE NW W 130 N Ww SSW NE NW u@ | & ae | x 997°0 | — 3°0 994°9 | 070 992'2 | — 1:0 978-6 | — 3°0 968-5 | — 3:0 966-8 | — 1-0 Remarks Ross Sea RS 24—29 HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS Station P.O TIME en Remarks D Tem 25 D “ gth epth ESPs yes ot pH |mgm. O, Gear epth ———_——_| of tow (metres) | ° Cent. pin cc. p. 1. (metres) ie To (miles) Age of moon (days) 0°70 27°48 | — | — N50V 100-0 1053 | 1054 Og 27°55 0°05 27°64 —o-80 27°73 = OL) 20 — 0°85 27°08 — 0°85 27°10 — 0°85 27°58 — 0:90 1 SUMMARISED LIST OF STATIONS The positions of all stations made by the R.R.S. ‘William Scoresby’ between January 1928 and the 6th of May 1929 are shown on the charts reproduced in Plates I-VIII. The following list indicates on which chart each of the stations is to be found. The stations made near the South Sandwich Islands are to be found on Plate IX, those made in the Ross Sea on Plate X. RERESs Wil LAN SCORES Bye Station Date Place WS 137-143 8-14. 11. 28 Falkland Islands to South Georgia WS 144-195 Ig. ii—13. ii. 28 Off South Georgia WS 196-202 14-23. iv. 28 South Georgia to Clarence Island WS 203-209 25-29. iv. 28 Clarence Island to Falkland Islands WS 210-250 29. V.—20. vii. 28 Off Falkland Islands and between Falkland Islands and South America WS 251-256 19-24. vill. 28 Falkland Islands to South Georgia WS 257-285 27. Vili —18. ix. 28 Off South Georgia WS 286-288 18-19. ix. 28 Edge of pack-ice to east of South Georgia WS 289-296 I-4. x. 28 Off South Georgia WS 297-310 4-8. x. 28 Edge of pack-ice to east of South Georgia WS 311-313 10. X.—5. xi. 28 Off South Georgia WS 314-320 1-16, xii. 28 South Georgia to Falkland Islands WS 321-373 16. xii. 28-21. 1. 29 Off South Georgia WS 374-381 6-14. 1. 29 South Georgia to South Orkneys and South Shetlands WS 382-399 15-20. il. 29 Bransfield Strait, South Shetlands WS 400-406 21-24. ll. 29 Drake Strait WS 407-409 25-26. 11. 29 Staten Island to Falkland Islands WS 410-416 13-17. ill. 29 Falkland Islands to South Georgia WS 417-426 10-15. iV. 29 Off South Georgia WS 427-433 28. iv.—6. v. 29 South Georgia to Port Stanley PLATES I—xX YSIMUseIH Wosy FSO opnyisucTy oSE 10, oe Oe oh ae BE of Ge Of OF Of Lt? 108 DMO LOTT ny nn rT 10601100111 001 1101 11 TT 1 Vue vt COT MMM} DIM INO. IMO} 9G FI 2| eae VIDYOAD HLAOS Fos zersme 08 1arsMe H oBt'sme +el'sime A e4isme E A ssisMme H H ePID Ye i Sc] | ca Pil; fehl jos ZLVS'M ML 2458 BLISM | 2, ° | Co, Q 98I\SMe Oe = | J 42adoo 2. Zei'sime L B i 8ersme B ozisme S21SM PES EZISM IZISM OZISM Gals) spb S4oyg . ZZVS'M e0]49Y4) 9 Oe B 3 0 GLAU OLY BOs ; . z6l'sime E F dor? H 2 ra = B ip oe *Z6I'SM E A aP, = ¥ B F a esse : iat : | ee 5 S6IS'M, ~Se'S'M,_ ___#SI'SiM,___"__, SS —..-°% 37 SNM | @? & ow c: iP gorsme E Lol Obl'sme ssi'sme MS ESING : E eS, sorsme 3 : alsin worse eersme H B & iS BbI'SMe esisme i sorsme 20% 6tI'S'Me ie ae DOTEING ose zsi'sme 6arsme Hoe E Barsme B H Osi'sme +6I5'me : H esis Me o6tisime H IST B'Me | 161'SMe re H EYS me esisme y : vers'me H | rath Ree z isi'S'Me 2 AAT m1 ———— uoyvelouag Ban Tenby Sqaequeq s Og GS 0) 009 3% FT 9744979 + NVHOO [NU GS AHLAOS z Su Ebrs Me OF 9 4 : GE? ES EY PH) ED BES LPF EIS FLT) PSY I [sexy alas] = ae a eS ES Ee ee en Ee Ee Be Be ee Ee Be Ee ee ee of eo7sme vOz'sMe sO BOSSMe ovyl Fras : Itl'SMe Yomuserzy | worF 48eq| epnz.duocTy Eliz 00S oS Q? ue de eecavens zdzsm Boz'sm, 6O7'SMA Gg mugyor? T . \ . | By S (Fe Qh \g poompsn g i EE Si eS! LU Ne = eS ee eee sal DISCOVERY REPORTS, VOL. Ill PLATE III 66° 65° 64° 63° a nnn *WS.236 W.S.21 C.Tres Puntas fs 2 °WS.215.216 *w.S.220 °W.S.235 W.S.221 © ¢/W.S.222 eWS.214 ew.s.223 *WS.226 W.S.212,213 © °W.S.232,233 | eWw.S 230,231 °W.S.210,211 a cr °w.S.225 I a 5m = L, | Va *w.S.229 ie D5 Ss Jason I> , - tor? 2g "s- sy" fz OBEECIG Ce ONS 243) Elephant ei , ae 4 pose ule ve oW.S 228 W.S.239 ¢ Uee,, Jason I. or mm °WS.240,241 ewS.244 ews 249 oY Atos p.steP™ oW.S.246 \e °W.S.245 as x r aw ws.248 nT ——_ 1m » Beaucheéne I. D ISLANDS Bank 6 66° 65° 64° Long fitide West 60m Gre Oleh WoIMuUseig wore FSO Spnuyzisuo'y Of LE 8 = TM an TM 9S DMT VIDSYHOUS HLNOS 267 SMe s6zsmMe DOM y6esMe E67 SMe NTT Hl ALND 8 cies Me ONT sl THB 810% my 3 6 GON UIUULy ty ‘om 1BZSM OBSZSM 6L47SM ed em _bersmtezsm Bosh : A 8z'SM O6eS Moyo DO O6c'SMe POMONA ziesme * o92sMe sLeosMe 19zZS'Me bLesMe QzSMe Ha ITTUN ALANA €4es sh E92z'S' voeSMe —I ooo rr rr res I —— sauners 1. @ MONTAGU I. FREEZELAND RK, #** & BRISTOL: BELLINGSHAUSEN L. OOK I. THULE I. @. @) BONE ees. So x Fig. 2. The South Sandwich Islands. to the north and next morning (February 2) yet more, appearing as “two hummocks just peeping over the horizon”’. Cook approached the land seen the previous evening, finding it to be of considerable height, with its summit lost in the clouds, and covered with ice and snow “except on a projecting point on the north side and two hills seen over this point which probably might be two islands. These only were clear of snow and HISTORY OF THE ISLANDS 139 seemed to be covered with green turf”. The weather becoming hazy Cook continued to the north, leaving the land “ under the supposition of its being an island” with the name Saunders Isle. On the morning of the 3rd he came up with the two hummocks seen the previous day; he found them to be two islands with a rock between, and he called them the Candlemas Islands, after the day on which they were discovered. Cook then continued his voyage to the east and thus missed sighting the three northern islands of the group. In his journal on February 6 he writes: “I concluded that what we had seen, which I named Sandwich Land, was either a group of islands, or else a point of a continent. For I firmly believe that there is a track of land near the pole which is the source of most of the ice that is spread over this vast Southern Ocean”. Forty-five years later Cook’s discoveries were completed and extended by the re- markable work of Capt. Fabian Gottlieb von Bellingshausen! of the Imperial Russian Navy in the corvettes ‘Vostok’ and ‘Mirnii’. On December 22 1819, steering east-north-east, an island was sighted to the north of any of the land discovered by Cook. It proved to be small, high and snow-covered, and Bellingshausen named it Leskov, after the first lieutenant of the ‘Vostok’. On the next day another island, which he called Visokoi, was seen to the east. It had a high mountain in the middle and was almost completely covered with ice and snow. “The island is round with a circumference of about 12 miles, but it is impossible to land on the steep rocky shore.” Thinking that certain thick black clouds to the north betokened more land Bellingshausen sailed in that direction, discovering a third island with a crater ‘‘ from which a thick vapour of a most unpleasant odour continually rose. As we sailed with the wind along the island we noted that this vapour made a permanent dense cloud and gave the impression from afar of the thick smoke which rises from the funnel of an engine’’. Bellingshausen sailed round the island and called it Zavodovski, after the second-in-command of the ‘ Vostok’. He hove to for the night and next day lowered a boat and succeeded in making a landing. The shore party reported that half-way up the mountain they found the ground warm, and that there were many penguins sitting on their eggs. “A particularly bad odour came from the great quantity of bird dung, and forced them to return quickly to the vessel.”’ Bellingshausen called these three new islands the Marquis de Traverse Islands, and then turned south to examine the lands discovered by Cook. With three chronometers in place of the one which Cook carried he was able to determine their positions with greater accuracy, and by sailing to the eastward of them he proved conclusively that all were islands and that Cape Montagu, Cape Bristol and Southern Thule were not parts of an Antarctic continent. He pushed far to the south of Southern Thule, meeting much pack-ice, and on January 4 1820, reached lat. 65° 25'S, when, “with a range of 40 miles from the look-out, no continuation of the Sandwich Islands could be seen towards the South”. Returning north he passed to the west of Southern Thule and Bristol and then 1 Bellingshausen’s narrative of his Antarctic voyage is extant only in Russian. The extracts here given are from a translation made for the Hydrographic Department of the Admiralty. An account of the voyage will be found in Mill, The Siege of the South Pole, p. 114 (London, 1905). 140 DISCOVERY REPORTS steered east ‘‘to make a new attempt to get to the southward at another more favourable point”’. Bellingshausen reported that there were three Candlemas Islands instead of two— one of his very few errors; but he stated correctly that there were three islands in Southern Thule. For one of the latter he retained the name Thule, while another he called Cook Island. Cook had named the group Sandwich Land, and Bellingshausen says: “Captain Cook saw these islands first and, as he had thus named them they must stand, as a memory of the daring explorer to be handed on to posterity. Consequently I call them, also, Sandwich Islands”’. Since the time of Bellingshausen little survey work has been attempted at the islands, and though they must frequently have been sighted by sealers in the last century and in recent years by whalers, very few have recorded their visits. Morrell,! whose account of his voyages is generally discredited, says that in 1823 he examined the islands from the Candlemas Group to Southern Thule. He remarks that he saw ‘‘nine burning volcanoes”’ and that “three of the islands had vomited out so much of their entrails that their surfaces were nearly even with the water”. In 1830 Capt. James Brown,* when engaged on a sealing voyage in the schooner ‘Pacific’, re- discovered the three northern islands first found by Bellingshausen. Knowing nothing of Bellingshausen’s voyage he gave them new names, and with less reason gave a new name also to Saunders Island. His men landed on Zavodovyski and noted that steam was issuing from the ground at many points as well as from the main crater. On Visokoi they found ‘“‘a burning mountain with smoke issuing in different places”. In the same year (1830) John Biscoe* in the brig ‘Tula’, with the cutter ‘Lively’ in com- pany, in the voyage in which he discovered Enderby Land, visited Montagu’ and sighted Bristol and Saunders Islands. From 1830 there appear to be no records of any visits to the islands until 1908, when Capt. C. A. Larsen, the pioneer of modern Antarctic whaling, examined the group in the S.S. ‘Undine’ in the hope of finding a site for a whaling station. Owing to lack of harbours he failed in his main object, but in the course of his expedition he was able to carry out some very useful work. Of the eleven islands he visited seven: he was unable to approach the Thule Group by reason of pack-ice, and he appears to have missed the south-western island of the Candlemas Group in the fog. Larsen was extremely suc- cessful in making landings on the islands. Hitherto Zavodovski was the only island on 1 Morrell, A Narrative of Four Voyages..., p. 66 (New York, 1832). 2 See Fricker, The Antarctic Regions, pp. 62-4 (London, 1904). 3 See E. Fanning, Voyages round the World, pp. 440-3 (London, 1834). 4 The journal of John Biscoe’s voyage, in the possession of the Royal Geographical Society, is printed in The Antarctic Manual, pp. 305-25 (London, r1gor). 5 The compiler of the Notes on the Sandwich Islands, drawn up for the use of the Hydrographic De- partment of the Admiralty, calls attention to the curious circumstance that Brown was at Visokoi and Biscoe at Montagu on the same day (22 December 1830). ‘They do not appear to have met. 6 Larsen’s report does not appear to have been published. The notes and extracts given here are from a translation prepared for the Colonial Office. HISTORY OF THE ISLANDS 141 which a landing had been reported. On this island Larsen landed, and he or some of his party also succeeded in getting ashore on Candlemas, Saunders, Montagu and Bristol. At each of these islands geological specimens were obtained, and trawls and dredges for collecting zoological material were used at a number of localities." Larsen’s landing on Zavodovski was adventurous enough. In his report he says: One of the boats was a pram, and I went on board that in order to try landing. In a manner we succeeded in this, but the heavy swell capsized the pram and threw us into the icy water, but on shore we came... .As the swell was on the increase we were obliged to put out the pram again, and we brought with us some stone samples. Then we rowed along the coast to the middle of the island just to where the fuming exhalations are to be found... .Here I went on board the pram again, as the swell was running too high to land with one of the other boats, but it was a risky affair. The pram shipped water before we could put on shore and all three were thrown into the icy water again. It was with great difficulty that we could save pram, oars, guns, etc. The pram capsized in the breakers, but we succeeded in getting it on shore without other damages than broken tholepins and a hole in the bottom. All the collection of stone samples from the first landing place were lost. On shore Larsen became dizzy and was almost poisoned by fumes issuing from cracks in the ground, and though he succeeded in getting back safely to his ship he was seriously ill for some months. Of a number of the islands he made rough sketch-plans, and that these are not more accurate is due no doubt to the illness which overtook him after his first landing. In rg11 the second German South-polar Expedition, under Lieut. W. Filchner, visited the northern islands of the group in the S.S. ‘Deutschland’. The weather appears to have been bad and no survey work was attempted. Filchner, however, gives in his book? a description, a photograph and three sketches of Leskov. He notes that puffs of white cloud rose repeatedly from the summit, but was in doubt whether these were steam from a volcano or snow driven by the wind. Visokoi was sighted during a break in the weather and was determined as lying 6 to 8 miles S 55° E of its charted position. The Candlemas Group must have been passed at some distance, for Filchner, though giving a fairly accurate sketch, states that there is only a single island. Zavodovski was seen under better conditions; its volcanic activities are described and two sketches of it are given. Shortly after the ‘Deutschland’s’ visit, and in the same season, a small expedition set out to hunt whales in the vicinity of the islands. Mr H. Jensen, now Chief Engineer of the whaling transport ‘Peder Bogen’, who took part in the voyage, tells us that it was undertaken by two vessels under the command of Capt. Ole Jérgensen: a large whale catcher, the ‘ Thulla’, with the barque ‘ Havfruen’ in company. Four months were spent near the islands of which eight, apparently the eight southernmost, were seen. A landing was made in Ferguson Bay on Thule Island, and a barrel containing a notice of the 1 The geological specimens were reported on by Baeckstrém, Bull. Geol. Inst. Upsala, x11, pp. 115-82 (1915), while some parts of the zoological collections (Isopods, Amphipods, Pycnogonids) are described by Miss Richardson, Chevreux and Bouvier in Anal. Mus. Nac. Hist. Nat. Buenos Aires (3), XIV, pp. 395-413 (1911). 2 Filchner, Zum Sechsten Erdteil, p. 111 (Berlin, 1923). Dill 142 DISCOVERY REPORTS visit was left on shore. The ‘Havfruen’ was damaged by ice and sank on December 1 1911, her crew being rescued by the ‘ Thulla’. The latter vessel afterwards operated on the Patagonian coast; but the voyage proved a commercial failure, as in the course of a year’s work only twenty-eight whales were taken. Sir Ernest Shackleton! in 1914, in the auxiliary barquantine ‘Endurance’, passed between the Candlemas Group and Saunders, on his expedition to the Weddell Sea. Fifteen miles north-east of Saunders he met a belt of heavy pack-ice, and he notes that the position of this island, according to observations made by Cmdr. Worsley, is roughly 3 miles east and 5 miles north of its charted position. In 1922 Cmdr. Frank Wild,? who was in command of the ‘Quest’ after Shackleton’s death, paid a visit to Zavodovski. Like all others who have seen it he refers to its vol- canic activity and speaks of caves on the southern side ‘“‘from the mouths of which sulphurous fumes were issuing in a reddish cloud”. With the help of Cmdr. Worsley a running survey was made of the island, and a reproduction of the chart has recently been published.? In more recent years the islands have been visited on a number of occasions by vessels of the whaling fleet. Of these visits, as of that of Capt. Jorgensen, no published record appears to exist, but we have gathered some information regarding them from the managers of the whaling stations in South Georgia. In 1927 the Tgnsberg Whaling Co. sent one of their catchers to the islands to prospect for whales and to discover whether conditions suitable for a whaling factory were to be found. The catcher was the ‘Busen VII’, under the command of Capt. H. Hansen, accompanied by Lieut. B. Dingsdr of the Norwegian Navy. A translation of Capt. Hansen’s report has kindly been placed at our disposal by Capt. J. G. Andersen, Manager of the Tgnsberg Co.’s station at Husvik in South Georgia. The ‘Busen VII’ left Husvik on January 20. Course was set for Southern Thule, but when about 60 miles west of Montagu heavy drift ice was met. Capt. Hansen steered east, but found that Saunders was the most southern island that he could reach. Saunders itself was surrounded by a compact belt of ice, but by next day (January 25) it had drifted away. The report describes the bare hills at the southern end of the island, and mentions—for the first time—that the northern peak is volcanically active. There is a reference to a preliminary chart of the island, but this we have not seen; Holtedahl,* however, has published a sketch made by Lieut. B. DingsGr of the island seen from the north. ‘The ‘Busen VII’ anchored for the night in Cordelia Bay. On January 26 she proceeded north to the Candlemas Group, where the existence of two islands with some rocks between was noted. Little time appears to have been spent at the group, for though the volcanic activity of the north-eastern island is mentioned, the Shackleton, South, p. 5 (London, 1920). Wild, Shackleton’s Last Voyage, pp. 85, 347 (London, 1923). Rep. Geol. Collections made during the Voyage of the ‘ Quest’. . .in 1921-2, p. 65 (British Museum, 1930). Holtedahl, ““On the Geology and Physiography of some Antarctic and Subantarctic Islands,” The Norwegian Antarctic Expeditions, 1927-8, 1928-9, No. 3, p. 102, fig. 44 (Oslo, 1929). 1 9 3 4 HISTORY OF THE ISLANDS 143 report states that “‘no anchorage was found in the southern waters between the islands, and the soundings gave go fathoms without bottom”’.' The night was spent at Visoko1, the position of which is given as about lat. 56° 50’ S, long. 26° 55’ W, and here also volcanic activity was noticed. Visits were paid to Zavodovski on January 27 and to Leskov on the following day. On the return passage “‘a broad belt of ice-fields”’ was encountered in lat. 55° 17'S, long. 32° 50’ W, but was penetrated after one hour’s steaming and the vessel reached Husvik on January 29. The ‘Busen VII’ reported that whales were plentiful, and, notwithstanding the lack of anchorages and fresh water, the Tnsberg Co. applied for a licence to work round the Table I. IGE 9 g ig) * e oA, < III x Saunders x x x x * x x x ; Montagu x x x * x x Bristol x xe x * x x ‘ Bellingshausen x x x Southern Thule | 8 | | cone + Cook - x x aX x x P | Thule | x | * x x = Visited or sighted. * = Landing made. islands. In the following season (1927-8) they sent out the whaling factory ‘Anglo-Norse’. Mr J. E. Hamilton, of the Discovery Committee’s scientific staff, accompanied the expedition, and according to his report the ‘ Anglo-Norse’ carried out most of her work in the shelter of pack-ice and far from any land. In the first half of the season she was to the north of the islands and in the second half to the south-east. Visokoi was once sighted at a distance of 30-35 miles, and it was noticed that a steady stream of white vapour was issuing from a small crater on the summit. On another occasion the vessel was within 12 miles of Southern Thule, but the land was not visible owing to fog and snow. The whale-catchers, however, naturally go further afield, and in one of these Mr Hamilton visited Bristol, Montagu and Southern Thule. In the last-named group 1 As will be seen farther on there are several good anchorages in the Candlemas Group, and a 10-fathom channel between the islands. 144 DISCOVERY REPORTS he was able to verify the existence of the third island described by Bellingshausen, having steamed between it and Cook Island. The island was named after Bellings- hausen, and two sketches of it, made by Mr Hamilton, are published in The Antarctic Pilot (1930). In the following season, 1928-9, several whaling factories, including the ‘Anglo- Norse’, the ‘Pelagos’ and the ‘Antarctic’, operated for a time under the lee of the islands. During 1929-30 the whaling fleet has been working along the ice-edge, far to the south-east. A ship joining the fleet on a course from South Georgia would pass close to, or between the islands, which have thus been sighted on a number of occasions both by the whaling vessels and by their transports. The first edition of The Antarctic Pilot, published by the Admiralty in 1930, contains a concise summary of our previous knowledge of the islands, and includes a number of sketches reproduced from Bellingshausen’s Journal. Omitting Morrell’s discredited account, previous records of visits to the islands up to 1928 may be tabulated as on p. 143 (Table I). ITINERARY Leaving South Georgia fully bunkered on February 21 we almost immediately met with heavy weather, and on the 22nd the westerly wind reached the force of a full gale, with gusts of over 70 miles an hour. In very heavy seas the vessel shipped a good deal of water, sustaining some minor damage on board, and on the following day we were glad to find shelter under the lee of an enormous tabular berg. Here on the 24th plankton observations were made near the iceberg, and later that day and on the 25th, with much improved weather, we were able, as we had previously arranged, to take full series of observations at three points in soundings varying from 1785 to 1866 fathoms. We reached Zavodovski on February 26, dredged on a bottom of scoria in 152 to 180 fathoms and anchored for the night under the lee of the island. For the following two days another gale, at least as violent as that four days earlier, blew from the west, and we were obliged to remain at anchor; but it eased on the evening of the 28th and on March 1 we made our running survey of the island and proceeded to Visokoi. Plankton nets were hauled the same evening, and next day we finished this survey and crossed to the Candlemas Group, taking full observations at a point midway between the islands in 840 fathoms. On the 3rd and 4th we were occupied in running surveys of the two islands of the group, completing them on the latter day just before the onset of a sharp blow from the north-east. On each of these nights we lay at anchor between the islands. It was by now evident that there was a tolerably good prospect of surveying all the islands, and since pack-ice might arrive at any time from the south-west, Capt. Carey thought it best to go direct to the most southerly group. On March 5, therefore, we steamed to Southern Thule, where with great good fortune, we found the islands com- pletely free of ice and with no indications of pack on the southern horizon. In good weather the survey of the three islands of the group was completed by March 8, in DESCRIPTION OF THE ISLANDS 145 which time also we dredged and trawled off Cook Island in depths of 42 to 176 fathoms, landed on Thule Island, and in the deep basin between Cook and Thule ran many lines of soundings and made a series of observations on the plankton and hydrology. On the gth we left for Bristol Island, taking another similar series of observations in 966 fathoms ; but here fortune failed us, and for three and a half days we lay under the lee of the land in strong westerly winds. A trawl was taken in 10 to 44 fathoms. On March 13 the weather improved, Bristol was surveyed and we reached Montagu. Again delayed by westerly winds, we trawled in 54 to 88 fathoms on the 14th, made our running survey on the 15th and on the 16th crossed to Saunders Island. On the 17th Saunders was completed and the only remaining island was Leskov. We had found, however, when plotting our echo-soundings that some taken off Candlemas were curiously irregular, and wishing to check the work, we decided to call at the group on our way to the north. We reached Candlemas and verified the soundings on the evening of the 17th, and next day made our survey of the tiny island of Leskoy, thus completing the entire group. We then turned to the south-west to take up the next deep-water station on our pro- gramme. The actual work at the islands thus occupied twenty days, during six of which we were delayed by bad weather. Though sights of sun or stars were obtained at all the islands, dull weather was almost continuous, making it difficult to obtain good photo- graphs. Temperatures were low throughout, and for a week, while at Bristol, Montagu and Saunders, the thermometer never rose above freezing-point. DESCRIPTION OF THE ISLANDS Position and extent. ‘The South Sandwich Islands are situated between lat. 56° 18’ and 59° 28’ S, and long. 26° 14’ and 28° 11’ W, the northernmost of the group being about 290 miles E $S of South Georgia. In all there are eleven islands; ten of these form a curved chain stretching north and south, while one—Leskov—ties to the west of the line near its northern end. The chain is 193 miles in length and is concave to the westward. The largest of the group is Montagu, with a circumference of about 24 miles, and the smallest is Leskov with a circumference of about 1} miles. ‘There are two groups of islands: the Candlemas Group, consisting of Candlemas and Vindication Islands, and the Southern Thule Group, consisting of ‘Thule, Cook and Bellingshausen Islands. Apart from these the islands are widely separated, the distances between them ranging from 24 to 41 miles. The positions hitherto assigned to the islands on Admiralty charts are those given by Cook and Bellingshausen more than a century ago, and our survey testifies to the remarkable accuracy of their work. With modern instruments and wireless time-signals little alteration has been made. Differences are mainly in longitude, and as will be seen from Plate XI, our positions are frequently midway between those of Cook and Bellingshausen. The only exception is Visokoi, which Bellingshausen placed 8 miles north of its true position. 146 DISCOVERY REPORTS Pack-ice. During the winter, so far as is known, the South Sandwich Islands are com- pletely surrounded by pack-ice from the Weddell Sea. The summer conditions vary greatly : in normal years the more northerly islands are probably free from ice for several months, but sometimes they are all unapproachable; and occasionally, in a season of unusual mildness, open water may surround the entire group. The direction from which the pack-ice reaches the islands is not clear from the existing records. he set being north-easterly it would be expected that the western side would be the first to be closed in, and this is what Capt. Hansen found when he visited the group in 1927. Both Cook and Bellingshausen, however, found the western side open, and the latter at least, as his chart shows, met with heavy ice to the eastward. On the whole it seems almost certain that the pack generally arrives from the south-west, but that its local distribution about the islands may vary greatly in accordance with the prevailing winds. Icebergs. Icebergs, both tabular and weather-worn, were plentiful at all the islands, and many of them were stranded near the shores. They were most numerous at Visokoi and to the north of the rocky islets lying to the west of Bristol, where nineteen were visible at one time. The number of black bergs, carrying mud and stones from the moraines of the glaciers where they were formed, was unusually large during the season 1929-30. Three of the nineteen referred to above were of this type, and later, in the seas to the west of the islands, many more were observed. ‘These bergs are invariably parti- coloured, one portion being black and the other white, and it is noteworthy that almost without exception there is a sharp and perfectly straight line of demarcation between the black and the white: the black portion is always completely black and quite opaque. There is in addition another type of berg, of which a good example was seen at Visokoi. This is in most respects closely similar to the morainic type, and at a distance may easily be mistaken for it; but on near view it is found that the black is replaced by a very dark but translucent bottle-green colour. ‘This dark green part, like the black of the morainic bergs, is always smoothly rounded by water action, pointing to the probability that it was originally on the underside. We have, however, seen to the north-east of the South Orkneys a stratified and tri-coloured berg, in which the lower part was black and the upper dark green, with a narrower middle layer of pure white. We are unable to suggest how these dark green bergs are formed, and have not found any reference to them in the literature at our disposal. Priestley, in his valuable account of Antarctic icebergs,’ mentions neither the morainic nor the dark green types, and from this, as well as from Dr E. H. Marshall’s personal experience in the whaling factory ‘C. A. Larsen” in 1928-9, it appears that such bergs are either absent from the Ross Sea or are extremely scarce. No very large tabular bergs were seen round the South Sandwich Islands, but one with an estimated length of over 60 miles was met on our passage from South Georgia: we rode out a full gale of wind in comfort under the lee that it afforded. Bergs with narrow bands of hard blue ice were seen on one or two occasions. 1 Priestley, “Glaciology”, British Antarct. (‘Terra Nova’) Exped. 1910-13, pp. 402-17 (1922). DESCRIPTION OF THE ISLANDS 147 Wind and set. The current in the Southern Ocean from lat. 50° to 60° S and long. 24° to 42° W has proved to be north-easterly and approximately 12 miles per day: it is constant and can be depended upon. The prevailing winds are north-west and south- west; both blow with violence, the former coming with a falling barometer and the latter when it is rising. As a rule neither blows for more than four days and is im- mediately followed by the other. Swell and sea rise very quickly. At the South Sandwich Islands the wind was mainly north-west or south-west, but sometimes it blew from the north-east, bringing fog and mist. Contrary to that experienced at South Georgia the set round the islands is clockwise. This we attribute to the trend of the coast-line, which bears more north and south than at South Georgia, thereby deflecting the usual north-easterly set to the northward and giving a clockwise motion. At the Candlemas and Southern ‘Thule Groups, where two or more islands lie close together, a strong southerly set of about 1 knot was experienced in the channels between them (Nelson and Douglas Straits). Magnetic variation. The opportunity of swinging ship for magnetic variation oc- curred but once during our survey, and then, though taken advantage of, was not as thorough as we might have wished. This was at Montagu, when, during a short clear period between snowfalls, we swung (to port only, unfortunately) and took observations for compass error on 16 points. We obtained a variation of 10° 31’ W, and think this may be taken as fairly accurate, though the continual rolling of the vessel made observa- tion rather difficult. Local attraction. Compasses were adjusted on February 21 when leaving South Georgia, and with observations made when the ship was steady, the standard compass showed little or no deviation. Later on, under similar conditions at the South Sandwich Islands, and allowing the variation given on chart no. 3775, it was likewise found that little or no deviation still existed. This, we consider, may be taken as evidence that magnetic conditions are quite normal. At no time was any local attraction observed. Wireless time-signals. Reception of wireless time-signals was found to be very good at all points in the group with the exception of Bristol and Southern Thule. Signals received were mainly from Washington, but Nauen was heard on one or two occasions. Anchorages: Landings. The islands are without harbours, but at most of them there are anchorages where a vessel may obtain some shelter. The best is Ferguson Bay in Thule Island, but since this is in the extreme south it will very often be inaccessible on account of ice. The next best are in Nelson Strait in the Candlemas Group; in these protection from any wind can be obtained and they are much more likely to be free of ice during the summer months. Even in the finest weather there is a heavy swell and the coast is generally precipitous and rocky: where beaches exist they shelve steeply and there is a strong undertow. As a consequence landings can only be made with difficulty, and on some islands they are probably impossible. Water could no doubt be obtained on any of the group by melting snow or ice. Owing to volcanic heat the ground on some of the islands is warm, and on one—Vindication Island—small streams from the melting glacier run down to the shore. 148 DISCOVERY REPORTS Soundings. Most of the soundings taken in shallow water during the course of our running surveys are shown in the plates accompanying this report, and some reference is made to them in the descriptions of the individual islands. An interesting feature revealed by these inshore soundings is the existence of a deep basin, formerly a volcanic crater, between two of the islands in Southern Thule (see p. 179). The depths between the islands have not been investigated with any thoroughness, but soundings of 589, 774 and 840 fathoms were taken between Visokoi and Candlemas, of 681, 721, 966 and 1062 fathoms between Bellingshausen and Bristol, and 499 and 822 fathoms between Montagu and Saunders. More recently a continuous line of soundings, taken across the bank between Candlemas and Saunders, showed a minimum depth of 1196 fathoms. These depths are all considerably less than those of the seas surrounding the islands: to the west is a basin with over 2000 fathoms and with more than 3000 fathoms in its centre, while in the east the mean level of the Southern Ocean is found at depths of more than 2500 fathoms. It is thus evident that the islands are connected by a low submarine ridge. The relief of the ocean floor in the neighbourhood of the islands presents features of considerable interest. ‘To the north of the group very deep soundings have been reported by the ‘Deutschland’ and by the ‘ Meteor’, the former vessel having found 3068 fathoms? (lat. 54° 27’ S, long. 31° 74’ W) and the latter 3664 fathoms? (lat. 55° 12’ S, long. 29° 13’ W) and 4402 fathoms? (about lat. 55° S, long. 28° W). At the time it was taken the last of these was the deepest sounding known in the South Atlantic. Immediately to the south of these great depths geological theory of former land connections postulates the existence of a shoal or bank linking the South Sandwich Islands with South Georgia, and one or two of the few soundings taken in this area seemed to show that such a bank might be found. In 1931, the succeeding season to that in which the islands were surveyed, we were able to take a number of lines of echo-soundings, and though much still remains to be done we believe that the principal features in the topography of the region are already apparent. The results are shown in the chart in Fig. 3, which indicates the approximate positions of the 1000 to 4000 fathom contours. It will be seen that the South Sandwich Deep has been traversed at three points, and we are able to prove that it extends round the eastern side of the islands far to the south of the position in which it was first discovered. Probably it is continued as far as the Thule group, but its southern limits have not yet been determined. We have in all fourteen soundings which exceed 4000 fathoms, the greatest being 4421 fathoms. We are also able to show with some precision that a connection, in the form of a narrow ridge, exists between the South Sandwich Islands and South Georgia, and it seems probable that the greatest depth on this ridge does not exceed 1500 fathoms. The line of echo-soundings between Candlemas and Saunders Islands passes through the widest gap between any two islands of the group. The line was continued to the 1 Brennecke, Arch. Deutschen Seewarte, XXXIX, p. 97, St. 52 (1921). * Zeitschr. Ges. Erdkunde Berlin, Jahrg. 1926, p. 234. 3 Loc. cit. supra, pp. 225, 274. ‘D ‘gd SV peyzeur oul] oy} Ysnosy} sassed F “SI.y ul UoTDaS dYJ, ‘Udye} Uddq DALY sSuIpuNos asayM suOrsod oy} MOYsS s}Op YORI 9Y,J, “saUI] in0}UO0D woyiey oooF—ooor 9y} Jo suontsod azeunxosdde 94} Surmoys ‘dnois yormpurg yInog ay} Jo spurs UJDYyIIOU ay) puUL vIBIOaD YINOG Jo yeYyD ‘f “SLY 4000 ------ 3000 ~ 000¢ PS ree ORONO DOnG 150 DISCOVERY REPORTS east until the deep had been crossed, and a section plotted from the data obtained is shown in Fig. 4. It will be seen that the ocean bed to the west slopes gently upwards, with some irregularities, from depths of 1880 or 1900 to about 1600 fathoms, and then rises very sharply to a minimum at 1195 fathoms. In the position where the section was taken the ridge on which the islands stand has two crests and its breadth is only fifteen miles. On the eastern side of the ridge there is no abrupt declivity ; the bottom, however, falls more steeply than in the west to a depth of over 2000 fathoms and then plunges to the bottom of the deep, which has here a depth of over 4250 fathoms. Farther to the east the bottom rises as abruptly as it fell, until the mean level of the southern ocean is reached at under 3000 fathoms. Where cut by our section the deep has a width of only some twenty miles. Origin. It is evident that the entire group owes its existence to volcanic disturbance. The rocks, composed mainly of reddish tuff and black basaltic lava, are closely similar throughout the group; and in five of the islands there is still volcanic activity in the form of steam clouds and sulphur fumes. That this chain of volcanoes is bordered by one of the ocean deeps is significant, and it is a feature which is paralleled in several other parts of the world. Volcanic activity. We found, as others have done before us, that it is not always an easy matter to determine whether steam is or is not rising from a particular island. ‘The summit is usually wreathed in cloud or mist, which as it clears may assume deceptive forms, and powdered snow carried by gusts of wind may bear an amazingly close re- semblance to steam arising from a fissure. We think, however, after examining each island closely, that the present state of volcanic activity in the group may be summarized thus: I. Islands showing definite activity, emitting vapours and fumes. Zavodovski. Main crater, emitting dense clouds of steam and vapour, near top of snow-clad summit. Plateau on southern and eastern sides not glaciated and largely devoid of snow, with small craters and fissures, some of which also are active. Strong sulphurous fumes detected. Candlemas. Southern part with its three snow peaks heavily and completely glaci- ated. Northern part a plateau of lava from which arises a hill with large crater at top. Another crater at base of this hill a little above sea-level. Plateau and hills entirely devoid of snow. Both craters active, emitting strong sulphurous fumes. Bellingshausen. A large crater at summit and fissures on south side of cone, with steam and vapour rising from both. Entire island without glacier, but with patches of snow. Saunders. Greater part of island heavily glaciated, with snow-clad cone ending in a crater from which clouds of steam arise. South-eastern end of island with little or no snow and with two extinct craters. Visokoi. A heavily glaciated cone, with clouds of steam arising from near its summit and from a fissure on the steep north-western slopes. “SOUN] BZ payvsadsexe a[vos [kOIVIOA ‘Usye} o19M sSurpunos yory ye suontsod oy} uMoys aie I MOTAq SooRsIns 9y} Sunuasasdas aul] ay} aAoqe UMOYs ae spurs! SuLMOqYSreu ay) Jo autos fo suontsod ayy, *€ “SIq utd ‘g ‘W payseur our] ay} UO ‘] Stepuneg pue dnoss sewaypury oy usemjoq sassed yr‘ yj8u9] ur saptur oo Ayzeau st pure SSUIPUNOS-OYDa Bg UO pase SI UOTDaS JI, T, ‘daoq yorMpuerg yynog pue yueq yoIMpurg yINog ay} ssorde UONDEG “fF “Sry SWNOHIYLILZE — ss 00S 000¢- 0067+ * — I $ x t se I 0s oF o¢ 0% oO SAIN VIS 40 F1VIS 00025 0002 006} ee SIOHIV] S6IL — 0001 -0001 MLP £2 0] fe oll N £2,620 | ee ied aot “$.F0,86 “V1 | 00¢c it iene : z ; : ” Hee SE Se Eee mie ae tinea le 0 i ea ea Veeco nae VON Ince TT ro = 7 fey a} Ie z Sie ut K4 Zag Se z © 6 I 3 os = 5 x2 @ e na =z 152 DISCOVERY REPORTS Il. Islands without activity, but showing evidence of warmth. Leskov!. Apparently only a portion of a pre-existing crater. Probably not now active, but with no glacier and little snow. Vindication. Thinly glaciated on higher slopes: extensive areas without snow. Montagu. Greater part of island and summit deeply glaciated, but with patches of bare ground and indications of melting snow on and near peak at south-eastern corner. III. Glaciated islands showing no signs of warmth or activity. Bristol. Cook. Thule. Very heavily glaciated throughout, the glacier at sea-level reaching an average thickness of 200 ft. During our visit all the volcanoes were quiescent, and the conditions appear to sug- gest that the volcanic activity is slowly abating: no eruptions were witnessed, nor was any glow from the craters visible at night. We think it likely, however, that eruptions may still occur from time to time on Zavodoyski and Candlemas. This may also be true of Bellingshausen; but Visokoi and Saunders appear to be in the solfatara phase, their activity being limited to the emission of steam and vapour. Mode of formation. There is clearly a tendency on some of the islands for volcanic activity to cease at one point and to break out at another. Thus the northern end of Candlemas, now the only active part of the island, appears to be a more recent formation than the high and heavily glaciated southern end. In the Southern Thule Group, Cook and Thule Islands, with the submerged crater between them (see p. 179), are extinct, the outlet for volcanic activity having shifted to Bellingshausen. In Montagu also, only the small cone at the south-east corner, probably the most recently formed part, still shows traces of warmth. Saunders is a less simple case. The high glaciated cone of Mt Michael is still active; but to the south-east there are craters formed of volcanic mud or ash, seemingly extinct, but with most of the ground bare of snow and evidently still warm. It may perhaps be surmised that the main crater was extinct for a period, during which the south-eastern outlets were in operation, and that later it resumed its activity. If these suppositions are correct the mode of formation of most of the islands is tolerably evident. For Zavodovski, Visokoi and Bristol retain their original character of simple volcanic cones, and Leskoy is probably a fragment of what was once a crater. The only island that presents difficulties is Vindication; for it seems certain that it does not represent the whole of a cone, and the soundings we have taken do not afford any clue to the way in which it was formed. In its original form each island would appear to have consisted of a circular plateau of basalt, with a central cone formed of alternate layers of tuff and ash—a condition most nearly realized in Zavodoyski. As a result of the prevailing westerly winds abrasion is most active on the western aspects of the islands, while lighter materials from volcanic 1 This island was partly covered with mist during almost all the time it was under observation. DESCRIPTION OF THE ISLANDS 153 eruptions are deposited to the east: thus, in most of the islands, it is on the western side that we find the steepest cliffs and the deepest off-shore soundings. Glaciation. ‘The islands and portions of islands that have lost all volcanic warmth are buried deep in glacier, and ice also covers the still active cones of Visokoi and Saunders. This ice-cap is similar in type to that commonly seen on Antarctic islands, but it conforms to the larger irregularities of the surface and rarely shows the perfectly even shield- or dome-shaped contour which characterizes the full development of this form of glaciation (Plates XXIII, XXV, XXIX). The ice, however, may reach a thickness of as much as 260 ft. at its coastal margin. Rocks outcropping through the ice-cap were seldom seen, and there were no bergschrunds; but not infrequently a crevassed pro- trusion in the glacier spoke of projecting rock beneath. The action of the ice is evidently to abrade and reduce surface inequalities, rather than to emphasize their relief as in mountain glaciers. The term “‘ice-cap”’ is used here in the sense defined by Hobbs! and seems very appropriate to this form of glaciation; but in Priestley’s more recent classification of land-ice formations? it has been abandoned and is replaced by “‘island-ice”’ and “‘ high- land-ice”’. The first of these is applied when the contour is perfectly even, and the latter when the conformation of the underlying land is not completely obscured. The differ- ence between the two does not appear important, for it depends merely on the amount of relief in the land surface and the thickness of the glacier. An island with high hills and very thick glacier might still be “ highland-ice”’, while one of low ground might be “sland-ice”’ though its covering were very thin. In their denuding processes and in their alimentation® the two appear to be indistinguishable. A type of glaciation agreeing with that in the South Sandwich Is. has been described by Holtedahl* from Bouvet and from some of the islands in the South Shetlands and Palmer Archipelago. Holtedahl considers that Priestley’s definitions of ‘island-ice”’ and ‘‘highland-ice”’ do not accord with these formations and he has therefore proposed a new term, ‘‘the Antarctic ice-mantle type’. We prefer here to use “‘ice-cap”’ in the sense employed by Hobbs without attempting any finer classification, but we should perhaps point out that this term is not uni- versally applicable to island ice-formations in the Dependencies of the Falkland Is. Insome of the islands of the South Shetlands and Palmer Archipelago—Low and Snow Is. are examples—the land is covered with a smooth evenly-domed shield of ice, without any irregularities due to the underlying rock, while in others the formation is closely similar to that found in the South Sandwich Is. For both these we may use the term “‘ice- cap’’, and in the first of them it is seen in its most perfect development. But there are ' Hobbs, Characteristics of Existing Glaciers, pp. 7, 8, 285, 286 (New York, 1922). First published in Igil. °: Priestley, “Glaciology”, British Antarct. (‘ Terra Nova’) Exped. 1910-13, pp. 147, 148 (1922). It is these characters that Hobbs uses for his primary division of land-ice formations into ‘inland ice”, “ice-cap”’ and ‘mountain glacier”’. 4 Holtedahl, “On the Geology and Physiography of some Antarctic and Subantarctic Islands”, The Norwegian Antarctic Expeditions, 1927-8, 1928-9, No. 3, pp. 121, 122 (Oslo, 1929). 154 DISCOVERY REPORTS other islands, including all the largest, which are entirely different. In these the “‘ice- cap’’ exists only as a fringing or foreland glacier, through which protrude hills and mountain ranges with steep escarpments, and surrounded by a bergschrund. It is clear that this type of glaciation is a combination of ice-cap and mountain glacier, for denudation is proceeding by two quite different methods. In the foreland, by plucking and by erosion, all irregularities have been smoothed away, whereas farther back the ice is cutting into the hill-ranges and in so doing tends always to sharpen the existing relief. Geology. It was thought by Suess, and is maintained by many geologists, that the chain formed by the Burdwood Bank, South Georgia, the South Sandwich Islands and Graham Land (sometimes known collectively as the South Antillean Arc) represents an extension of the folds of the Andes, curving eastwards into the Atlantic. Gregory, on the other hand, considers that so far as South Georgia is concerned this view is un- tenable and from the evidence afforded both by its igneous and sedimentary formations he! concludes that South Georgia is ‘‘a fragment of an ancient South Atlantic Land, and the south-western corner of the Flabellites-land of Schwarz”’, in no way related to the Andean system. ‘Tyrrell, however, has confirmed Nordenskjéld’s view that the eruptive rocks of Graham Land and the South Shetlands are completely identical with those of the Andes, and Holtedahl,* more recently, has contested Gregory’s views on the relationships of the rocks of South Georgia. The echo-soundings that we have taken during the last two years show conclusively that most of the sub- merged portions of the arc claimed by Suess can still be traced in the relief of the sea-bottom. In these circumstances the geological structure of the South Sandwich Islands should be of some interest; it is a matter for regret that our lack of knowledge pre- cluded field observations of real value, and that owing to the difficulty of making landings rock samples were obtained only on Thule Island. The specimens from this island, collected by Mr T. J. Hart, have, however, kindly been examined by Dr Tyrrell and his report is published as an appendix to this paper (p. 191). From microscopic examination and chemical analyses Dr Tyrrell has reached the important conclusion that the South Sandwich rocks are typical Andean lavas—a fact which goes far to support Suess’s theory. So far as we were able to observe, the islands themselves are all composed of eruptive rocks; but Freezeland Peak, situated to the west of Bristol Island, differs conspicuously from anything seen elsewhere. From a geological point of view this islet appears to be of considerable interest, for if our view is correct, it is here alone that an exposure of the underlying sedimentary rocks is to be found. 'To effect a landing on Freezeland Peak would be extremely difficult, but it might not be impossible in exceptionally good weather. 1 Gregory, “The Geological History of the Atlantic Ocean”, Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc., LXXXV, p. Cxi (1929). See also Nature, cxxvi, p. 837 (1930). 2 Tyrrell, Trans. Roy. Soc. Edinburgh, Lut, p. 78 (1921). 3 Holtedahl, loc. cit. supra, pp. 104-11. DESCRIPTION OF THE ISLANDS 155 It is probable that the volcanic eruptions gave rise to the South Sandwich Islands in late ‘Tertiary or early Quaternary times. This is the age attributed to the later eruptive rocks of the South Shetlands and Graham Land. Seals. Only three species of seal were identified at the South Sandwich Islands. The most abundant was the Leopard seal (Hydrurga leptonyx), which was very frequently seen in the water, especially in the neighbourhood of penguin rookeries. In our attempts to make landings we were often closely followed by these seal, which would come up from behind to within a few feet, raise their heads from the water to look at us and then swim alongside or dive underneath. In a small boat the manceuvres of these large animals may be a little disconcerting; but their motive is only curiosity, though it may sometimes lead them, as we are informed by the whaling managers at South Georgia, to lift their heads from the water on to the gunwale. The Leopard seal, as Matthews has noted,’ does not congregate in rookeries on shore like some other species, and for this reason it is unlikely that it can ever be taken in sufficient quantity for commercial purposes. At several of the islands one or two were seen hauled up on shore. The islands as a whole are very deficient in places where seal can form rookeries, and even where beaches exist which appear suitable no great numbers were seen. The best beaches are on Candlemas Island, in Cordelia Bay on Saunders Island, and near Beach Point on ‘Thule Island. Those on Candlemas were not examined closely, but appeared to have very few seal on them. At Thule Island a landing was made, and Dr Marshall reports that the seal here, about forty-five in all, were mainly Weddell seal (Leptonychotes weddelli). About the same number was seen on Saunders Island and these in all prob- ability were mainly Weddell seal also, though it was difficult to identify them with certainty from a boat. Three Weddell seal were seen at Montagu Island, two on the rocks and one on an ice floe. Elephant seal (Mzrounga leonina) can be distinguished with more certainty, but were only seen in very small numbers: about six on the eastern side of Visokoi, one on Vindication, perhaps a dozen in Cordelia Bay on Saunders, and two near Beach Point on Thule. The existence of Elephant seal must have been known to the sealers who visited the islands during the last century, but the species does not appear to have been previously recorded from the group and it is not mentioned in Larsen’s report. It occurs in some abundance in the South Orkneys and in former times is said to have been found in the South Shetlands. At the South Sandwich Is. there is a complete absence of the tussac grass among which it forms rookeries at its headquarters in South Georgia, and this, combined with the unsuitable foreshore and the fact that the islands are very near the southern limit of its range, must be held to account for its scarcity. No Crab-eater seal (Lobodon carcinophagus) were recognized with certainty, though some at Cordelia Bay may have belonged to this species. We saw no Fur seal (Arctoce- phalus australis), and Larsen, who made landings on a number of islands in order to look for them, reports that he found none. It appears, however, that Fur seal must at one time ' Matthews, ‘‘The Natural History of the Elephant seal, with notes on other Seals found at South Georgia”, Discovery Reports, 1, p. 253 (1929). 156 DISCOVERY REPORTS have inhabited the islands, even if they do not still do so, for Larsen stated in 19184 that American sealers once took 300 at the Sandwich Group. Whales. In recent years considerable numbers of Blue and Fin whales have been taken near the South Sandwich Islands, but in 1929-30 no whalers were working in the neighbourhood. At South Georgia and the other islands of the Falkland Dependencies, whales—especially Blue whales—tend to be scarce in mild seasons when there is little ice about. ‘The catches at the South Georgia shore stations during this season were much below the average, and the vessels of the pelagic whaling fleet were mostly operating far to the east of the South Sandwich Group. A few whales, apparently Fin whales, were sighted near the islands; but Black-fish (Globicephala) and Black and White dolphins (Cephalorhynchus), both seen in the same season in South Georgia, were not observed. Birds. Birds are numerous on the islands. Penguins are especially abundant and have built their rookeries in almost every suitable place. ‘They will not nest on the glacier itself, nor, doubtless because of the danger of falling ice, on the beaches beneath it. In consequence they find much difficulty in establishing themselves on the more heavily glaciated and precipitous islands: on some, such as ‘Thule and Bristol, there are only one or two small headlands which they can occupy, and they appear to be alto- gether absent from Cook and Leskov. On islands where the warmth of the rock has melted much of the snow they are particularly abundant, and on Bellingshausen it was noticed that small groups had climbed the steep slopes of the cone, ascending almost to the edge of the crater and to a height of at least 450 ft. above sea-level. The Antarctic or Ringed penguin (Pygoscelis antarctica) is much the commonest species, and Dr Marshall, who landed near a small rookery on Thule Island on March 7, tells us that he found the young birds shedding their down coats. Gentoo and King penguins (Pygoscelis papua and Aptenodytes patagonica) were seen on Zavodovski and Saunders Islands. They probably occur on other islands also, but even with powerful glasses it was difficult to identify the species of penguin from on board ship. Those frequently seen on icebergs were invariably P. antarctica. Capt. J. Brown, who landed a party on Zavodoyski in 1830, reported that his men found five different species of penguin, but he does not give their names. On this island Larsen found the Macaroni penguin (Hudyptes chrysolophus) in addition to those mentioned above. ‘The Adeélie penguin (Pygoscelis adeliae) probably occurs, but was not recognized with certainty. Mecking’s statement? that the Emperor penguin (Aptenodytes forsteri) occurs at the islands in large numbers is certainly incorrect. The Cape pigeon (Daption capensis), known to some of the early voyagers as “the Spotted Eaglet”’, is extremely abundant at most of the islands, but seemed to be less common at the Southern Thule Group. Very frequently it was seen flying or swimming with the Silver-grey fulmar (Priocella glacialoides), which is equally numerous. Both 1 Report of the Interdepartmental Committee on Research and Development in the Dependencies of the Falkland Islands, Cmd. 657, p. 92 (1920). 2 Mecking, in Nordenskjéld and Mecking, “‘’The Geography of the Polar Regions”, Amer. Geogr. Soc., Special Publication, No. 8, p. 318 (New York, 1928). DESCRIPTION OF THE ISLANDS 157 species were seen in thousands perched on ledges on the steep cliff sides, and we think it certain that they nest on the islands. Another species common at many if not all the islands is a tern, doubtless a form of Sterna vittata: small flocks were frequently seen sitting head to wind on an iceberg in company with Antarctic penguins. The Giant petrel (Macronectes giganteus) was some- times numerous, but the Shoemaker (Majaqueus aequinoctialis), a skua which appeared to be identical with that at South Georgia (Catharacta lénnbergi clarket) and the Dominican gull (Larus dominicanus) were less common. Wilson’s petrel (Oceanites oceanicus), a most abundant bird at South Georgia, was here very scarce, and Whale birds (Prion sp.) were seen only on a few occasions. A Shag (Phalacrocorax atriceps) was observed at the Candlemas Group, and a large flock of them was constantly around us while at anchor at Bristol Island. A single Mollymauk (Diomedea melanophrys) was seen at Saunders. Other Albatross (Diomedea exulans and Phoebetria), the Snow petrel (Pagodroma nivea), the Diving petrel (Pelecanoides urinatrix) and the Sheath-bill (Chionis alba) were not seen at all. In the nesting season other birds are doubtless to be found at the islands: Larsen reports that in November he saw thousands of Pagodroma nivea nesting with Daption on Leskov. Fish. At most of the Dependencies of the Falkland Islands fish may be caught very readily with hand-lines or in traps: on some occasions near King Edward Point in South Georgia several hundred have been taken in the course of an hour or two. At the South Sandwich Islands we were very unsuccessful in obtaining fish. Frequently nothing whatever could be caught, and the only anchorage where even moderate numbers were taken was off Shrove Point, Candlemas I. The fish were all Notothenia rossz, the com- mon species at South Georgia, or an extremely closely allied form. The few trawls which were taken yielded only a small number of fish; the commonest was Parachaenichthys georgianus, but at Bristol a small species, Notothenia angustifrons, was obtained in some quantity. At most of the places where trial was made the ground was thickly covered with large simple Ascidians (Ascopera and other genera) ; of these many hundredweight were brought on board and among them numerous interesting zoological specimens were obtained. Vegetation. Tussac grass (Poa flabellata), which grows so luxuriantly at South Georgia, does not occur anywhere in the South Sandwich Islands. On almost all of them, however, patches of green vegetation may be found, occurring rarely and nearly always on a penguin rookery, where the ground is well manured. Cook mentions two hills, seen beyond the north point of Saunders Island, which were without snow and “seemed to be covered with a green turf”. The hills must be those at the southern end of Cordelia Bay, which are bare and formed of volcanic ash or mud, but at the time of our visit there was no vegetation on them—nor was there any extensive rookery of penguins. It was on Zavodovski, on steeply sloping ground on the northern side, in- habited by vast numbers of penguins, that the most abundant vegetation was to be seen, and here it certainly resembled green turf. The only specimens we have are some col- lected on Thule by Mr T. J. Hart, and these have kindly been identified for us by Mr Dt + 158 DISCOVERY REPORTS G. Tandy as Prasiola crispa, a species of green alga also known from the Arctic and from the temperate regions of Europe, Asia and Africa. It is possible, though we think it un- likely, that the green patches on some of the other islands belong to a different species. That there are other forms of vegetation on the islands was evident; on two at least, Leskov and Vindication, lichens grow in some abundance. The unicellular alga, Chlamydomonas, which forms “red snow”’, was observed on a number of islands, pro- bably occurring on all, and samples were collected on Thule. In our trawls and dredges we obtained several kinds of red and brown sea-weed, but kelp, Macrocystis pyrifera, was not found, and its complete absence from the islands is a noteworthy feature. At South Georgia kelp grows luxuriantly along the shores and on all reefs, even far out at sea: its fronds, floating on the surface, are a most valuable aid in navigation. At the South Orkneys kelp also occurs, but less abundantly, while in the South Shetlands it appears to be absent. Growing kelp is known to be cut away by ice, but at the South Sandwich Islands it is unlikely that all could have been removed by this agency, especially in an unusually mild season. ZAVODOVSKI ISLAND Lat. 56° 193’ S, long. 27° 343’ W (Plates XII and XIII; Fig. 5) This island is about g miles in circumference and is nearly circular in outline. A single peak, the cone of a volcano, lies a little to the south of its middle point and according to our observations is 1600 ft. in height.!_ On the western side the coast is precipitous, with sheer cliffs falling abruptly to the sea, but from the north to the south-east there is a low-lying plateau rising gently to the base of the cone. To the west and north-west the water is deep, with 50 to 100 fathoms close inshore, but on the east and south-east sides soundings of 14 to 20 fathoms may be obtained at less than a mile from the coast, with good holding ground on a bottom of scoria and boulders. Owing to the shape of the island the swell carries round and it is necessary to shift berth as the wind changes. Seen from the east, with the summit bearing 242°, the island rises as a central cone from a plateau extending far to both right and left (Plate XIII, fig. 1; Fig. 5c). The cone from this point of view is snow-covered and during our visit its apex was largely ob- scured by clouds of steam and vapour issuing from the crater. When these clouds drifted aside it was possible to see two dark streaks diverging downwards from the lip of the crater—evidently fissures in which the snow cannot lie owing to the warmth of the ground. The fissure on the southern side is short and curved ; the other is much longer, and, with some sharp angular turns in the middle of its course, extends downwards for about two-thirds the height of the cone. It is perhaps to this long fissure that Bellings- hausen alludes in an obscure passage in his narrative, which reads (as translated): “the 1 Bellingshausen gives the height as 1200 ft., Brown as 800 ft., Filchner as 350 m. (= 1150 ft.), while Wild states that it is “‘not more than 3500 ft.” mm THR AO SA Fig. 5. Zavodovski Island: sketches by Lt.-Cmdr. J. Irving. From the NE: summit bearing 222°, distant 6 miles. S end of the island seen from the E: south point bearing 251°, distant 1-4 miles. From the E: summit bearing 242°, distant 2-2 miles. West Bluff seen over Low Point; the latter bearing 205°, distant 6 cables. West Bluff from the NNE: bearing 195°, distant 1-3 miles. From the S: summit bearing 021°, distant 2-2 miles. West Bluff from the 5S: bearing 346°, distant 2-5 miles. Another view of West Bluff from the S: bearing 000°, distant 2 miles. 160 DISCOVERY REPORTS mountain, with sloping sides, in the middle of the island had the appearance of two Latin ‘SS’ placed side by side”’. On the lower slopes of the cone several dark patches were conspicuous (Plate XIII, fig. 1, and Fig. 5 c) and two of these, seen by telescope, were found to be funnel-shaped cavities. They are no doubt subsidiary craters, but did not show any sign of activity. The plateau, owing to the warmth of the ground, is free from snow, except for some patches close to its seaward margin: it is black, with its surface apparently composed of volcanic ash or scoria. The plateau ends abruptly in low cliffs 30 to 40 ft. in height, with outlying rocks: all are of black basaltic lava, sculptured and eroded by wave action, and with deep vertical fissures and gullies up which the surf runs with every swell. Many penguins were to be seen on this plateau and a brownish band near the edge probably marks the position of their rookery. Where the plateau ends at the south side of the island (Fig. 5 5) is another penguin rookery on which some patches of green vegetation were to be seen. To the west the ground rises sharply and extends to the northern end of the island as sheer cliff or very steeply sloping hillside, all entirely free from snow (Plate XIII, fig. 2). The main crater is immediately above West Bluff (Plate XIII, fig. 3; Fig. 5 g,#) and so far as could be seen through the dense clouds of steam and vapour that it emitted, its western edge is broken away, so that it opens obliquely below the highest point of the island. A little to the south of West Bluff fumaroles are to be seen on the steep hill-side, and the ground here is mostly reddish in colour with some patches and streaks of sulphur. At one point horizontal strata were exposed, consisting apparently of alternate layers of tuff and ash, the former thicker than the latter. Green staining was seen at one place. On the northern slopes there is a rookery with many thousands of penguins, and here the most extensive patches of green vegetation seen in the islands were observed. The plant is almost certainly the same alga that we collected on Thule Island, but it is so luxuriant that, as Cook said of Saunders Island, it greatly resembles green turf. The volcanic activities of this island have been noted by all who have visited it, and the strong sulphurous fumes which swept across us as we lay at anchor 6 cables from the shore were also remarked upon by Bellingshausen, Larsen, Filchner and Wild. Apart from the main crater and the fumaroles on the steep western slopes, a great part of the lava plateau on the east and south-east sides appears to be active, with vapour and fumes issuing from cracks and crannies in the ground. Wild mentions caves on the southern side, ‘‘ from the mouths of which sulphurous fumes were issuing in a thin reddish cloud”’. Larsen says that on landing he found it was almost intolerable on account of the very hot sulphur and other poisonous fumes, which were blown out now and then with such force, that small stones were thrown a long way out of innumerable small holes and cracks in the ground. The fumes were so hot that one could not hold the hand over the holes without burning it. The air was quite poisoned, so that I turned dizzy, and I am of opinion that nobody could stay there very long without being poisoned. Pure sulphur was flowing out of some cracks and the whole shore was composed of layers of it mixed with soft material from the interior of the island. There are three records of landings on the island : by Bellingshausen, Brown and Larsen. DESCRIPTION OF THE ISLANDS: LESKOV I. 161 Leskov ISLAND Lat. 56° 392’ S, long. 28° 104’ W (Plates XIV and XV, fig. 1; Fig. 6) Leskov, which lies some distance to the west of the arc formed by the other islands, is the smallest in the South Sandwich Group. Its size has been over-estimated by those who have previously visited it, for it is only 54 cables in length, in the middle scarcely 3 cables in breadth, while its circumference is about 1} miles. The island, as Filchner has stated,! is crescentic in outline and is, no doubt, merely a fragment of a volcanic cone. It appears to have resulted from a small eruption which took place in deep water, and it is improbable that it was ever much larger than now. The actual crater presumably lay immediately to the north-east of the existing land, in the bight which Filchner calls Crater Bay. PS pity HT TH Wh Fig. 6. Leskov Island: sketches by Lt.-Cmdr. J. Irving. a. Conical rock at the E end, seen from the SSE: distant 5 cables. 6b. From the SE: distant 6 cables. c. From the NE: distant 2 cables; Crater Bay in centre. d. From the W: distant 5 cables. During almost all the time that the island was under examination the summit was shrouded in mist, and though the illustrations in Fig. 6 probably give a fairly correct indication of its outline, the height (approximately 600 ft.) could not be determined with any accuracy. By reason of the mist we were not able to decide with certainty whether the island is still active volcanically—a point which Filchner also was obliged to leave in doubt. We think it probable that Larsen was right in describing it as extinct ; but since it had no glacier and on the summit only a thin covering of snow, we believe that the ground is still warm. As will be seen from the chart deep soundings were obtained close inshore all round the island. There is no place where a vessel might anchor, and the land is of such small extent that it could never afford any protection. Crater Bay, on the north-east side, is flanked by sheer walls of rock falling almost vertically from the summit to the sea. Seen from the west the island is domed in out- line (Fig. 6 d), with a sloping terrace near the top and with precipitous cliffs at the water-line. At the south-eastern corner there is a conspicuous conical rock, 375 ft. in 1 Filchner, Zum Sechsten Erdteil, pp. 114-116, figs. 32-36 (Berlin, 1923). 162 DISCOVERY REPORTS height, formed of columnar basalt, joined to the main portion of the island a little above sea-level (Plate XV, fig. 1, Figs. 6 a, 6). The cliffs all round the southern and western sides are formed of rugged flows of basaltic lava, in the south inclining towards the water at an angle of 45° but gradually becoming vertical towards the west. In the north- west the cliffs reach a height of 170 ft. and here the rock is columnar in structure and forms three high caverns of no great depth (Fig. 6 c). The rock walls of Crater Bay are for the most part reddish and yellowish in colour, apparently consisting of tuff, but much contorted and not showing any definite stratification. Owing no doubt to the unsuitable character of its shores Leskov is not inhabited by penguins: the only birds seen round the island were Cape pigeons, Whale birds and Wilson petrels. Larsen, in November, found thousands of Snow petrels (Pagodroma nivea) and Cape pigeons nesting on the island. wo small patches of green vegetation were noted and the basalt rocks at many points are rather thickly grown with lichen. The only place on the island where a landing could be attempted is in the small bay to the west of the conical rock at the south-east corner. Filchner remarks that this might be possible in very fine weather, but we consider it doubtful. Larsen attempted to land, but failed, and there is no record of anyone having succeeded. VisoKoI ISLAND Lat. 56° 423’ S, long. 27° 113’ W (Plates XIV and XV, figs. 2, 3; Figs. 7, 8) This island is 44 miles long in an east and west direction, 3} miles wide, and nearly 12 miles in circumference. It is egg-shaped, with Penguin Point projecting at the east, and with promontories in the north at Finger Point, in the south at Low Point and in the south-west at Wordie Point.! Off the coast there are a number of rocks, but all lie close to the shore. The largest is Coffin Rock to the east of Finger Point, and the most conspicuous is a pinnacle rock on the north-west side. There are possible anchorages on the eastern side of the island either north or south of Penguin Point; but as at Zavodovski the swell carries round and no good protection is afforded. From most points of view the island forms a high rounded mass with very steep coast- line (Fig. 7). The summit has been named Mt Hodson’; except for brief intervals it was obscured by cloud or steam? while the survey was in progress, and an accurate measure- ment of its height could not be obtained: it is possible that it exceeds Mt Belinda on Montagu Island, and is thus the highest in the group. Fanning, in his account of Brown’s voyage in 1830, describes Visokoi (under the name of Willey’s Island) as ‘‘a burning mountain with smoke issuing in different places”’ ; Larsen in 1908 speaks of it as “this extinct island’’, while Hansen in 1927 and Hamilton in 1927-8 noted that it was active. Owing to the cloud cap we were at first in some doubt as to its volcanic activity ; for though a strong fumarole was seen on the northern 1 J. M. Wordie, member of the Discovery Committee. 2 Arnold Hodson, C.M.G., Governor of the Falkland Islands. 3 Omitted in Fig. 7. DESCRIPTION OF THE ISLANDS: VISOKOI I. 163 side, the existence of an active crater near the summit could not be established. Later, however, when the island was again sighted at some miles distance on our passage from Candlemas to Leskov, clouds of steam and vapour were seen rising from it in a Fig. 7. Visokoi Island: sketches by Lt.-Cmdr. J. Irving. a. From the SW: Saddle Bluff on the left open of Wordie Point, the latter 1 mile distant. b. The pinnacle rock on the NW side: seen from the SW and bearing 056°, 1-3 miles distant. c. From the NE: Finger Point on the right, bearing 277°, distant 2 miles. d. From the SE: Saddle Bluff on the right, bearing 310°, distant about 2 miles. e. Wordie Point from the ESE, bearing 290°. f. Penguin Point in line with Saddle Bluff, seen from the SE: Penguin Point bearing 320°, distant 3 cables. g. Low Point from the E: bearing 258°, distant 2-4 miles. h. From the S: Penguin Point on the right, bearing 047°, distant 1-8 miles. i. Wordie Point and West Bluff from the S: the outlying rock bearing 357°, distant 8 cables. manner which we all found convincing. The exact position of the crater could not be decided, but we think it probable that one edge is broken away, as on Zavodovski, and that it lies to the north of the summit. So far as we were able to observe the whole island is covered in glacier, which 164 DISCOVERY REPORTS descends on all sides from the higher slopes (Plate XV, fig. 2). Rock is visible only on the steep cliff sides and on bluffs or headlands which rise from the water-line and divert the glacier to right or left. On the north-eastern and south-eastern sides of the island eight glaciers extend to the sea, most of them having a narrow beach beneath them formed from their terminal moraine. Between them and on the other sides the cliffs are high and steep with the glacier hanging at their edges. On the upland slopes the ice was pure white, but the lower parts were frequently blackened, presumably by wind-borne dust and debris. On its exposed face the glacier often showed silt bands, and the strata were frequently contorted. At one place on the south-eastern side the glacier face was not Fig. 8. Rock exposures on the north coast of Visokoi: from a sketch by Mr F. C. Fraser. . Glacier. Columnar basalt. Light grey stratified rock. . Dark grey rock, merging into red and penetrated by dykes. Ice scree. Reddish and grey rock, covered with lichen and intersected by dykes. Debris of terminal moraine at foot of glacier. . Rock stratified in alternate layers of grey and red. Fumarole. . Scree of fine ash and loose stones. mm HF AO Ss a >: vertical but sloped back from a point a little above the water’s edge. The sloping surface was here deeply carved into close-set pinnacles and ridges of ice, which we believe to have been formed by unequal melting due to radiation from dust particles (Plate XV, igs): The rocks are generally similar to those seen on Zavodovski, but the basaltic plateau of that island has no counterpart on Visokoi. Basalt forms the rocks which lie off the coast, but on the island itself was only seen at a few isolated points. The cliffs are mostly composed of red and grey rock, sometimes stratified and frequently intersected by vertical dykes. On the north side is an extensive scree of fine ash and loose stones and about halfway up is a fumarole emitting steam and vapour (Fig. 8). The steep cliffs on the northern and north-western sides are the resort of great num- bers of Cape pigeons and Silver-grey fulmars, and there is little doubt that this is one of their breeding places. The coast is for the most part unsuitable for penguins and the DESCRIPTION OF THE ISLANDS: THE CANDLEMAS GROUP 165 only place where they have succeeded in establishing themselves is at Penguin Point. Here they have their rookery near the sea and large numbers were seen on the steep slopes above it. They can occupy only a restricted area, for the point is isolated by glacier, which divides at the back of the headland and extends to the water’s edge on either side. On the rocky beach below the rookery six Elephant seal had hauled up. No record of a landing at Visokoi is known to us. THE CANDLEMAS GROUP The Candlemas Group was first sighted by Cook on February 2, 1775, when it ap- peared as two hummocks on the northern horizon. The next day he approached the land more closely and he tells us! that it “proved to be two isles....A small rock was seen between them, and perhaps there may be more; for the weather was so hazy that we soon lost sight of the islands and did not see them again until noon, at which time they bore West, distant three or four leagues”. Bellingshausen, however, says in his narrative that the group is composed of three islands*—though his atlas shows two only—while Filchner,’ in his account of the ex- pedition of the ‘Deutschland’, states positively that there is only one. Filchner says: ““Candlemas besteht aus nur einer einzigen Insel, eine Feststellung, die auch von Larsen gemacht worden war. Bellingshausen spricht in seiner Reise-Beschreibung von drei Inseln, die nahe beieinander liegen. Da die Insel aus drei Erhebungen besteht, die auf einen niedrigen Sockel aufgesetzt sind, erscheint dieser Irrtum méglich, um so mehr, als Bellingshausen auf Candlemas nicht gelandet ist. Der Sockel diirfte ca. 33 km Umfang haben”’. The reference here made to Larsen appears to be incorrect. In our translation of his report he nowhere states that there is only one island, though he leaves it to be inferred Cook, A voyage to the South Pole and round the World..., 1, pp. 228-9 (London, 1777). In this Fricker (The Antarctic Regions, p. 150 (London, 1904)) has followed him. Filchner, Zum Sechsten Erdteil, p. 117 (Berlin, 1923). The sections of Larsen’s unpublished report which deal with the Candlemas Group read (in trans- lation) as follows: “November 14th. Gale from NW with foggy weather. ‘Undine’ has been drifting all night. At 8 a.m. the course was laid for the island named Candlemas. We met with many icebergs in the fog. At 11 a.m. we were as near the island as it was possible to pass, because here are numerous masses of breakers. On the east side of the island there is a bay, but across this there appeared to be sunken rocks of which some were seen in the breakers, and the sea was all in a foam across the bay. Also in the middle of the bay sunken rocks were seen. The southern point of the island is running out into the sea as a low tongue of land, where thousands of penguins dwell. Straight out SE of the point about one mile from land there is a small pointed islet about 35 feet high. “November 15th. All the night there had been bad weather with snow and fog. During the night the wind had turned over to SW, but continued foggy southward. More soundings and trawlings were made, but the results of the latter were small. Along the east side, outside the sunken rocks, was shallow water with hard bottom. Two trawlings also were made here, but the same small result. A boat was sent ashore to look for fur-seals, but only some hair-seals were seen. From the boat soundings were taken towards all the sunken rocks stretching across the harbour, and it was about 5 fathoms of water where shallowest, and inside all the sunken rocks an excellent harbour for boats was found. On shore here we found a long boom and a ~ wo Oo D III 5 166 DISCOVERY REPORTS from his reference to ‘‘the island”’, and from his sketch-plan (Fig. 10) in which only one is shown. Provided with this information we concluded that there was one island only; and when, from Visokoi, we sighted two widely separated peaks of the Candlemas Group, we still thought they must be connected by low-lying land, as Filchner had said. On approaching them, steering S 24° E, we found that their outlines agreed closely with Bellingshausen’s view taken from the NNE (Fig. 9 a), and on closing further it became more and more improbable that any connection existed. Before long a rock was seen between the two (Fig. g 4), then more rocks, until finally we learnt that the earliest description of all was also the most accurate: “two isles...a small rock was seen be- tween them, and perhaps there may be more’’—exactly as Cook had stated. Fig. 9. Views approaching the Candlemas Group on a course of 156°: sketches by Lt.-Cmdr. J. Irving. a. From a distance of 17 miles. b. From a distance of 12 miles. Candlemas Island on the left and Vindication Island on the right. c. Nelson Strait, between the two islands, with Cook Rock and Trousers Rock. On making our running survey of the islands we found that the larger of the two consists of high snow-covered land at the southern end, while to the north, connected with it by low ground, is a plateau of bare rock from which a volcanic cone rises. It is evident that Bellingshausen thought that these two portions were separate and thus stated there were three islands in the group. Larsen’s sketch-plan (Fig. 10) has no scale, and does not bear any close resemblance to our chart; but it is fairly obvious that it represents the larger island only. He ap- proached the group on a course from Zavodovski, and thus sighted it first at its northern end. He appears to have cruised along the north-eastern side, spent one night under the lee of the land, and next day steamed to Saunders: his diary contains no evidence that battern, also a jaw-bone and a dorsal vertebra of a small whale. There were two races of penguins there: the black-chinned and that with a black stripe underneath the chin. The boat was brought on board and the course was laid southwards for the next island named Saunders.” DESCRIPTION OF THE ISLANDS: THE CANDLEMAS GROUP 167 he visited the south-western coast. On the course taken he would not have had many chances of sighting the second island and he notes that the weather was foggy on both days. Filchner visited the group in very bad weather and his account seems to be largely based on Larsen’s notes and erroneous sketch-plan. It is clear, however, that he saw both islands. When he states that the circumference is about 33 km. (18 miles), he is no doubt taking both together; for the larger island is about 3 miles long by 1 mile broad, and the smaller about 1 mile long by } mile broad, the circumference of the two being some 14 miles. His sketch, moreover (p. 117), shows both, the snow summits and vol- canic crater of the larger island, with the peaks of the smaller seen across the intervening low-lying land. After our survey was completed we learnt at South Georgia that Capt. Hansen, when he visited the South Sandwich Is. in 1927 (see p. 142), had also reported the presence of two islands in the Candle- mas Group. Cook called the islands Candlemas Islands, after the day on which they were discovered, but we think it will be convenient to retain this name only for the larger of the two, giving a separate name to the other. And since the re-discovery of the smaller island has so strikingly vindicated the truth of Cook’s original description, we suggest that it should be called Vindication Island. As will be seen from the chart there are a number of outlying rocks round the islands, and a dangerous reef, on which stands the rock that Cook reported, extends from Vindication Island half-way across Nelson Strait.! The strait is however navigable, probably with at least 10 fathoms,” and there is deep " water inside Santa Rock, which lies some 2 miles Fig. 10. Larsen’s sketch-plan of Candle- north of Vindication Island. To the west of this mas Island. island soundings are very uneven, and on the south side of Candlemas there is a bank with a minimum depth of 42 fathoms, separated from the coast by a channel of over 100 fathoms.® 1 The names attached to the more conspicuous features in the topography of the islands have mainly been selected by the Navigating Officer, Lieut. A. L. Nelson. We have, however, thought it right that his own name should find some place on the charts, and we have therefore called the strait between Candlemas and Vindication Island Nelson Strait—S. Kemp, W. M. Carey. * At one point a sounding of only 6 fathoms was obtained, but we believe that deeper water is to be found nearer the reef. ® The existence of this bank became evident when our first series of soundings, taken on March 3 and 4, was plotted. Thinking that some error might have occurred, an additional series was taken in the same area when we revisited the island on March 17, the result proving the accuracy of the earlier observations. 5-2 168 DISCOVERY REPORTS There are good anchorages at the islands, second only to that in Ferguson Bay in Thule Island. The best is to the east of Vindication Island, between Cook Rock and Rocky Point in 11 fathoms, where there is protection from the north-north-west to south-west with good holding ground. There is also a good anchorage to the south of Candlemas Island for winds from the north, and to the north-east of Vindication Island, north of Cook Rock, for southerly winds. CANDLEMAS ISLAND Lat. 57° 02%’ S; long. 26° 404’ W (Plates XVI and XVII, figs. 1-3; Plate XVIII, figs. 1, 2; Figs. 10-12) This island is 3 miles long and 1-4 miles broad, with a circumference of about 73 miles: it lies with its long axis north-west and south-east. The southern end is buried deep in glacier and bears three peaks, the highest of which is 2580 ft. above sea-level. The northern part is a lava plateau, entirely free from snow, from which rises the cone of a volcano (Plate XVII, fig. 1; Figs. 11 a, c). The northern and southern parts are con- nected by a broad stretch of low-lying ground (Fig. 11 a). On the eastern side, 6 cables from the coast, is Black Rock, 60 ft. high, while to the south-east and close inshore is Boot Rock, which is 105 ft. high (Fig. 11 8). The plateau in the northern half of the island appears to be composed throughout of rugged flows of black basaltic lava, often showing columnar structure (Plate XVII, fig. 3). Almost everywhere this plateau is very rough, for though on approaching it closely masses of clinker and cinders are seen on the surface, it is not overlaid with fine scoria and ash as on Zavodovski. The north-western coast is bounded by basalt cliffs, 30 to 4o ft. high, much broken by wave action and with deep gullies and chasms. At one point green staining was seen in the rock. In the vicinity of Vulcan Point are several small bays ending in beaches of black sand and to the south there are two larger bays, Tow Bay and Sea-serpent Cove (Fig. 11 a). Elsewhere, both east and west of the low ground that intervenes between the northern and southern parts, and in the north on either side of Spit Point, are long, straight, steeply shelving beaches of black sand and boulders. On the western beach were many large masses of ice cast up by the sea. The main volcanic cone is on the western side of the plateau and rises to a height of 770 ft., the crater itself opening on the southern side of the summit. The cone was of a dark brick-red colour, with splashes of sulphur, and clouds of steam and vapour were issuing from the crater. Immediately to the west of the volcano, and rising to perhaps half its height, are twin cones, also dark red in colour, but not showing any signs of activity. Just to the north of them, at the base of the sheer cliffs which here form the flank of the main cone, is another large crater with its mouth little if at all above sea- level. Wisps of steam and vapour which seemed to be issuing in regular puffs were rising from this crater, and blotches and streaks of sulphur could be seen on the cliff behind it. Members of a boat party, who attempted without success to land near this crater, told us that the tumbled masses of black lava, the dark red rocks and the evident DESCRIPTION OF THE ISLANDS: CANDLEMAS I. 169 volcanic activities of the place combined to produce a hideous and unearthly scene, reminiscent of Dante’s Inferno. As we passed to leeward of the craters strong sulphurous fumes swept across the ship. There are no penguins in this northern part of the island, but on the low intervening (ZEN OS ae ee Fig. rr. Candlemas Island: sketches by Lt.-Cmdr. J. Irving. a. From the westward: the actively volcanic northern part of the island on the left and the glaciated southern part on the right. Tow Bay (left) and Sea-serpent Cove (right) separated by portions of the basaltic plateau. b. The eastern side of the island seen from the 5. Boot Rock in the centre bearing 327°, distant 8 cables. Spit Point and Black Rock on right. c. From the NW: the volcano bearing 145°, distant 3 miles. Fig. 12. Rock exposures on the east coast of Candlemas: from a sketch by Mr F. C. Fraser. a. Shrove Point. f. Stratified grey-black rocks. b. Boulders on shore. g. Ice screes. c. Glacier. h. Boot Rock. d. Dark grey-black rock. j- Yellow-brown staining on rock. e. Black boulders in dark red-brown ground-mass. k. Spit Point. ground they occur in large numbers, and in the south they are to be found wherever the glacier and steep cliffs allow them to establish themselves. The whole of the southern part is thickly covered with glacier, which, however, only extends to sea-level at a few points. In one or two places there is an outcropping of rock through the ice covering, and on the northern side there is a huge bluff of dark grey rock round which the glacier divides as it descends to the level land beyond (Fig. 11 a). Here, immediately below the edge of the glacier, conspicuous patches of green vegetation were 170 DISCOVERY REPORTS to be seen. On the south side of the island, west of Shrove Point, the glacier in some places hangs at the edge of low cliffs, while in others it falls in huge broken masses to the sea (Plate XVIII, figs. 1, 2). North of the point the cliffs are much higher, especially to the north of Boot Rock, the glacier with its sinuous margin often hanging more than 120 ft. above sea-level (Fig. 12). ‘The thickness of the ice-cap, measured at its broken edge, is about 70 ft. The exposures on the eastern cliffs were mainly of dark grey rock, which in one place was Clearly stratified. At two points boulders included in a dark red ground-mass were seen (Fig. 12), the formation being presumably a tuff agglomerate. The only recorded landing on this island was made by Larsen in 1908. According to the arrow-mark on his sketch-plan (Fig. 10, p. 167) his boat harbour should be situated near our Boot Rock: we did not find it, and the deep bay with rocks and breakers which he shows on the south-east side has no existence in fact. VINDICATION ISLAND Lat. 57° 04’ S; long. 26° 46’ W (Plates XVI and XVII, fig. 4; Plate XVIII, fig. 3; Fig. 13) This island is separated from Candlemas Island by Nelson Strait, rather more than 2 miles wide; in outline it is pentagonal, with a circumference of 3 miles and a maximum breadth in an east and west direction of rather more than 1 mile. At Knob Point in the south-west it rises to a peak 1395 ft. in height, placed close to the sea (Plate XVIII, fig. 3), and there is a lesser peak of 260 ft. at Crosscut Point in the north (Fig. 13 a). The surface of the island is somewhat hollowed, draining towards Rocky Point at the south-east angle, and except at this point the coast is formed of steep cliffs, in some parts almost vertical. At the foot of the cliffs, except on the southern side, there is usually a narrow steeply-shelving beach composed of large boulders. No signs of volcanic activity were to be seen, but it was evident that the ground re- tained a certain amount of warmth. In its hollowed surface and on the peaks a small glacier was lying, but it appeared to be of no great thickness, and in striking contrast to the glaciated parts of Candlemas Island, the ice melts long before it reaches the coast, forming two streams. The larger of these reaches the sea to the west of Rocky Point, the smaller to the north of it, falling steeply to the beach. 'This south-east corner is the only place where penguins can gain access to the island and they have large rookeries on either side of the point. They penetrate inland to a considerable distance, and in doing so make use of well-trampled pathways, on which birds could be seen passing and re- passing, pausing awhile for chat with a friend and then hurrying on their way, like people in a crowded village street. As on other islands patches of green vegetation were to be seen on the rookeries. The geological structure of the island is specially well seen in the sheer cliff face on the north-western side between Low Point and Crosscut Point. The rock here is formed of irregular masses of red and brown colour, presumably tuff, with intrusive dykes of YY i WI Yj, > | L Ba > TMG Fig. 13. Vindication Island: sketches by Lt.-Cmdr. J. Irving. a. From the N: Cook Rock, Trousers Rock and Low Point on left; Crosscut Point and Saw Rock on right. Saw Rock bearing 180°, distant 1 mile. b. Nearer view of Crosscut Point from same position. Saw Rock on right and Buddha Rock in distance. c. Buddha Rock from the NNW: bearing 160°, distant 1-6 miles. d,e,f. Santa Rock. d, bearing 290°, distant 1 mile; e, bearing 036°, distant 7} cables; f, bearing 070°, distant 5 cables. g. From the NNW, with Buddha Rock on right and Saw Rock in left fore-ground. Buddha Rock bearing 157°, distant 14 miles. h, From the NW: Knob Point on right, Crosscut Point on left, the latter bearing 054°, distant 1-2 miles. 7. From the WSW: Rocky Point and Castor and Pollux Rocks on right; Buddha Rock in foreground, bearing 059°, distant 54 cables. j. From the SSW: Rocky Point on right, seen over Castor and Pollux Rocks, bearing 060°, distant 9 cables. k, From the SSE: Buddha Rock on left; Castor and Pollux Rocks in foreground, bearing 327°, distant 7 cables. On the right Low Point, Trousers Rock and Cook Rock. 172 DISCOVERY REPORTS grey rock. The dykes run obliquely, vertically and sometimes horizontally, and not in- ‘frequently they cross one another. ‘They are evidently of much harder rock than the remainder, for they often stand out as ribs from the cliff surface, and it is they that form all the projecting points on the magnificent saw-edge at Crosscut Point (Plate XVII, fig. 4). At Rocky Point and to the west of it the foreshore is composed of basaltic lava, in one place with some green staining, and the outlying Castor and Pollux Rocks (Fig. 13 2, /) are also of basalt. On the reef which runs north-eastward from Low Point are two large rocks: Cook Rock and Trousers Rock (Plate XVII, fig. 2; Figs. 9c; 13k). Both of these form arches, the tunnel through the latter running north and south, and through the former east and | west. Both show horizontal strata of red tuff and dark grey rock. Other conspicuous rocks lie north-north-west from Crosscut Point: Saw Rock 4 cables offshore (Fig. 13 6) and Santa Rock (Fig. 13 d, e, f) at a distance of 1} miles. Buddha Rock (Fig. 13 ¢) is to the west, rather less than 3 cables from the shore. Since even the existence of this island has hitherto been in doubt, there is naturally no record of any landing. We made three attempts: on the beach at the foot of the cliffs, on the north-western side, and on each side of Rocky Point; but owing to the high swell all failed. SAUNDERS ISLAND Lat. 57° 47'S; long. 26° 263’ W (Plates XIX, XX and XXI; Fig. 14) This island is roughly crescentic in outline, with a large bay, Cordelia Bay,! in the east. Its length in a north and south direction is 5 miles, and its breadth, measured east and west, is 54 miles. The circumference is about 17 miles. Offshore on the northern side of Cordelia Bay are several rocks. The highest are the Brothers Rocks, 70 ft. above sea-level; they lie at the meeting point of three reefs, with foul ground and breaking water, which completely close the northern entrance to the bay. In the southern part of the bay, close inshore and to the west of the rocks near Nattriss Point,” there is a good anchorage in 13 to 14 fathoms, protected from the north- west, through south to south-east. With north-east winds a vessel would find no shelter, and would have to shift to the southern side of the island and lie-to in deep water. To the north of the anchorage our soundings indicate the existence of a closed basin with depths of 50 to 62 fathoms; outside the reefs there is a large area of shoal water with less than 20 fathoms, but elsewhere all round the island the bottom shelves steeply. In its topography and geology the island is one of the most interesting in the group. The whole of the northern promontory, ending in Harper Point?, is a low plateau. In the middle of the island is the glaciated cone of Mt Michael,! 2640 ft. above sea-level and actively volcanic, while the south-eastern corner is composed of bare hills in which extinct craters are to be seen (Plate XXI, fig. 1). 1 Cordelia A. Carey. 2 E. A. Nattriss, Crown Agents for the Colonies. 3 F.H. Harper, Secretary, Discovery Committee. 4 Michael J. de C. Carey. DESCRIPTION OF THE ISLANDS: SAUNDERS I. 173 In all places where the rock is exposed the underlying strata consist of black basalt. This composes the plateau at the northern end, and here it has the typical columnar structure seen at Candlemas and Zavodovski, with cliffs 30 to 4o ft. high, eroded by wave action and carved into small bays and gullies. To the west of Harper Point two large masses, apparently composed of fine volcanic ash or mud, lie on the surface of the plateau. Mt Michael, as will be seen from Plate XX, fig. 1, is most evidently volcanic, a feature first noticed by Capt. Hansen in 1927. During the whole time that the summit was clear it emitted great puffs of steam and vapour at intervals of a few seconds. The cone, none the less, is deeply covered with glacier, extending to the sea on both east and west sides. The surface of the ice is for the most part smooth, with only an occasional ledge of rock projecting through it; but on the northern side a deep rift or gulley, partially free from snow, extends up the mountain, calling to mind the curious fissures seen in the cone of Zavodovski. The lower slopes of the glacier are much blackened by wind-borne dust and debris. The south-eastern extremity of the island consists of a range of hills with heights of 700 and 800 ft., on which the snow cannot lie owing to the warmth of the ground (Plate XX1I, fig. 3). Everywhere, except at Nattriss Point, these hills are composed of a fine-textured grey material, which we believe must be either fine ash or volcanic mud. It is very easily eroded and on both north and south sides is scored by streams of water from the melting snow into parallel runnels and ravines—some of them at least Io ft. deep. Snow fell while we were at the island: it melted rapidly in most places, but lodged for a longer time in the ravines, giving the hills the appearance of being covered with a finely woven white shawl. Where the hills join the main body of the island, there is a huge yawning crater, formed of this same ash or mud (Plate XXJ, fig. 2), and, since no steam or vapour could be seen issuing from it, we assume that it is extinct. On the southern side of the pro- montory a large portion of the cliff has fallen away, exposing to view a remarkably perfect half-section of a crater (Plate XX, figs. 2, 3). As the island is approached from the south this bisected crater is a most conspicuous feature, and on close inspection it can be seen that the strata in the cliff face on either side of it run parallel to the edges of the depression and to the top of the cliffs, just as in a text-book section of a typical volcano. The surface of the depression is scored with radial grooves similar to those on other parts of the hills and the diameter of the crater is not far short of half a mile. At Nattriss Point (Plate XXI, fig. 4) and at a number of other places a layer of black basaltic lava can be seen at the water line. The cliff section, however, shows clearly that the hills are com- posed throughout of ash or mud, and that their appearance is not due to a mud-flow covering other materials. At one or two points on the western side of the island ex- posures of red tuff were seen above the basalt. In the south of the island, to the west of the bisected crater, a small mound of mud or ash protrudes through the glacier and is evidently still warm. Water from the snow melting on its surface has carried runlets of mud over the surface of the glacier towards the sea (Plate XXI, fig. 5). The formation of the hills in the south-east corner of Saunders has no counterpart in DIIl 6 174 DISCOVERY REPORTS any of the other islands, for though material of similar appearance is to be seen on Montagu and Bellingshausen, it is of small extent and there is no indication that it was extruded from a separate outlet. Because of the evident way in which the centre of voleanic activity has shifted from one point to another in certain of the islands (e.g. Candlemas and Southern Thule), it may perhaps be supposed that Mt Michael—no doubt the original seat of activity—was for a time quiescent and that it was during this period that the south-eastern hills were formed. In his atlas Bellingshausen gives a sketch of Saunders Island seen from the north (Fig. 14, cf. Pl. XXI, fig. 1), in which the bare hills behind Nattriss Point culminate in a lofty cone, evidently far higher than at the present day. If this sketch accurately — represents the conditions in 1820 it is clear that the hills have undergone considerable alteration, due either to renewed volcanic activity, or to erosion. Fig. 14. Saunders J., distant about 4 miles. (After Bellingshausen.) Cook mentions two hills, seen over the northern point, which might be two islands, and adds, “these only were clear of snow and seemed to be covered with green turf”’. This statement must refer to the hills at the south-eastern end, but at the time of our visit they showed no traces of vegetation. In Cordelia Bay, on low ground where the glacier ends and the mud hills begin, small patches of green were to be seen, and at this point there is a large rookery of Ringed penguins. A little further east, where a valley gives greater extent to the foreshore, some Elephant seal had hauled up, and here a number of giant petrels were gathered. Round the eastern end of the bay is a steeply shelving beach of black sand where parties of Ringed penguins, with a few King and Gentoo, were walking, and on which some seal (apparently Weddell) were lying. Other colonies of penguins are to be found north of Rocky Point on the west coast, and on Harper and Nattriss Points. We made an attempt to land in Cordelia Bay, but were prevented by the heavy swell and strong undertow on the beach. 'The only recorded landing is by Larsen in 1908. MontTacu ISLAND Lat. 58° 254’ S; long. 26° 213’ W (Plates XXII and XXIII) Montagu is the largest island in the South Sandwich Group. It is roughly quad- rangular in outline, and is rather less than 6} miles in both length and breadth, with a circumference of about 24 miles. In the south-east there is a promontory ending in Allen Point,! and standing on it is a conical hill 1660 ft. in height, which forms a con- spicuous feature from many points of view. To the west of the hill is Phyllis Bay,? 1 H. 'T. Allen, member of the Discovery Committee. 2 Phyllis V. Horton. DESCRIPTION OF THE ISLANDS: MONTAGU I. 175 ending in Scarlett Point.' Further to the west lies Horsburgh? Point. On the northern and western sides of the island, on either side of Borley Point, are a number of rocks and reefs lying within a mile of the shore. There are good anchorages on either side of Allen Point in depths of 20 fathoms and under. The anchorage to the north of the point gives protection from north-west to south-west, and that in Phyllis Bay from north-west to south-east. Allen Point prevents the swell from following round. To the north-east of the island shoal water extends some distance out to sea but very deep soundings were obtained close inshore in the north- west. The island reaches its highest point in the lofty summit of Mt Belinda,' 4500 ft. above sea-level. It is probably the highest mountain in the group of islands, but may be exceeded by Visokoi, where mist prevented accurate measurement. It was only for brief periods that Mt Belinda was in view; no steam was to be seen rising from it and we think it probable that all volcanic activity has ceased. It is everywhere deeply buried in glacier, which descends from the higher slopes and at the coast sometimes ends in a long and straight ice wall, sometimes falls in broken masses to the water’s edge (Plate XXIII, figs. 2, 3) and sometimes hangs at the top of steep rocky cliffs. The eastern side of the island is bounded for 5 miles of its length by a vertical ice face, this being the longest uninterrupted glacier front in the islands. The conical hill at the south-eastern corner of the island must once have been a subsidiary volcanic outlet, and though for the most part thickly covered with glacier, it shows features which lead us to believe that it still retains a certain amount of warmth. On its north-eastern side dykes protrude through the snow, which here covers the under- lying rocks but thinly. ‘To the south there is a mass of bare rock, with a deep smoothly excavated trough or valley in the ice surrounding its base (Plate XXIII, fig. 1). The trough may be caused by radiation from the rock; but elsewhere, when a rock penetrates the ice covering, the latter shows sharp fractured edges in place of the smooth contours here seen. Above Allen Point, on almost level ground that would normally be deep in glacier, there are several large and almost bare patches, with stones and rock showing through a very thin covering of snow. We think these patches at least afford evidence that the south-eastern corner of the island still retains some traces of volcanic heat. As on other islands the lowest strata seen in rock exposures are usually of black basalt, often columnar in structure, and it is of basalt that the outlying rocks are formed. Above it red and yellowish tuffs with some hard grey rock are to be found. At several points the rocks are clearly stratified, showing three or more horizontal layers of dark grey rock separated by narrow bands of red tuff. Sometimes yellow tuff with red inclusions was to be seen and frequently the rocks were much contorted and intersected by dykes. At the north-eastern corner of the island are low cliffs formed of a light grey rock, perhaps volcanic ash. E. W. A. Scarlett, Accountant, staff of Discovery Committee. 1 > H. Horsburgh, Technical Officer to the Discovery Committee, Crown Agents for the Colonies. 3 J. O. Borley, O.B.E., member of the Discovery Committee. + Belinda Kemp. 6-2 176 DISCOVERY REPORTS Penguins are scarce on the island and were seen only in small numbers on Allen and Scarlett Points. Two Weddell seal were noticed on some rocks on the north-east side, with another near by on an ice floe. No sign of plant life was seen anywhere. The only recorded landing is by Larsen, who with some difficulty succeeded in putting two men ashore on some rocks “at the southern point of the island” —pre- sumably on Allen Point. BRISTOL ISLAND Lat. 59° o14’ S; long. 26° 31’ W (Plates XXIV, XXV and XXVI; Fig. 15) This island is roughly oval in shape, with a projection on the north side ending in Fryer Point! and with Harker Point? in the south. From east to west it is about 5 miles in length, and from north to south 4? miles; its circumference is 14 miles. The highest point of the island is Mt Darnley, 3600 ft. in height, situated to the south of the middle. To the north-east is a second summit of about 1600 ft., and in the east is a conical hill, 1200 ft. high, which forms a conspicuous land-mark (Plate XXV, figs. 1, 3; Fig. 15 a). On the south side of the island is a great bluff of rock, rising very steeply from the water- line to a height of 1900 ft. yaa aan fom. ( a DA Fig. 15. Bristol Island: sketches by Lt.-Cmdr. J. Irving. a. From the N by E: distant about 6 miles. b. From the SW: Grindle Rock, the inner of the three outlying rocks about 1 mile distant. c. Freezeland Peak from the NE: bearing 220° and distant 3:2 miles. To the west of the island stand three rocky islets of imposing appearance. The outer- most, situated 3 miles from the mainland, is a magnificent structure, with a towering pillar of rock goo ft. in height and a lesser summit of about 620 ft. (Plate XXVI, figs. 1, 2; Fig. 15 c). This rock was the landfall that Cook made when he discovered the South Sandwich Group, and he named it Freezeland Peak after the man who first sighted it. The middle and inner rocks, which we have named Wilson Rock! and Grindle Rock,® are respectively 500 and 700 ft. in height (Plate XXVI, figs. 3, 4). D. H. Fryer, Lt.-Cmdr., R.N., Captain of H.M. Surveying Ship ‘Fitzroy’. A. Harker, of Messrs Flannery, Baggallay and Johnson, Consulting Naval Architects. E. R. Darnley, Chairman of the Discovery Committee. Sir Samuel H. Wilson, G.C.M.G., K.C.B., K.B.E., Permanent Under-Secretary of State for the Colonies. ® Sir Gilbert E. A. Grindle, K.C.M.G., Permanent Under-Secretary of State for the Colonies. 1 2 3 4 DESCRIPTION OF THE ISLANDS: BRISTOL I. 177 At Bristol it is possible to anchor, with good holding ground and protection from wind, anywhere on the northern and eastern sides; but the shape of the island permits the swell to follow round, no matter what its direction may be. South of Grindle and Wilson Rocks there is very deep water, and between them is a basin, apparently en- closed, with depths of over 50 fathoms. This passage is navigable, as is that between Wilson and Freezeland where soundings of not less than 25 fathoms were obtained. Between Grindle Rock and the mainland is a continuous reef with breaking water. Bristol Island is deeply covered with glacier, which extends to the coast in every direction (Plate XXV, figs. 1-3): on the eastern side and to the west of Fryer Point are uninterrupted glacier faces each more than three miles in length. At a number of points the structure of the rock is exposed in steep cliffs, with the glacier hanging above. Measurements were made of the height of the glacier face on the eastern side of the island, and the heights obtained at four points as we moved southwards along the coast were 175, 210, 140 and 260 ft. We think that the average thickness of the ice-covering on all the glaciated islands (Montagu, Bristol, Cook and Thule) may be reckoned at 200 ft. No steam was seen rising from any part of the island: we are satisfied that all volcanic activity has ceased, and nowhere did we see any indication that the ground still retains warmth. Looking back on the island from the north, on our passage to Montagu, we noticed that the highest parts of the island had the shape of a horse-shoe, suggesting that they once formed part of the rim of a large crater. The appearance is shown, though not very clearly, in Plate XXV, fig. 3. We were not able, however, to come to any definite conclusion on this point: the crater, if it ever was one, must have been very large, with a diameter of about two miles. The rocks on Bristol are similar to those on the other islands. At Fryer Point black basaltic lava is to be seen and the rock exposures on the bluff on the south side, at the western headland and in other parts, are of yellowish and red tuff, or tuff conglomerate, sometimes stratified with a grey rock interposed between the layers, but frequently much contorted and with many intrusive dykes. From a geological point of view the three large outlying rocks appear to be more interesting than any other place in the entire group of islands (Plate XXV, fig. 4; Plate XXVI, figs. 1-4). The great pillar on Freezeland is composed of a pale brown rock of a kind not seen elsewhere. It showed distinct signs of bedding and in the upper part of the column some broad reddish bands. We believe this may be a sedimentary rock. ‘The eastern part of Freezeland, forming the lesser of the two summits, is different; it is formed of a brownish rock, with vertical fissures and striation, and may be meta- morphic. Wilson Rock, nearer the mainland, is a vast mass of black columnar basalt, while Grindle Rock repeats the reddish and yellowish tuffs seen on the adjacent headland of the island. Thus, if our conjectures are correct, the whole succession of rock formations in the Sandwich Group is to be found in these three islets. Freezeland shows the only likely exposure of the underlying sedimentary series that we know to exist, Wilson is of the overlying basalt, here seen in far greater thickness than elsewhere, 178 DISCOVERY REPORTS while Grindle is formed of the superposed tuffs which are characteristic of all the islands of the group. On the main island penguins were seen at one point only—a small rocky headland on the south-western side. They have, however, established themselves in numbers on Freezeland, where the slopes of talus from the higher rocks appear to afford an at- tractive site. No penguins were to be found on Wilson Rock, but they occur on Grindle, where also there are some small but conspicuous patches of bright green vegetation. On all three islets great numbers of Silver-grey petrels were seen. Leopard seal were noticed in the water off the penguin rookeries on Freezeland. Larsen reports that he landed some men on Bristol to look for Fur seal, but found none. He does not state where the landing was made. It might be possible to land on Freezeland in exceptionally good weather, but it would be difficult, as the shore is fringed with boulders among which a heavy surf breaks. SOUTHERN THULE GROUP Cook gave to this group of islands the name of Southern Thule; he saw the land only from a distance and thought it might be a projecting headland of an Antarctic continent. Bellingshausen, forty-five years later, sailed round the group, and describes it in the following manner: ‘Thule consists of one high rock and three small islands, of which one is notably smaller than the others. These islands are high and unapproachable, and lie in Lat. 59° 26’ S, Long. 27° 13’ 30” W. The middle one, the largest, is about six miles long; I called it Cook Island, in honour of the great explorer....The most westerly island is three miles long and the smallest is two-thirds of a mile in length. Between the two largest islands we found a rock; all three were covered with snow and ice.” On his chart, however, Bellingshausen shows only two islands: the western is named Thule Island and the eastern “‘ Kun Island’’, and the rock lies off the south-east corner of the former. Since then, for more than a century, practically no additions to our knowledge of the group have been made, though interest was aroused by Morrell’s statement in 1832 that there is a good harbour on the north-east side of the westernmost island. In 1928, how- ever, Mr J. E. Hamilton in a catcher belonging to the whaling factory ‘ Anglo-Norse’ reported that he had seen the third island described by Bellingshausen and had steamed through the strait lying between it and the island adjacent to it. In The Antarctic Pilot (1930) Bellingshausen’s name has been appropriately used for this third island, and two sketches of it by Mr Hamilton are reproduced. Our chart of the other two islands differs considerably from that shown in Bellings- hausen’s atlas; there is, however, a similarity in general outline, and the rock is approxi- mately in the position in which he placed it. Contrary to Morrell’s statement there is no harbour in the islands, but a good anchorage exists at the south-east corner of Thule Island. - Bellingshausen Island is a volcano which still shows signs of activity. Thule and Cook DESCRIPTION OF THE ISLANDS: SOUTHERN THULE GROUP 179 Islands are covered deep in glacier and the way in which they have been formed would probably have been misinterpreted, or have remained obscure, were it not for an inter- esting discovery which we owe to our echo-sounding apparatus. With this apparatus we found that a very deep basin exists between Cook and Thule Islands in Douglas Strait.? In the middle it has soundings of over 400 fathoms, while at the north and south 4S 358 ela 94 5 106 j24i se ute 240 22 is2 a ree 2 178 ‘81 19 140 168 x 43 lei5 7 \30 32 HH OSA 27 \ ROCKS AWASH a, ROCK AWASH eens scan ‘5 BEACH POINT Ke ae easeeeectnee @ & 49 78 a s co? 9 ng 6218995 2 L 165 206 241 258 301307 355 BIB 330 343 «364 373 37 33 x 350 351 346 162 342 389 378 39 aseeed Rae REEF POINT Ye 1 SEA MILE 21 42 60 69 71 69 Fig. 16. Chart of Douglas Strait, Southern Thule, showing soundings in the submarine crater. entrances there is less than 20 fathoms. That the basin was once a volcanic crater scarcely admits of doubt. It is probable that by its eruption it originally formed one large island, and that of this island Cook and Thule are the only portions now remaining. 1 Rear-Admiral H. P. Douglas, C.B., C.M.G., member of the Discovery Committee. 180 DISCOVERY REPORTS The soundings taken in Douglas Strait, with the approximate positions of the 200, 300 and 400 fathom contours, are shown in Fig. 16. It will be seen that deep water extends close up to the eastern and western shores where the coast on both sides is formed of high precipitous cliffs and steeply sloping glacier. The northern entrance to the strait is closed for a great part of its breadth by a reef with sunken rocks extending eastwards from Beach Point. The southern entrance is narrower and lies between the end of the rocks off Reef Point and Twitcher Rock, from which shoal water extends towards Thule Island. Observations were made on the plankton and hydrology of this submerged crater at a station situated near the middle of the strait. A sounding with the Lucas machine gave a depth of 358 fathoms (= 655 metres). ‘The bottom sample was of black mud, and its strong smell of sulphuretted hydrogen indicated that the lower layers of water were stagnant. Table II. ] Station re 368 9 He peers a a ae ae ie Between Bellingshausen and ia we: g Bristol Islands Depth : a Ag Ge Sia iae aC: S) I Fathoms Metres fo) ) Orr 34°02 0°28 34:01 555 10 (op Ke) 34°04 0°22 34°01 II 20 (op Ce) 34°05 0:20 34°01 16 30 0:09 34:05 o18 34:00 22 40 0:07 34°05 0:08 34°04. 27 50 0505 S05 = (FIO S507 33 60 0°05 34°05 — 0°39 34°16 44 80 0°02 34:07 — 0-60 34°24 55 100 O-o1 34°10 — o'9I 34°41 82 150 = 0:10 34°11 — 0°50 34°50 109 200 — 0-78 34°16 — 031 34:58 164 300 = 1260 34°36 — 0°05 34°60 219 400 — 1:60 34°36 Orl5 34:67 328 600 — 1:63 34°36 0°22 34°67 437 800 = = or19 34°69 547 1000 = = Orl4 34°69 820 1500 — — — 0:05 34:08 ‘The temperatures and salinities are given in Table II, and with them, for comparison, a similar series taken in the open sea between Bellingshausen and Bristol Islands. ‘The latter series shows the conditions which normally prevail in the area, and it will be seen that four distinct layers of water are to be distinguished by temperature. Below the upper layers, warmed by contact with the air, is a cold stratum with a minimum at 55 fathoms; beneath this is a warm layer with a maximum at 328 fathoms, while at the bottom cold water is again found. In Douglas Strait the temperatures are quite dif- DESCRIPTION OF THE ISLANDS: SOUTHERN THULE GROUP 181 ferent; they decrease from top to bottom, and though they fall quickly between 82 and 164 fathoms, no trace of the usual layering for these latitudes is to be seen. This is due to the fact that the basin is closed. ‘The water that reaches it must flow over either the northern or southern edges, and since the depths here do not exceed 20 fathoms, only that from the homogeneous uppermost layer can find access. Since there is a southerly set of about 1 knot in Douglas Strait the inflowing water will come from the north. It will be noticed that the bottom temperatures in the basin are extremely low, much below any of those in the comparative series. We believe this to be the effect of winter conditions. In winter, and indeed for the greater part of the year, the islands are sur- rounded by pack-ice, which will also invade the strait. Air temperatures will be very low and the pack will remain as a solid frozen mass for long periods. Convection cur- rents will be set up beneath the ice-covering and the whole of the water will become chilled. When the ice disappears circulation will be restored; but it will be limited to the upper layers, the bottom water imprisoned beneath it permanently retaining its winter temperature. The temperatures afford proof—if proof were needed—that no trace of warmth persists in the crater. The figures for salinity indicate by their uniformity in the upper layers that active circulation is in progress down to a depth of 40 fathoms, and in conformity with the temperature readings they also show an abrupt change between 82 and 164 fathoms (Fig. 17). The results suggest that the circulation in the strait, when not closed by ice, is on the lines indicated in Fig. 18. The current running at the surface from north to south will set up a flow in the same direction in the water immediately beneath it, with the return current lying at a depth of 40 fathoms. The latter, by the friction it exerts, will induce a much slower streaming movement in the water below; this will rotate in the reverse direction to that above, and its lower level will be at about 130 fathoms, where both temperature and salinity show that a discontinuity layer exists. ‘The bottom of the basin from 130 to 400 fathoms must be filled with water which is almost or quite motionless. The plankton collections show that in Douglas Strait life exists in considerable quantity down to at least 273 fathoms; for a net hauled from this depth to 137 fathoms (500-250 metres), and then closed, contained numerous copepods and other organisms. In all the nets used below 55 fathoms specimens of a very large red and white amphipod, Eusirus antarcticus, were obtained, and a larger net hauled obliquely from 80 fathoms to the surface caught great quantities of Euphausia superba, the crustacean which in the Antarctic forms the food of Blue and Fin whales. At the bottom itself life is deficient: a dredge brought up a quantity of evil-smelling mud, containing practically nothing beyond three star-fish and a number of Polychaete worms living in black tubes. Few instances of volcanic craters inundated by the sea have been recorded: we know of two only—Deception Island in the South Shetland Group and St Paul Island in the southern Indian Ocean. Both of these have only one opening and both are much shallower than Douglas Strait. At Deception the depth of the water in the crater is 93 fathoms and at St Paul 38 fathoms. Cook and Thule Islands, whose steep cliffs border DIll / FATHOMS 8 SOUTH NORTH 200 300 Fig. 18. Diagrammatic section of Douglas Strait, showing probable circulation of the water. Vertical scale exaggerated nearly three times. DESCRIPTION OF THE ISLANDS: BELLINGSHAUSEN I. 183 Douglas Strait, are permanently ice-bound, and there is consequently little if any drainage into the basin. St Paul and Deception Islands, on the other hand, still show signs of volcanic activity; there is no snow on the former, and on the latter there are large tracts of bare ground. The considerable depths in Douglas Strait are perhaps due in part to this lack of drainage, while with two openings and a comparatively rapid sur- face current suspended matter in the sea water will not readily be deposited. Soundings taken elsewhere round the islands do not show features of any special interest. There is very deep water on both the northern and south-western sides of Thule Island, while Maurice Channel, between Bellingshausen and Cook Islands is shallow throughout, with 14 to 17 fathoms in the middle. Ferguson Bay in Thule Island (Plate XXXI, fig. 1) is the best anchorage in the South Sandwich Group, with good holding ground and protection from the south-west, through west, to east. Other anchorages are to the north-east and south-east of Cook Island, though at these the swell may be heavy. Douglas Strait is too steep to be of much use. BELLINGSHAUSEN ISLAND Lat. 59° 252’ S; long. 27° 034’ W (Plates XXVII and XXVIII; Fig. 19) Bellingshausen Island is the smallest of the Southern Thule Group and lies to the north-east of Cook Island, from which it is separated by Maurice Channel,! 13 miles wide. In striking contrast to its neighbours it still shows evident signs of volcanic activity. In outline it is irregularly oval, hollowed on the eastern side and with Hardy Point? projecting to the west: it has a length of 1-1 miles, a breadth of 8 cables and a circumference of rather more than 3 miles. The single volcanic cone ends abruptly in the ragged edges of a yawning crater, and the highest point, on the northern margin of the latter, is 530 ft. above sea-level (Plate XXVIII, figs. 1-3; Fig. 19). The inner walls of the crater are sheer, or slope very steeply, and steam and vapour were seen rising from a point below the brim. On the southern and south-western sides the base of the cone slopes gently upwards from a plateau; in the west, north of Hardy Point, there are cliffs of no great height, while in the east a sheer wall of rock rises to the crater’s edge. North of Isaacson Point* so much of the rock has split away that it looks as if one more fall would breach the crater to sea-level (Plate XXVIII, fig. 4). The steep eastern and northern sides are practically devoid of snow, but on the south and west sides there are large patches and streaks, interspersed with considerable areas of bare ground (Plate XXVIII, fig. 3). At one point on the south-eastern side, not far below the brim of the crater, steam was issuing from a fumarole. H. G. Maurice, C.B., member of the Discovery Committee. A. C. Hardy, Professor of Zoology, University College, Hull. Miss S. M. Isaacson, attached to Scientific Staff, Discovery Committee. o nw sm He Ao os Vian Fig. 19. Bellingshausen Island: sketches by Lt.-Cmdr. J. Irving. The steam and vapour from the volcano are not shown. From the WSW: Hardy Point to right of centre bearing 064°, distant 1-1 miles. From the SW: Isaacson Point on the right bearing 065°, distant 1-4 miles. From the SSW: Hardy Point on the left bearing o15°, distant 1-6 cables. From the SSE: Hardy Point on the left bearing 318°, distant 9 cables. From the NE: Isaacson Point on the left bearing 240°, distant 6 cables. From the NNE: Isaacson Point on the left bearing 245°, distant 6 cables. From the ENE: North Point on the right bearing 270°. From the W by N: Summit bearing 100°, distant 8-5 miles. DESCRIPTION OF THE ISLANDS: COOK ISLAND 185 The coast-line of the plateau on the southern and western sides is everywhere steep and rocky, and is formed as on other islands of black columnar basalt. The surface of the plateau appears smooth and is probably overlaid with scoria and ash. The cliffs be- tween Isaacson Point and Jagged Point are black, brown and red, and seem to be com- posed mainly of tuff and ash: there are some fallen boulders on the narrow beach at their base. Above Jagged Point a projecting spur forms an irregular knife-edge of curious outline (Plate XXVIII, fig. 4) and the rock here is fine-grained and pale yellowish brown, apparently a hard volcanic mud, with an underlying stratum of black basalt, visible at the water-line. The lower cliffs on the north-east side are stratified with alternate layers consisting apparently of tuff agglomerate and ash. Ringed penguins are very abundant on the island and have formed rookeries near the shore at a number of points. On the north-east side, as already mentioned, small parties of them were seen to have ascended the steep slopes of the cone almost to the brink of the crater and to a height of at least 450 ft. above the sea. For a penguin such a journey must be very arduous, and their object—unless it be to admire the view—is difficult to understand. One or two patches of green vegetation were seen on the plateau and at several places the snow was remarkably stained with reddish pink, yellow and yellowish green. ‘The first of these is the familiar ‘‘ red snow”’, caused by the unicellular alga Chlamydomonas, and samples of it were collected on Thule Island. The yellow and yellowish green patches were probably also due to algae, but of this it was not possible to be certain. There is no record of any landing on the island. Cook Island Lat. 59° 262’ S; long. 27° 093’ W (Plates XX VII and XXIX; Plate XXX, fig. 1; Fig. 20) This island is the largest and highest in the Southern ‘Thule Group. It is rather regularly oval in outline, but in the west there is a shallow bay which faces Douglas Strait and is bounded at the south by Reef Point. Elsewhere only small projections interrupt its even contour: Resolution Point! in the north-east, Swell Point in the east and Jeffries Point? in the south. The island is nearly 3} miles long and 23 miles wide, its longer axis lying east and west; in circumference it is 9} miles. It has three ice- capped peaks, of which Mt Harmer,® situated a little to the north of its middle point, is the highest, having an altitude of 3660 ft. above sea-level. Cook Island is buried deep beneath an ice-cap (Plate XXIX; Fig. 20), and it is only below the hanging glaciers and on headlands that the underlying rocks are visible. The glacier follows the undulations of the rock beneath, and frequent ridges and protrusions where the ice is crevassed indicate inequalities in the surface below, which have not yet H.M.S. ‘Resolution’, in which Cook circumnavigated the globe. 1 * Miss M. E. Jeffries, staff of the Discovery Committee. 8 Sir Sidney F. Harmer, K.B.E., Sc.D., F.R.S., vice-chairman of the Discovery Committee. 186 DISCOVERY REPORTS been worn away by ice action. No measurements were taken of the glacier face, but there is no doubt that it is fully as thick as on Bristol Island. As already explained (p. 179) the crater from which both Cook and Thule originated is probably that now submerged beneath the sea in Douglas Strait. ‘The two are thus fragments of a single much larger island, which in size must have approached Montagu —now the largest of the group. All round the coast is precipitous, alternating between steep rugged cliffs with glacier hanging above them and glaciers reaching to the water’s edge. If small ice-falls down the hill-sides are omitted, there are in all eight glaciers which reach the sea, the largest being half a mile in breadth. The most extensive rock exposures are to be found .- as gph ee Nasee Fig. 20. Cook Island: sketches by Lt.-Cmdr. J. Irving. . From the W: Reef Point on the right bearing rro°, distant about 2 miles. From the NE: Swell Point on the left bearing 203°, distant 3-6 miles. From the SW: Reef Point on the left bearing 009°, distant 1 mile. From the S: Jeffries Point to right of centre bearing 000°, distant 3 cables. eS bordering Douglas Strait, and in the south-east between Swell Point and Jeffries Point. The rocks here, and indeed at all points where they are visible, are yellow, red or brown in colour, sometimes showing signs of stratification, but always very much crumpled and contorted, often seamed with dykes of grey rock and sometimes apparently with large intrusive masses of brown material showing vertical striation. Cook Island differs from all the others of the group except Leskov in that, so far as we were able to observe, penguins are entirely absent. They are certainly extremely scarce, and this is evidently due to the very steep coast which is at no point suitable for a rookery. On the high cliffs facing Douglas Strait, myriads of Silver-grey petrels were perched and we think it more than probable that they nest here. There is no record of any landing on the island. DESCRIPTION OF THE ISLANDS: THULE I. 187 Thule Island Lat. 59° 262’ S; long. 27° 193’ W (Plates XXVII and XXX, figs. 2-4; Plate XXXI; Fig. 21) This island, the westernmost of the Southern Thule Group, is roughly crescentic in outline, with a large bay in the east, bordering Douglas Strait, and with Cape Flannery* projecting to the west. Its extreme length, measured in an easterly and westerly direc- tion, is 34 miles; its breadth is 2} miles and its circumference about ro miles. The bay ends in the north at Beach Point (Plate XXX, fig. 3), from which a reef with several rocks awash at the surface extends seawards for over a mile, greatly restricting the entrance to the strait. At the southern end of the bay, situated about half a mile from the island and with breakers and foul ground between, is T'witcher Rock? (Plate XX XI, figs. 3, 4; Fig. 21 e, f). This rock, first seen by Bellingshausen, is a conspicuous feature, rising to a height of 180 ft. At the south-east corner the land, which is here a low plateau, trends to the south; it ends in Hewison Point? (Plate XXXI, fig. 1; Fig. 21 g) and between this and Herd Point? further to the west is Ferguson Bay,’ which affords the best anchorage in the South Sandwich Group. The island rises to its highest point in Mt Larsen,® which overlooks Douglas Strait and is 2230 ft. above sea-level. Like Cook Island, Thule is buried beneath an ice-cap (Plate XXX, fig. 2). In the middle of the south-western side a jagged ridge of black rock protrudes through the glacier; in the south-east the lava plateau ending in Hewison Point is largely devoid of snow (Plate XXXI, fig. 1), and in the north-east the isolated ridge of rock at Beach Point is also bare (Plate XXXI, fig. 3). With these exceptions the ice-cap is practically continuous over the island, the glacier sometimes extending to the water’s edge, but more often breaking off abruptly at the edge of the steep cliffs which form the greater part of the coast-line. Conspicuous silt bands are to be seen in the face of the glacier at the head of Ferguson Bay (Plate XXXI, fig. 2), and on its surface some patches of “red snow’’ were observed. The plateau at Hewison Point (Plate XXXI, fig. 1) is formed of black columnar basalt; on its western side it is cut into a number of small creeks in which a landing could doubtless be made in fine weather. Herd Point is a protruding spur of basalt, as are also most of the rock exposures visible on the south-western side of the island. Near Cape Flannery there are beds apparently composed of yellowish tuff and ash, while at 1 Sir Fortescue Flannery, Bart., member of the Discovery Committee. 2 John Montagu, 4th Earl of Sandwich, was First Lord of the Admiralty from 1771-82, during the period of Cook’s voyages, and the group of islands is named after him. It is said that ‘‘ for corruption and incapacity Sandwich’s administration is unique in the history of the British Navy’. He was notorious for his evil living, and having taken a leading part in the prosecution of one of his former associates in vice, was popularly known by the nickname of “‘ Jemmy T'witcher”’. 3 Lt.-Col. Hewison, of Messrs Ferguson Bros. 4 R. D. Herd, of Messrs Ferguson Bros. ®> Messrs Ferguson Bros., Port Glasgow, builders of the R.R.S. ‘Discovery II’. 6 C. A. Larsen, the pioneer of modern Antarctic whaling. 188 DISCOVERY REPORTS the cape itself there is reddish tuff below and grey rock above. Farther north, at a point with outlying breakers, the rocks are definitely stratified, three layers of ash separated by red tuff lying on a base of black basalt. The isolated ridge at Beach Point is about 150 ft. in height, and is composed of hard grey rock, with outcrops of red tuff, and with Fig 21. Thule Island: sketches by Lt.-Cmdr. J. Irving. a. From the E: Twitcher Rock on the left bearing 180°, distant 1:1 miles. Hewison Point is on the left of the island and Beach Point on the right. Cape Flannery from the NW: bearing 147°, distant 8 cables. Cape Flannery from the SE: bearing 326°, distant 1-5 miles. . From the ESE: Twitcher Rock in the foreground bearing 287°, distant 4 cables. Twitcher Rock from the WNW: bearing 122°, distant 1-4 miles. Twitcher Rock from the NNE: bearing 198°, distant 3 cables. . From the S, showing Ferguson Bay in the centre. Herd Point is on the left side of the bay; on the right is T'witcher Rock and part of Cook Island. Eel ap ge es. ee a soft crumbling black rock, perhaps volcanic ash, at the summit. The steepest cliffs are on the eastern side facing Douglas Strait, and the rocks here closely resemble those opposite on Cook Island. They consist of contorted masses of red, yellow and dark brown, with intrusive grey dykes, the colours showing vividly when lit by a rare gleam of sunshine. In 1911 a landing was effected in Ferguson Bay by members of a whaling expedition DESCRIPTION OF THE ISLANDS: THULE I. 189 under Capt. Ole Jorgensen (see p. 141); here we ourselves attempted to go ashore but were unable to do so owing to the heavy swell. Near Beach Point, however, we were more successful, Dr E. H. Marshall and Mr T. J. Hart landing in a pram on a shore composed of pebbles and boulders. The seal on the beach were found to be mainly Weddell seal, about forty in all, together with two Elephant seal and several adult and one young of the Leopard seal. The beach is evidently a resort for Leopard seal during the breeding season, for it was littered with excreta containing penguin feathers. At Beach Point there is a rookery of Ringed penguins, with some patches of green vegeta- tion similar to those seen on other islands. The plant proved to be an alga and has been identified by Mr G. Tandy as Prasiola crispa, a species of very wide distribution. Among the earth in which this plant was growing two species of mites and a single insect, a Collembolan, were found. A sample of ‘‘ red snow”’ (Chlamydomonas) was taken. Some brackish pools, formed apparently by melted snow, appeared to be without life, but in mud scraped from the undersides of stones lying in the water some ciliate Protozoa were obtained. Geological specimens were collected, but unfortunately several of the most characteristic types of rock did not occur at Beach Point. Dill 190 Age of islands, 155 Albatross, 157 Algae, 158 Anchorages, 147, 158, 162, 168, 175, 183 “Anglo-Norse’, 143, 144 Antillean Arc, South, 154 Attraction, local magnetic, 147 Bellingshausen, F. G. von, 136, 139, 143, 144, 146, 158, 165 Bellingshausen I., 144, 150, 178, 183 Birds, 135, 156 Biscoe, J., 140, 143 Bristol, I., 138, 152, 176 Brown, J., 140, 143, 156, 162 “Busen VII’, 142, 143 Candlemas group, 139, 140, 165 Candlemas I., 150, 168 Cape Bristol, 138, 139 Cape Montagu, 138, 139 Cape pigeons, 156 Compass deviation, 147 Cook, J., 136, 143, 146, 165, 174, 8 17 Cook I., 140, 152, 185 Crab-eater seal, 155 Crater, submerged, 179, 180 Currents, 147, 181 ‘Deutschland’, 141, 143, 148, 165 Dingsér, B., 142 Dredging, 135, 141, 144, 181 Echo-sounding, 135, 148, 179 Elephant seal, 155 ‘Endurance’, 142, 143 Eruptions, volcanic, 150 Fanning, E., 140, 162 Filchner, W., 141, 143, 161, 165, 167 Fish, 157 Freezeland Peak, 138, 154, 176, 5 dil Fricker, 140, 165 Fulmar, Silver-grey, 156 Fumaroles, 160, 164, 183 Fur seal, 155 Geological specimens, 141, 154, 189 Geology, 135, 141, 154, 177 Glaciation, 153, 177 Glaciation in 8. Shetlands, 153 Gregory, 154 INDEX Gull, Dominican, 157 Hamilton, J. E., 143, 178 Hansen, H., 142, 143, 167, 173 Harbours, 147 “Havfruen’, 141, 142 History, 136, 165, 178 Hobbs, 153 Holtedahl, 142, 153, 154 Hydrology, 135, 145, 180 Icebergs, 144, 146 Ice-cap, 153, 170, 177 Ice conditions, 135, 138, 139, Win) We Ice formations, 153, 164, 173, 187 Itinerary of ‘ Discovery II’, 144 Jorgensen, O., 141, 143 Kelp, 158 Landings, 136, 139, 140, 141, 143, 147, 160, 188 Larsen, C. A., 136, 140, 143, 157, 160, 162, 166, 167 Leopard seal, 155 Leskov I., 139, 152, 161 Lichens, 158 ‘Lively’, 140 Magnetic attraction, 147 Magnetic variation, 147 Marquis de Traverse Is., 139 Mecking, 156 ‘Meteor’, 148 Mill, H. R., 139 ‘Mirnii’, 139, 143 Mollymauk, 157 Montagu I., 138, 152, 174 Morrell, 140 Origin of islands, 150 ‘Pacific’, 140, 143 Pack-ice, 135, 138, 139, 142, 146, 181 Penguins, 139, 156, 170, 185 Petrels, 157 Plankton, 144, 181 Priestley, 153 ‘Quest’, 142, 143 “Red snow’, 158, 185, 187, 189 ‘Resolution’, 136, 143, 185 Rock specimens, 141, 154, 189 Salinity of water, 181 Sandwich, Earl of, 187 Sandwich Land, 139, 140 Saunders I., 139, 150, 152, 172 Seals, 155 Seaweeds, 158 Sedimentary rocks, 154, 177 Set, 147 Shackleton, 142, 143 Sheath-bill, 157 Skuas, 157 Snow petrel, 157 Soundings, 135, 148, 167, 177, 179 South Sandwich Deep, 148 Southern Thule, 138, 139, 178 Sulphur, 160, 168 Survey, methods employed, 135 Surveys, previous, 136, 139, 145 Temperature of air, 145 Temperature of water, 180, 181 Terns, 157 Thule I., 140, 152, 187 “Thulla’, 141, 143 Time signals, 147 ‘Tonsberg Whaling Co., 142 Trawling, 145, 157 ‘Tula’, 140, 143 Tussac grass, 157 Twitcher Rock, 187 ‘Undine’, 140, 143 Variation, magnetic, 147 Vegetation, 157 Vindication I., 152, 167, 170 Visokoi I., 139, 150, 162 Volcanic activity, 147, 150, 152 of Bellingshausen I., 183 of Candlemas I., 142, 168 of Leskov I., 161 of Saunders I., 142, 172 of Visokoi I., 140, 143, 162 of Zavodovski I., 140, 142, 160 Volcanic eruptions, 150 ‘Vostok’, 139, 143 Weddell seal, 155 Whale-birds, 157 Whalers, 142, 143, 156 Whales, 156 Wild, F., 142, 143, 160 Wind, 147 Wireless time-signals, 147 Worsley, 142 Zavodovski I., 139, 150, 152, 158 Zoology, marine, 141, 157, 181 19I APPENDIX REPORT ON ROCK SPECIMENS FROM THULE ISLAND, SOUTH SANDWICH ISLANDS By G.W. DYRRELL, A-R-€:Se., DiSc., E-G:S., F-RS:E- Lecturer in Geology, University of Glasgow. THE specimens, fifteen in number, were collected from the scarp at Beach Point (see the foregoing Report, pp. 188-9). Eight of them were obtained from rock zn situ on the face of the cliff and at its summit. The remaining seven were beach pebbles. It is stated in the Report (p. 188) that the ridge is about 150 ft. in height, and is composed of hard grey rock with outcrops of red tuff, and a soft crumbling black rock, perhaps volcanic ash, at the summit. The specimens collected im situ bear out this description. From the labels attached to the material, and from the petrographical examination, the following ad- ditional facts have been elicited. Six specimens were obtained from a steep escarpment at about 50 ft. above sea level. Of these, four are dacite lavas with good flow structures, and two are pyroxene-andesites containing both monoclinic and orthorhombic pyroxenes. From the fact that a black slaggy andesitic lava with red crusts, diagnosed in the field as ‘tuff’, was obtained at a height of 100 ft. above sea level, it is inferred that the upper part of the cliff, from the too ft. level at any rate, consists of a flow, or flows, of andesite lava, whilst the dacite specimens probably came from underlying flows. At the top of the cliff, 150 ft. above sea level, a true andesite tuff was obtained, which probably repre- sents the final explosive discharge of the volcano after the andesite lava had been ejected. The seven beach cobbles and pebbles consist mainly of dacites and andesites entirely similar to those found zn situ. In addition there is a specimen of a basic type of andesite containing a notable amount of olivine, and one of andesitic pumice. PETROGRAPHY. The dacites (or dacitoids) are greyish green, reddish, or purplish, compact, non-por- phyritic rocks, the colours of which obviously vary according to the state of oxidation of their iron. Colour streaks and bands, and a somewhat platy fracture, indicate a flow structure which is prominent in all specimens when seen in thin section. Under the microscope these rocks are found to consist mainly of feldspar microlites which are arranged in more or less parallel streams indicating flow, embedded in a dense, irresolvable, cryptocrystalline base. The microlites are of plagioclase, and are referred to oligoclase as they give straight or nearly straight extinctions. The only other identifiable constituents of the ground-mass are minute spots and streaks of iron oxides which, when in the form of haematite or limonite, produce the prevailing purplish and reddish tints of the rocks. There are also tiny crystals of strong birefringence which may be identified as augite in coarser streaks and bands which are to be found in one of the specimens. Rare microphenocrysts of andesine (Ab,;An,), which are some- times euhedral, and sometimes curiously corroded, are the only other crystalline 8-2 192 DISCOVERY REPORTS constituents of these rocks. Quartz does not appear, although the chemical analysis (see Table II, 1) discloses no less than 30 per cent of free silica. Two of the slides show included fragments of a coarse-grained olivine-andesite consisting of plagioclase laths, elongated crystals of augite studded with granules of magnetite, and sporadic olivine, in a glassy ground-mass which has been partially devitrified with the production of ill-defined feldspathic material and quartz. The angularity of these xenoliths, and the fact that they have obviously chilled a sur- rounding zone of lava with the production of an opaque envelope of iron ores, indicate that they are fragments picked up by the lava as it flowed over the surface, and not cognate xenoliths brought up from great depths. Table I Analyses of Dacites, etc. I A B C D | SiO, 69°45 67°71 66°39 69°56 66-9 Al,O, 14°20 14:65 17°62 15-65 | 16:6 Re,O; 2°83 1°59 | I'O1 I-24 Bal FeO 3°24. 3°29 2:21 o-91 I°4 MgO 0°25 0°85 | 1°32 0-82 12 CaO 3°05 2°34 | Sym) 2°52 3°3 Na,O 415 60g 449 4°09 41 K,O 1°51 1-99 2°13 1 2°19 2°5 H,O + 0-40 0-16 0°39 ree H,0 — ss — — foe oe ee ees INO) O15 1:00 | 0°33 — OB POF O14 0-16 — 0°13 | o'r MnO 0:07 — — | — 0-04 (Ni, Co)O Nil _ — — Co, Nil — _- — = | iS) Trace _- — | — — | 10004 99°83 99°68 | 100'03 | 100-04 Dacite (Dacitoid), Thule Island, South Sandwich Islands. Anal. F. Herdsman, A.R.S.M. A. Hyalodacite (‘“‘Trachyte”’), Deception Island, South Shetland Islands. Quoted from H. S. Washington, “Chemical Analyses of Igneous Rocks”, Prof. Paper 99, U.S. Geol. Surv. pp. 242-3 (1917). Also see G. W. Tyrrell, Trans. Roy. Soc. Edin. Lu, pt 1, p. 71 (1921). B. Quartz-diorite, dredged block from sounding in lat. 70° S, long. 81° W (Paris), West Antarctica. Quoted from H. S. Washington, op. cit. pp. 266-7. C. Dacite, Guaitara Slope, Loma de Ales, Colombia. Quoted from J. P. Iddings, Igneous Rocks, 11, p. 496 (1913). D. Dacite, mean of thirty analyses. Quoted from G. W. Tyrrell, Principles of Petrology, p. 124 (1926). i] The chemical analysis of a composite sample of three specimens of dacite lava from the 50 ft. cliff is given in Table I, 1. It is there compared with an analysis of the hyalodacite of Deception Island in the South Shetland group, which appears to be its closest affinity in the West Antarctic region (Table I, A). The analyses are closely comparable, although the Deception Island rock has higher total alkalies, and a higher ratio of soda to potash, than the Thule Island rock. The closest plutonic analogue to ROCK SPECIMENS 193 these dacitic lavas in the West Antarctic region is a quartz-diorite (Table I, B) from a dredged block. The most comparable Andean lava is a dacite from Colombia (‘Table I, C). The average dacite (Table I, D) compares closely with the rock under investigation, but is richer in potash relatively to soda, and is somewhat less siliceous. The normative mineral compositions of these rocks, computed under the rules of the American Quantitative Classification, are set out in Table II. The Thule Island dacite is there shown to compare remarkably well with the average dacite (‘Table II, D), but is somewhat richer in quartz and poorer in orthoclase, features which are also shown by the Colombian dacite (Table II, C). The assignment of the Thule Island lava to the dacite group is therefore well founded; but since the quartz is mostly occult in the cryptocrystalline ground-mass, Lacroix’s term dacitoid,' applied to rocks of this chemical character in which quartz is not mineralogically expressed, is more appropriate than dacite. On the evidence of the minerals actually seen in thin section, and without a corrective chemical analysis, this rock would probably have been called oligoclase- andesite. Table II Norms of Analyses in Table I. | I A | B Cc D Quartz 31-4 | 18°5 | 20°9 30°5 24°9 Orthoclase 8-9 11-7 12°2 12°8 15°0 Albite 35°71 51-4 38:2 34°6 34:6 Anorthite 14°5 6-4 18-9 12°5 15°6 Corundum O74 = rare) 2:0 I°4 Diopside — 3:7, — — — Hypersthene 4:0 By3 59 2°8 30 Magnetite 4:2 2°3 I-4 16 Bu Ilmenite 0°3 2:0 0-6 — 0-6 Apatite 03 03 Lo 03 03 The norms are arranged in the same order as the analyses in Table I. The symbols of these analyses in the American Quantitative Classification are given below: I. I (3) 4 (2) 3 4 A. I (11) 4 1) ie B. iy 4 we 4 (ep I "4 De 4 D. ie 4 (2)3 4 The andesites are hypersthene-augite-andesites usually containing a little olivine. In some specimens the olivine becomes a fairly prominent constituent, but without lessen- ing the andesitic character of the rocks, and the term olivine-andesite may then be employed. Olivine-andesites, often called andesitic basalt, basaltic andesite, or simply basalt, are common in many andesitic lava fields. They are, however, easily distinguish- able on chemical and mineralogical grounds from true basalts. 1 Comptes. Rendus, Paris, CLXVIII, p. 297 (1919). 194 DISCOVERY REPORTS The Thule Island andesites are dark grey or purplish grey compact rocks without conspicuous crystals, although many, very small, microporphyritic feldspar crystals may usually be detected on close inspection. Some of the specimens are highly vesicular or slaggy; one is pumiceous. In thin section the analysed rock, collected from a shore boulder, shows numerous microphenocrysts of euhedral plagioclase, with much less abundant hypersthene and augite, and fresh but rare olivine, in a ground-mass consisting of minute laths of plagioclase feldspar, intermingled with grains of pyroxenes and iron ores. Only a very small amount of cryptocrystalline or glassy base is present. As a whole the rock is highly feldspathic, and is of andesitic, not basaltic, character, notwithstanding the presence of a little olivine. The phenocrystic feldspar is highly zonal, ranging from labradorite (Ab, An,) at the core to oligoclase on the margin. These feldspars also carry numerous inclusions of ground-mass constituents which are always arranged in regular zones with reference to the margins of the crystals. The ground-mass feldspar is of somewhat more sodic composition and seems to be mainly andesine of composition about Ab,An, . The hypersthene is faintly pleochroic; the augite, however, is practically colourless. Other rocks of much the same character, but with a finer ground-mass, and consider- ably richer in an obscure glassy base, come from the 50 ft. escarpment, and from the slaggy lava surface (or base) at the 100 ft. level. One of the shore specimens may also be associated with this group, but shows in addition a well-marked flow structure. Another specimen from the 50 ft. escarpment shows the phenocrystic constituents embedded in red and black glassy matter which carries only a few scattered microlites of feldspar and pyroxene. The olivine-andesites are represented by three beach pebbles. In their general characters these rocks conform very closely with the second type of andesite lava described above, but are somewhat richer in olivine which also occurs in larger crystals. A pebble of andesitic pumice in thin section shows a solidified froth of colourless isotropic glass in which scattered crystals of plagioclase, hypersthene and augite are entangled. The tuff which occurs at the 150 ft. level at Beach Point is composed of little angular fragments of andesite and dacite, mostly of the more vitreous, slaggy, vesicular, and altered types, embedded in a paste consisting of comminuted particles of the same materials, mingled with a few angular grains of quartz, and detached feldspars. In the only published account of rocks from the South Sandwich Islands O. Backstrém! has described rock types very similar to the above from Candlemas Island. He states that the lavas of Candlemas are mostly reddish porphyritic rocks in which the feldspar phenocrysts are occasionally so numerous as to produce a whitish appearance. The feldspar is a basic labradorite (Ab,;An,;), and the pyroxene is hypersthene with mantles of augite. The latter mineral also occurs independently. Corroded crystals of olivine are present in a few of the rocks, which Backstrém regarded as basalts transitional 1 “Petrographische Beschreibung einiger Basalte von Patagonien, Westantarktika, und den Siid- Sandwich-Inseln”, Bull. Geol. Inst. Upsala, xi11, pp. 115-82 (1915). South Sandwich Islands, pp. 163-76. ROCK SPECIMENS 195 to andesites. From Saunders Island he described an “ olivine-free basalt”’, consisting of plagioclase (with An;;~,;), an almost colourless pyroxene of the enstatite-augite series, and magnetite. An analysis of this rock, which is reproduced in Table III, 1, was given. Hypersthene-andesites are common lavas in the Andes and in the South Shetland Islands. Table III Analyses of Andesites, etc. . ‘i I 2 A B Cc | SiO, 52°68 | 54-90 57°30 61-80 59°2 Al,O, 16:38 17°62 17°97 18-65 16:8 FeO; Burr 2°70 | 27 2°08 Ber FeO 7:98 6-80 3°79 2°49 3°6 MgO 747 3°93 2°57 2°60 31 CaO 8-08 9°05 6-72 6°41 6:6 Na,O 2°75 2°90 3°25 4°51 3°4 K,O 0°44 0°54 0-96 0-82 M77 ae 3 0:20 oe 4:26 0°25 Tet TiO, 0-77 0°70 0°56 0°50 o-7 P50; 0°02 0-09 0°20 o-18 0-2 MnO 0-16 0:23 — 0-08 0-2 (Ni, Co)O — Nil _ — — CO; — Nil — — S Trace Trace — O-O1 = Cl 0°05 — = => - 3 100°09 99°96 99°75 100'66 99°7 1. ‘Olivine-free basalt”, Saunders Island, South Sandwich Islands. Anal. N. Sahlbom. Quoted from O. Backstrém, Bull. Geol. Inst. Upsala, x11, p. 173 (1915). Hypersthene-andesite lava, Thule Island, South Sandwich Islands. Anal. F. Herdsman, A.R.S.M. Hypersthene-andesite lava, Admiralty Bay, King George Island, South Shetland Islands. Anal. Lassieur. Quoted from H. S. Washington, “‘Chemical Analyses of Igneous Rocks”, Prof. Paper 99, U.S. Geol. Surv. p. 419 (1917). B. Hypersthene-andesite lava, Mt Burney, Patagonian Andes. Anal. G. Nyblom. Quoted from P. D. Quensel, Bull. Geol. Inst. Upsala, x1, p. 107 (1911). C. Average hypersthene-andesite, computed from 114 analyses of rocks called hypersthene-andesite and pyroxene-andesite (containing hypersthene) from Recent and Kainozoic volcanoes and lava fields of the circum-Pacific region (including the East and West Indies), and certain European fields (Sardinia, Hungary, Aegean Sea). > A chemical analysis of the hypersthene-andesite of Thule Island by F. Herdsman is displayed in Table III, 2. It is there compared with the analysis of the “‘ olivine-free basalt” of Saunders Island (1), the hypersthene-andesite of Admiralty Bay, King George Island, South Shetland Islands (A), and the hypersthene-andesite of Mt Burney (B), one of the southernmost volcanoes of the Andes. As a standard of com- parison a new average analysis of hypersthene-andesite has been computed from 114 analyses found in Washington’s compilation and more recent literature (C). This average hypersthene-andesite differs remarkably little from the average which was computed some years ago on the basis of 71 analyses, including, however, some pre- Kainozoic examples.! 1G. W. Tyrrell, “Some Tertiary Dykes of the Clyde Area,” Geol. Mag. (6), Iv, p. 310 (1917). 196 DISCOVERY REPORTS With the exception of the average analysis the analyses in Table III are arranged in order of increasing silica. With that increase there are concomitant decreases in ferrous iron, magnesia, and lime, increases in potash and soda, but with practically constant alumina, showing that the chemical variations within this group of andesites arise chiefly from variations in the relative proportions of the felsic and mafic groups of minerals. The lavas of the South Sandwich Islands are clearly among the more basic types of andesite, but are distinguishable from basalts by their richness in feldspars, the frequent presence of orthorhombic pyroxenes, and their comparatively high degree of supersaturation with silica (see the norms, Table IV, 1 and 2). The Saunders Island rock, however, is very near the borderline of the andesites and basalts. The South - Shetland and Patagonian lavas are much closer to the average hypersthene-andesite, as is well shown by the norms (Table IV). A notable chemical feature of the hypersthene- andesites of the region under consideration is their poverty in potash as compared with the average hypersthene-andesite. Table IV Norms of Analyses in Table III. I 2 A B c Quartz 3:6 9:2 I5‘1 14:7 14°3 Orthoclase 2°2 2°8 5°6 5:0 10°0 Albite 23°6 24-6 27°8 38-3 | 28:°8 Anorthite Bier 33°6 31°4 28-1 25°6 Diopside 7°4 8-7 09 2°2 or Hypersthene 25°7 14°9 10:2 7:6 8-6 Magnetite 4:4 3°9 Biz 3:0 4°4 Ilmenite I°5 14 Ter 0:9 I°4 Apatite _ 073 0°3 0°3 0°3 i The norms are arranged in the same order as the analyses in Table III. The symbols of the rocks in the American Quantitative Classification are as follows: I. (11) UI 5 4 Ms 2. II 4 (5) 4 (4) 5 A. “TT 4 (3) 4 4” B. (1) 4" 3 (4) 5 (Ce II 4” a 4 The mineralogical variations corresponding to the above-described chemical variations are shown from left to right in the table of norms (‘Table IV) by the increasing free silica, increasing orthoclase, increasing ratio of albite to anorthite, with a concomi- tant decrease in the amount of pyroxenes. The norms also illustrate the curious fact, which was also pointed out in a former paper (Tyrrell, op. cit. supra, p. 311), that andesites which show no visible quartz may nevertheless contain up to 15 per cent. of free silica. They must therefore be derived from magmas which, under plutonic conditions, and with a little differentiation in the direction of further separation of mafic minerals, would give rise to such rocks as tonalite and quartz-diorite, namely, the ROCK SPECIMENS 197 plutonic types which occur most frequently in the cores of fold-mountain ranges such as the Andes in association with andesite lavas. This fact is worth emphasizing because andesites are frequently thought of as the volcanic representatives of the diorites only. CONCLUSIONS. The geology of the South Sandwich Islands, and its bearing on the disputed question of the tectonics of the “South Antillean Arc”’ of Suess, is discussed on p. 154 of this Report. The writer has also recently discussed the question in his paper on the petro- graphy and geology of South Georgia,! in which he states that : “‘ If Suess’s homology of the Southern Antillean loop with that of the Caribbean Antilles were complete, the Andean type of volcano erupting andesitic lavas, and batholithic masses of the typical Cordilleran andendiorites and granodiorites in the cores of the mountain chains, should be present. They are, however, entirely wanting, with the possible exception of the South Sandwich Islands, about which the geological information is very scanty”’. The typical Andean lavas described in this Report therefore go far to support Suess’s view of the tectonic relations of the “Southern Antilles”. The writer has also pointed out (op. cit. supra, p. 53) that the South Sandwich Islands, according to O. Pratje’s map,? are situated on an arcuate ridge which, to the east, is followed by a profound but narrow deep, and that, in its turn, by another narrow submarine ridge, both of which run parallel to the are of the South Sandwich Islands. Hence in all probability we have here two parallel arcs of folding separated by a deep. ‘These facts, which are supported by the statement in this Report (p. 154) that the echo soundings taken during the Expedition show conclusively that most of the submerged portions of the South Antillean Are can still be traced in the relief of the sea bottom, therefore seem to indicate an enormous protrusion of circum-Pacific tectonic structures, accompanied by circum-Pacific lava types, for 1500 miles into the heart of the alien tectonic region of the Southern Atlantic Ocean, conditions which are found nowhere else in the whole vast extent of the Atlantic Ocean except in the Caribbean region. 1 * Quest’ Expedition Report, British Museum (Nat. Hist.), chapter 11 (1930). See especially pp. 51-4. > O. Pratje, ‘‘ Beitrag zur Bodengestaltung des Siidatlantischen Ozeans”’, Cenir. f. Min. Abt. B, pp. 129- 52, Map, p. 132 (1928). ee oil? mond moe bnslei sd3 io Ms sq Istinso ofT ix .gt _(wogsv bar rasase Jo buols ot wnolotl a pal m ss janteib °sps gaimsd ad nso ano lt to qo? ont of eorlossr doisiw saeatt goo! sit to be adit ytatbiedye @xuy esqole rewol odi ao esrotsg dash ont to smo@ .n99e -wone %o biovsbh bie orinw ai bauorysi0l srt ct usstslg sd3 .eiste20 ule tesW 2: Hol aris nO 424 ant soit ages birelet oli Io heT ss por bas Sane oot et bryorg wrote? nl .eolins O-s santetb | ERE Botteed teow sail oil lin csi Sleacd ont | si Wi . PREY), fA \ cae a N, Marshall phot. Fig. 3. sf q ry 7 : _ ZAVODOVSKI ISLAND : : “ i n Ay ‘ ee .. ie of an Te ~ SS i : Ye i _ ae PLATE XIII Zavodovski Island (p. 158) Fig. 1. The central part of the island seen from the E: the summit bearing 242°, distant 2-2 miles. Below the cloud of steam and vapour, the end of the long fissure which reaches to the top of the cone can be seen. Some of the dark patches on the lower slopes are subsidiary craters; the plateau in the foreground is warm and devoid of snow. Fig. 2. Part of the island seen from the SSE. On the left is West Bluff, bearing 343°, distant 2:6 miles. In the foreground is the southern end of the basalt plateau, with the steep western cliffs seen on the left. Note that snow can only lie on the eastern side of the cone. Fig. 3. Part of the island seen from the W. West Bluff is in the fore- ground to the left of the middle, bearing 143° and distant 5 cables. Above the headland is the opening of the main crater, with clouds of steam and sulphurous vapour rising. On the hill-side to the right a fumarole can be seen. DESCOVERY, REPORTS, VOL. III , PLATE XIII ZAVODOVSKI ISLAND - ree nie) ee LJ — fogss spay OnE SWOHLVS 4) SENIONNOS qaez Ut szystey . (INWISLE AOMSH'T sig er (S¢64 Pen. Ses - aay 4 et | | iE: 3 gine ——— pastel wold bas-basiel ree ™ 2 SE Sanh : _ 7 = ; Fo Ey I in tn PO Gy MC ea te EID a Cogss MUG TINEA SWOHiwW3s “§ SONIONNOS qeag Ue sag Frey (INV TISI 1OMOSLA o. ae ial Df ‘ Ply uindaay Sex 08 I vie . w + +z axsao 9 DY £s. 2 Sey ts ce (qyPloone - UOSPOH WN PLATE “X1TV. Charts of Visokoi Island and Leskov Island DOIIp) OIF SAM O13 epnytsuoy —z1 Q08's9 Fors Yoenyon Oogel spaIG TONyON SWOHiIVW4A N!' SONIGNNOS SWOHIV4 Ni SONIGNNOS 420g ur syy sey qeayq ut s7y3 rap GANW'ISIT AOMSHT Q(NW'ISI IOMOSIA (47?) 000€ + UOSPOH AW IF 48 2 i y SX } ad jor ja adury REeE 0c a6 Wat # ‘TH TOA ‘SLHOdaHU AUDAOOSIGA Vy Ma | A ) F ij O1 .G) DORA VE 2 j i) - " f i t i ee ofr ak rc 1 { i Led | i y + i oC By { { ai 1S A a Pi 9G i =| ty f4 os ; a4 4 (ro ith G 10 GHE GM St so in tO ‘ . > +. Sus g CES oe) Ti 3G * 2 OG 7th z yt > be AEM | WA a ri : i ? “ee fi ' e yy Cc ea ne, bye (rk , | i) 4 TA ta . 4 fAtrer Aa BV 4 - ) ; , | : ‘ \ , ; . . : iene | ew) hue | br ae , om o Pa), a 4 han nt F ? gel ed a “PLATE XV Leskoy Island (p. 161) Fig. 1. The conical rock at the south-east corner of the island seen from the WSW: the summit of the rock bearing 065°, distant 5 cables. The rock is 375 ft. high and is formed of columnar basalt. Visokoi Island (p. 162) Fig. 2. Part of the island seen from the E. Penguin Point is to the right of the centre and is the site of a large penguin rookery; it bears 250°, distant 6 cables. On the right the surface of the glacier is much blackened by dust and debris. Fig. 3. Glacier face on the south-eastern side of the island, showing ridges and pinnacles of ice probably caused by radiation from dust particles. DISCOVERY REPORTS, VOL. III PIVAGIE, XV E. H. Marshall & A. J. Clowes phot. Bigaeas LESKOV AND VISOKOI ISLANDS SWOHIVE 4! SeNIGHNDS qweg wm eq@iey SCN IST SVNGATINYVO * cy ie ed S 4 eS ae oes ‘Se; © sykaaane ae PLATE XVi Chart of Candlemas Islands ji =i 3 ae 2 | l o0s'tg 2TOIG TOInqonL SWOHIVW4S N' SONIGNNOS qaoq ut syqdray SANV'IST SVINHTANV) “te LES9 inges SS $9 99 9L G Ne eer z9 8&9 ‘9 £9 a oh we. $2 Fe % \ \ ; NOTLVOTQNIA Rid PISSOLD ___ (son t? yu 200 “TAX WLW Td ' ‘ : — . “TH TOA ‘SLHOdAU ANMAOOSIG an - NN Op eee ee ee j 3 1.0 f ~ 2° wee 7 Ppa — 2 ¥ € f = e wire 93 Ria ? ; | 1 ney 7 £ LY i . « _ j 2 a of er t 7 ms if rm € { . J, Sieeeel 1 fe . mi 1 J Lietel o ‘alate % ‘ fi l iaia : 1 .<}) DAE POU FE i - J . WLM Sat MOT sos hos Wy i ; io Dt 1 4 + aso ial RK moo Momw at SM 282) 86 DODNTPITt £ PLATE XVII Candlemas Island (p. 168) Fig. 1. The island seen from the NW at a distance of about 5 miles. At the back are seen the high glaciated summits of the south-eastern part of the island; in front the north-eastern basaltic plateau with its active volcanic cone. Fig. 2. The rocks in Nelson Strait seen from the N, distant 8 cables. On the left is Cook Rock; Trousers Rock, showing an arch, is in the centre ; on the right is Low Point, Vindication Island. Fig. 3. Rocks of columnar basalt on the shores of Tow Bay. Vindication Island (p. 170) Fig. 4. Crosscut Point seen from the NNE: the point bearing 205°, distant 1 mile. The projecting points on the headland are of hard rock, intruded as dykes in the softer tuffs which compose the greater part of the island. SGNV1ISI NOILVOIGNIA GNV SVNYIGNVO y0yd ASDA OA Q 1PYSMOYN "HA fre iia. ~- IIAX @LV'Id III ‘IOA ‘SLUOddauY AUAAOOSIAG : 4 ee = pets — i we ae ee ) o oe ae ae he | re Ve ae : nied sve ir boxze tina ead 2 +0 wey nen ; : se sa ) bh SSEBIGRD oy 1 re 3Si{tARteih n 1592 iis 9 oka ; wed str MEY S oS Mette i 1 PF ‘ ' ° ; ’ i ; é « ; ! _ ’ ANID VEIN GD if rcs NDS é b # ; PLATE XVIII Candlemas Island (cont.) Fig. 1. Part of the south-eastern side of the island near Shrove Point, seen from the NE, distant 4 cables. Showing glacier breaking away at the water’s edge. Fig. 2. Shrove Point with its covering of glacier seen on the right. In the distance is Vindication Island, its northern (right-hand) point bear- ing 280°. Vindication Island (cont.) Fig. 3. The island seen from the E, the summit bearing 295°, distant 24 miles. On the left are Castor and Pollux Rocks and Knob Point; Low Point is on the right. DISCOVERY REPORTS, VOL. III PAG AVIE XOVALT E. H. Marshall phot. Fig. 3. CANDLEMAS AND VINDICATION ISLANDS | 5 7 rae a - 7 7 - a = _ : Re EEA Od PS Se Re ee — “a a 7 a ¥ + - i — 7 7 » 7 a ¥ yee hi oy ow *- ~ . e ad 7 . Peale : " Te ; | er es 7 > oz i a — ; _ oe ee *. * _ * =e ay ia * j SG). ~s 4 Pal eh 28 mE ee ee x 4 aol PLATE XIX Chart of Saunders Island. 2 : ; ; ‘ | YSTMUD SIE) MOIS |S9M SZ OG, 1Fu0'T 3 Be 6 08 le ce ee we 8 1 ail i aie iat I l 1 die i ais ats i 1 it L ,OS s : oS SS: Sen eg 69 99 09 99 85/4 ‘ES on > : \e a6: (5788) 0 4, igor neSoat y : ze a SS 3 19 S58) hig Sy, 6 ; eB » 92 As B oF “e | | es ; /6t ; rea Ie > es 20 Mnys €sy Le : 9 SEED tz 5 ze 2 \ z et a Ni A, oz\. 3 \ /8v : ; ov9a Z a ISEYD!W AW E ‘ sr | a “ee ) ze ad Soo) ee : 4 Jee Lt . : ee oLQ E os td za Kreyooy ives umbuag aS » zi 94 | N : $ : | “3 ras es E F oe : oe sy SIO GOLT Uy ae j Bs Tz/ 61 ‘ og ee y : pe ei : ere i ogee Knwosy, sypang i 61 | sy . BR ff ae \ » \ . . 2 ; ‘Sb ee . coe Wh FE ae a x . e y IW ey hoe 4 a fh i mie AN ‘ \oz \ + a Ye, fe SWOHLV4 4! SONIGNNOS 7 = f * ae ey... 61) qoag ut 894910} x or le ot 9 is oz uz og a 42 6% Le 4t 1a 9% 9 FE CN "ISI SAUHANAVS ye ga Gz TBE Ge) 9%) 198) Se) nes) OR) 6) RENEE V I a | 0% te a4 ns te $8 OZ, iz 22 04 ; Ae AR 1G 5 7 i XIX WLW 1d basket ad¥ 30 yrotnomorq otstzes boeogz: oif3 to deigis ort 03 =< 16 fae 10 bum otrsaloy ai barrio , p:arrsiail aeons suntan yd Siclsue 2) ad oe & - a ‘ = is ‘ ; 7 . & ae — PLATE XX Saunders Island (p. 172) Fig. 1. The active volcano of Mt Michael, seen from Cordelia Bay: the summit bearing 250°, distant 24 miles. Fig. 2. The southern side of the eastern promontory of the island, showing a section of a crater, formed in volcanic mud or ash and exposed by a fall of the cliff. View taken from the SE, the peak to the right of the crater bearing 310°, distant 7 cables. Fig. 3. A nearer view of this section of a crater, distant 3} cables, show- ing the radial grooves formed on its surface by melting snow. DISCOVERY REPORTS, VOL. III SAUNDERS ISLAND PLATE XX PLATE) XX Saunders Island (cont.) Fig. 1. Distant view of the island from the N. On the left the bare hills forming the south-eastern promontory: on the right the glaciated cone of Mt Michael. The Brothers Rocks, seen opposite the left-hand ter- mination of the glacier, bearing 190°, distant 2 miles. Fig. 2. A large crater, apparently extinct, seen across the southern slopes of Mt Michael at a distance of about 9 cables. In Fig. 1 this crater lies behind the Brothers Rocks. Fig. 3. A nearer view of the bare hills on the left of Fig. 1, taken from the NE. These hills are formed of volcanic mud or ash; owing to their warmth snow is rapidly melted and has scored deep runnels and ravines in their surface. Fig. 4. Nattriss Point, at the south-eastern end of the island, taken from the N. This point, seen also on the extreme left of Fig. 1, stands on a platform of columnar basalt, and bears 180°, distant 5 cables. Fig. 5. A small mound of warm mud protruding through the glacier at a point to the west of the bisected crater shown in Pl. XX, fig. 2. The melting snow has carried runnels of mud towards the sea over the surface of the glacier. View taken from the ESE at a distance of about half a mile. GNV'ISI SYAQGNNVS IXX OLV1d III “IOA ‘SLUOdaY AUAAOOSIG Stage 202% 8 ees 4 IIZK ATA baslal ugstnoM to s1sd9D ao t rf 2 = ? | a a a 2 | = 2 D = Natural Seale ga 556 Heights in Fert SOUMODINGS in FATHOMS MONTAGU 18 PLATE XXII Chart of Montagu Island AT YOTMUBAIH DOL 989M 0% 5G7 apnzguey 000'se r SOF PTPPGS TOLrqPON SWOH1v4 §! SONIGNNGS aay UT szyFIey icons Tet GNW IST NOVLINOW GIO!) 4 keg suphag oosy epuyjag yn; - == AL | ny eit Ss ————= QE ——- SEF glee) vi 1B: ! ex ta & 6 ? Bor S708 Sb py 19 4 : Sat 9 8S 9¢ on slits . PLATE XXU i ‘ ae a7 K 38 {avr aq) bielal es rien 1p Oey eee: PLATE XXIII Montagu Island (p. 174) Fig. 1. The conical hill, 1660 ft. high, at the south-east corner of the island: the summit bearing 000°, distant 1-3 miles. There are indications at several points that this promontory still retains some of its volcanic heat. Fig. 2. The north-eastern end of the island, seen from the NNW at a distance of 6 cables, showing rock exposures and a glacier falling in broken masses of ice to the sea-level. Fig. 3. Part of the northern side of the island, viewed from the N and distant 5 cables, showing cliffs and a hanging glacier. DISCOVERY REPORTS, VOL. III IPILYN ANID, DOI E. H. Marshall phot. Fig. 3. MONTAGU ISLAND .. ie ey — - syngas ry P - My * anergy ” “ . a ee * oo PX | pous § ; - + Vetere TerKareD / -Y | ms y ee" ot 7 | pid ne i C™/ as * oy A * oF es et a * De .t : y 4? at i iy rL we » ; 5 + [ — ‘ Sty a f y gd a ? fea jae al 7 . As + a 7 Z ; pe Ne Oe eee eo i asellltaadbtnet IXX ATAII ? basil loteinl Yo sed) 4 3 fs SS ee + es ~*~ < 1 ns : 4 2 s a - i 7 ¥, PN METeg ¢ \ ? o : y ; ‘. comreiee ad a : : e ) = " b 4 . a? ” “= - s* ii hand '¢ © . “” a - o oy 8 i bse 4 = a _ at Pe Le “7 ai : < — qo” 7< . Pa = 6 } mee SW Oe pe ein er ar cree ie we we oe or gu : n® - coe speg owas ; ; snovive * ¢omoNnos \ \ ; nang ee emB Cay E , ; = ae ~ : ae 7 |) = es PLATE XXIV. Chart of Bristol Island. 9% 4 ee mn 2 ee oe , AX DLW 1d 58.98 | eee eS ee ek ee a 99 2 OL 26. on 891 PE oye Ss Lz LE of og 82 > OE Ny =< betes oe oe Sz Ie uth, (s0r)006 ~& ~ : 0096 (70) / Aejusea aw H 1 OF, es" * OO9I'Re) O01 = apoog Ye.rremAy SWOHLY4 “! SONIGNNOS eq UL sTysTOH GNW ISL 'TO.LSIdd PLATE XXV Bristol Island (p. 176) Fig. 1. The north-eastern side of the island seen from the NNW, showing heavy glaciation. Glacier Bluff is on the extreme left. The conical hill on the left is 1200 ft. high and bears 150°, distant 34 miles. Fig. 2. Part of the north-western side of the island. Sunlight and shade on the glacier. Fig. 3. The whole island seen from the N by E, distant 6 miles. Fig. 4. The outlying rocks on the western side of the island, seen from the W. On the right Freezeland Peak bearing 095°, distant 1-4 miles. To the left of the centre Wilson Rock, with the summit of Grindle Rock seen above it. On the extreme left the western point of Bristol. GNV‘1ISI IOLSIU4d “youd ]jPYSADN ‘Hd "2 BUT "1 BI III “IOA ‘SLUOdaY AUYAAOOSIG AXX ULV Id = ee Sa | is —— a oa FP “ ae m) - a > e -~rn elal Iq = cf be ; ‘ ner é ‘ a s—< ’ - e oil) 54 i ot x £ ony 6 eae | us) I 10. : i t fis! orlt 9d he dates 2 - Sry OF .¥ i JV é i aight si 4 rot I th ran : 156 * 20 TH S033 174 ’ / nn 7760 ii 3% = e fk -.: =IB3d Feces ord 3% £18 rl I it x { t q } - fo ae ? rt ¥ dosid To bseaqntos ‘ ; fe 1 2901 Br i =. eS1cisD I fg odo 1 Vi bolts D 1 9ibe Pons, J ' 4 £ , 2 t : if | , , { ; 7 té ) 1 f Tits i sg 1s 1 ) &t SIE i is! (erwoiley PLATE XXVI Bristol Island (cont.) Fig. 1. Freezeland Peak, the land sighted by Cook when he discovered the South Sandwich Group in 1775. The rock is seen from the N, the summit bearing 165°, distant 7 cables. The great pillar on the right, goo ft. high, is thought to be of sedimentary rock, while the lesser peak on the left is possibly metamorphic. Fig. 2. Another view of Freezeland Peak, seen from the SW, with the summit bearing 045°, distant 54 cables. The slopes of talus on this rock are the resort of large numbers of penguins. Wilson Rock and part-of Grindle Rock are seen in the background. Fig. 3. Wilson Rock, 500 ft. high, seen from the SW, the summit bear- ing 060°, distant 54 cables. This rock is entirely composed of black columnar basalt. Fig. 4. Grindle Rock, 7oo ft. high, seen from the W, the summit bearing ogo°, distant 3 cables. The rock is mainly composed of the reddish and yellowish tuffs which are a characteristic feature of most of the islands. GNV1ISI IOLSIY&@ THO SHOOU “oyd [JBYSAD IN “H “AL “2 IAXX ALVId III “IOA ‘SLUYOdaY AUAZAOOSIG SWOH iva": SOMIANNOS qeeg Bt equdiay dNOUD ATIOHL NYAHLAOS | ms WE ¢ yes, 295 = = gor ka eat anwrae ae ow ies 42 _ = : a Pa dp rr + sor J aener “=. seis ox ; a : aos piaee Ss aA ? a tp ZO, , Mets a «4 ee OS : be pe IRON OF + or Fes ys I as Oe, ie = wks (eS? ey af em Yor ge nee - ae bos rez ‘tee « 18 we is 28} woe a sce moll © Ex ad ; oe zoe Z gon ) a # oo Ty TIVaUon a ‘ i ur OS aes a os : bo bord < -O8ee scope 2 ris orn? WE - oo ~ es SSe PTL : . - , > yo @2 TONG ae > Wtronsw=y Sas oa pelt = 75% wp tee oe me ee ead < ‘a “ 3 a u 4 vz yi, : S ad a ad mm fee Oe ee 2 : a - GZ : er a in : - “ wy. +h. g . o 3,2 ad Dey or Ps M5. “ap, Sal oe 8 ay oy i 5 r = sv eercs) peek eer : P . re a os é “ yoo qo gi x ; “ — ay ie io (® re : os: 7 ow. on ae . os ok is rae HP Dret! ceapery rad a { ee : me REM 9 te as ar gx ks se 2 4 NAS OWNS ORI 'TISA pee a Er es os ' we ; ra ‘ORs a we om pt stir t iv ay wr Sc oe wee : : ; atl for a me me zit H id owe at M8 ore » . S BS TE ae 3: ce tee SH ee fe te PLATE XXVII Chart of the Southern Thule Group. /{ Tovees a) WorF 489M 01/,,2 epugiduo7y (ELEN @To0sS (TPOLTTTONT SWOHIW4d NI SONIGNNOS qaoq ut sqyusioy daOWD ATOH.L NYdHinos Le Or ELE 9 EX pte EZ SF ee Sy. T TICUVUOW jes 1 7 +~OEEZ uassetW i yo WTAH L Yysvaew o20y at mor sr TIT N@SOVHSONTTUSE 0000000000 jipeee nt &r zoe ie ee, ee ee) asec: ob Sti 901 on * on *: z @ £6 16 28 22 coroy se oes tS "“TIAWY WWW s+ SG ng eR PLATE 3